DL205 Analog I/O Modules

DL205 Analog I/O Modules
DL205 Analog
I/O Modules
Manual Number D2--ANLG--M
WARNING
Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com, doing business as,
AutomationDirect. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone who installs or uses this
equipment should read this publication (and any other relevant publications) before installing or operating the
equipment.
To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes that regulate
the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area and usually change with time. It is
your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and to verify that the equipment, installation, and
operation are in compliance with the latest revision of these codes.
At a minimum, you should follow all applicable sections of the National Fire Code, National Electrical Code, and the
codes of the National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). There may be local regulatory or government
offices that can also help determine which codes and standards are necessary for safe installation and operation.
Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable codes and
standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for your particular application,
nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation, or operation.
Our products are not fault--tolerant and are not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on--line control
equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail--safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities,
aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in
which the failure of the product could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental
damage (”High Risk Activities”). AutomationDirect specifically disclaims any expressed or implied warranty of fitness
for High Risk Activities.
For additional warranty and safety information, see the Terms and Conditions section of our Desk Reference. If you
have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need additional information,
please call us at 770--844--4200.
This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At AutomationDirect we
constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to make changes to the products and/or
publications at any time without notice and without any obligation. This publication may also discuss features that may
not be available in certain revisions of the product.
TRADEMARKS
This publication may contain references to products produced and/or offered by other companies. The product and
company names may be trademarked and are the sole property of their respective owners. AutomationDirect
disclaims any proprietary interest in the marks and names of others.
Copyright 2009, Automationdirect.com Incorporated
All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual shall be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any way without the prior, written consent of
Automationdirect.com Incorporated. AutomationDirect retains the exclusive rights to all information included in
this document.
AVERTISSEMENT
Nous vous remercions d’avoir acheté l’équipement d’automatisation de Automationdirect.commc en faisant des
affaires comme, AutomationDirect. Nous tenons à ce que votre nouvel équipement d’automatisation fonctionne en
toute sécurité. Toute personne qui installe ou utilise cet équipement doit lire la présente publication (et toutes les
autres publications pertinentes) avant de l’installer ou de l’utiliser.
Afin de réduire au minimum le risque d’éventuels problèmes de sécurité, vous devez respecter tous les codes locaux
et nationaux applicables régissant l’installation et le fonctionnement de votre équipement. Ces codes diffèrent d’une
région à l’autre et, habituellement, évoluent au fil du temps. Il vous incombe de déterminer les codes à respecter et de
vous assurer que l’équipement, l’installation et le fonctionnement sont conformes aux exigences de la version la plus
récente de ces codes.
Vous devez, à tout le moins, respecter toutes les sections applicables du Code national de prévention des incendies,
du Code national de l’électricité et des codes de la National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). Des
organismes de réglementation ou des services gouvernementaux locaux peuvent également vous aider à déterminer
les codes ainsi que les normes à respecter pour assurer une installation et un fonctionnement sûrs.
L’omission de respecter la totalité des codes et des normes applicables peut entraîner des dommages à l’équipement
ou causer de graves blessures au personnel. Nous ne garantissons pas que les produits décrits dans cette publication
conviennent à votre application particulière et nous n’assumons aucune responsabilité à l’égard de la conception, de
l’installation ou du fonctionnement de votre produit.
Nos produits ne sont pas insensibles aux défaillances et ne sont ni conçus ni fabriqués pour l’utilisation ou la revente
en tant qu’équipement de commande en ligne dans des environnements dangereux nécessitant une sécurité absolue,
par exemple, l’exploitation d’installations nucléaires, les systèmes de navigation aérienne ou de communication, le
contrôle de la circulation aérienne, les équipements de survie ou les systèmes d’armes, pour lesquels la défaillance du
produit peut provoquer la mort, des blessures corporelles ou de graves dommages matériels ou environnementaux
(”activités à risque élevé”). La société AutomationDirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite d’aptitude à l’emploi
en ce qui a trait aux activités à risque élevé.
Pour des renseignements additionnels touchant la garantie et la sécurité, veuillez consulter la section Modalités et
conditions de notre documentation. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de l’installation ou du fonctionnement de cet
équipement, ou encore si vous avez besoin de renseignements supplémentaires, n’hésitez pas à nous téléphoner au
770--844--4200.
Cette publication s’appuie sur l’information qui était disponible au moment de l’impression. À la société
AutomationDirect, nous nous efforçons constamment d’améliorer nos produits et services. C’est pourquoi nous
nous réservons le droit d’apporter des modifications aux produits ou aux publications en tout temps, sans préavis ni
quelque obligation que ce soit. La présente publication peut aussi porter sur des caractéristiques susceptibles de ne
pas être offertes dans certaines versions révisées du produit.
Marques de commerce
La présente publication peut contenir des références à des produits fabriqués ou offerts par d’autres entreprises. Les
désignations des produits et des entreprises peuvent être des marques de commerce et appartiennent exclusivement
à leurs propriétaires respectifs. AutomationDirect nie tout intérêt dans les autres marques et désignations.
Copyright 2009, Automationdirect.commc Incorporated
Tous droits réservés
Nulle partie de ce manuel ne doit être copiée, reproduite ou transmise de quelque façon que ce soit sans le
consentement préalable écrit de la société Automationdirect.com Incorporated. AutomationDirect conserve les
droits exclusifs à l’égard de tous les renseignements contenus dans le présent document.
1
Manual Revisions
If you contact us in reference to this manual, be sure to include the edition or revision number.
Title: DL205 Analog I/O Manual
Manual Number: D2--ANLG--M
Edition/Rev
Date
Description of Changes
Original
1/94
original issue
2nd Edition
4/95
New Edition
3rd Edition
9/97
Added new modules
4th Edition
4/99
Added new modules
5th Edition
5/00
Added new modules
6th Edition
4/02
Added new modules
6th Edition Rev A
6/02
Added DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs and removed references to DL250 CPU
(Note: DL250 has same functionality as DL250--1 except
for local expansion I/O capability.)
6th Edition Rev B
8/02
Minor corrections
7th Edition
8/05
Added new F2--8AD4DA chapters 15 and 16;
miscellaneous minor changes
7th Edition Rev A
11/06
Added information about changes to F2--04THM jumper
link locations in chapter 7.
7th Edition Rev B
4/10
Added information about jumper link locations and some
input specifications changes on F2--04AD--1,
F2--04AD--2, F2--08AD--1, F2--08AD--2, and
F2--02DAS--2 modules. Added R Wide input range to
F2--04THM spec table.
1
Table of Contents
i
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Purpose of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental lManuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Topics for Each Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input Module Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channels per Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linearity Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum Inaccuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accuracy vs. Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Points Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base Power
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relative Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Output Module Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channels per Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linearity Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum Inaccuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accuracy vs. Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base Power Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RelativeHumidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Points Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Appropriate Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wide Variety of Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1--2
1--2
1--2
1--2
1--3
1--3
1--3
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--5
1--5
1--5
1--5
1--5
1--5
1--5
1--5
1--5
1--5
1--5
1--5
1--5
1--5
1--5
1--5
1--6
1--6
1--6
ii
Table of Contents
Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combination Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Made Easy -- Four Simple Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1--7
1--7
1--8
1--8
1--9
Chapter 2: F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel
Analog Current Input
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Loop Transmitter Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or or DL260 CPU
(Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding the Input Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Channel Indicator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Diagnostic Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Channel Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Power Failure Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering Input Noise (DL250--1, DL260 CPU Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2--2
2--3
2--3
2--3
2--4
2--5
2--5
2--6
2--6
2--6
2--7
2--8
2--9
2--9
2--10
2--10
2--11
2--11
2--12
2--12
2--12
2--13
2--13
2--13
2--15
2--16
2--16
2--16
2--17
2--18
Chapter 3: F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel
Analog Voltage Input
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3--2
3--3
3--3
3--3
3--4
3--5
iii
Table of Contents
Selecting the Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Input Signal Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Scanning Sequence with a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . .
Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding the Input Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Data
Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Channel Indicator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Diagnostic and Sign Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Bipolar Ranges (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Channel Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Bipolar Ranges (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using 2’s Complement (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Power Failure Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering Input Noise (DL250--1, DL260 CPUs Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3--5
3--6
3--7
3--7
3--7
3--7
3--8
3--9
3--10
3--10
3--11
3--11
3--12
3--12
3--12
3--13
3--13
3--14
3--14
3--14
3--16
3--17
3--18
3--18
3--19
3--20
3--20
3--21
3--22
Chapter 4: F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Loop Transmitter Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Scanning Sequence with a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . .
Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding the Input Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Channel Indicator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4--2
4--3
4--3
4--3
4--4
4--5
4--5
4--6
4--6
4--6
4--6
4--7
4--8
4--8
4--9
4--9
4--10
4--10
4--11
iv
Table of Contents
Module Diagnostic Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Values Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Channel Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Power Failure
Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering Input Noise (DL250--1, DL260 CPU Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4--11
4--11
4--12
4--12
4--12
4--14
4--15
4--15
4--15
4--16
4--17
Chapter 5: F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Input Voltage Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . .
Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding the Input Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Channel Indicator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Diagnostic and Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Bipolar Ranges (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Channel Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Bipolar Ranges (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using 2’s Complement (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Power Failure Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering Input Noise (DL250--1, DL260 CPUs Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5--2
5--3
5--3
5--3
5--4
5--5
5--5
5--6
5--7
5--7
5--7
5--8
5--9
5--9
5--9
5--10
5--10
5--10
5--11
5--11
5--11
5--12
5--12
5--12
5--14
5--15
5--15
5--16
5--17
5--18
5--18
5--19
5--20
v
Table of Contents
Chapter 6: F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RTD Input Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Conversion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RTD -- Resistance Temperature Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ambient Variations in Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . .
Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Negative Temperatures 2’s Complement (Binary / Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding the Input Assignments (Multiplexing Ladder Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Channel Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BrokenTransmitter Bits (Pointer and Multiplexing Ladder Methods) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Magnitude Plus Sign Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading 2’s Complement Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering Input Noise (DL250--1, DL260 CPUs Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6--2
6--2
6--2
6--3
6--4
6--5
6--5
6--5
6--5
6--6
6--7
6--7
6--7
6--7
6--8
6--9
6--9
6--10
6--10
6--11
6--11
6--11
6--13
6--15
6--15
6--16
6--16
6--16
6--17
6--18
6--18
6--19
Chapter 7: F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermocouple Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermocouple Input Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrate Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Conversion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7--2
7--2
7--3
7--3
7--3
7--3
7--4
7--5
7--5
7--5
7--6
7--6
7--7
vi
Table of Contents
Thermocouple Conversion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Conversion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AmbientVariations in Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . .
Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Negative Temperatures 2’s Complement (Binary / Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding the Input Assignments (Multiplexing Ladder Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Channel Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Broken Transmitter Bits (Pointer and Multiplexing Ladder Methods) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Magnitude Plus Sign Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading 2’s Complement Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Resolution16-Bit (Unipolar Voltage Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Resolution 15-Bit Plus Sign (Bipolar Voltage Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering Input Noise (DL250--1, DL260 CPUs Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7--7
7--7
7--8
7--8
7--8
7--9
7--9
7--9
7--11
7--11
7--12
7--12
7--13
7--13
7--13
7--15
7--17
7--17
7--18
7--18
7--18
7--19
7--20
7--20
7--21
7--21
7--22
7--23
Chapter 8: F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel
Analog Current Output
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Output Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . .
Understanding the Output Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8--2
8--3
8--3
8--3
8--4
8--5
8--5
8--5
8--6
8--6
8--7
8--7
8--8
8--9
8--9
8--9
8--10
8--10
8--11
vii
Table of Contents
Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Data (Multiplexing ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Data to One Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending the Same Data to Both Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating the Digital Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8--11
8--11
8--13
8--14
8--14
8--15
8--15
Chapter 9: F2-02DA-2, F2-02DA-2L 2-Channel Analog
Voltage Output
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Output Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Range and Output Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . .
Understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
the Output Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Select Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal Sign Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bipolar Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating the Digital Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Negative Values with Bipolar Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Values (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Data (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Data to One Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending the Same Data to Both Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9--2
9--3
9--3
9--3
9--4
9--5
9--6
9--8
9--8
9--8
9--8
9--8
9--9
9--9
9--10
9--11
9--11
9--11
9--12
9--12
9--12
9--13
9--14
9--14
9--15
9--16
9--16
9--18
9--20
9--20
9--21
Chapter 10: F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Output Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10--2
10--3
10--3
10--3
10--4
10--5
viii
Table of Contents
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Update Sequence with a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
the Output Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Select Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating the Digital Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pointer Method Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Data (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Data (Multiplexing Example) Continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Data to One Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10--5
10--5
10--5
10--6
10--6
10--7
10--7
10--8
10--8
10--8
10--9
10--10
10--10
10--10
10--11
10--11
10--12
10--12
10--14
10--15
10--16
10--16
Chapter 11: F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Output Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Range and Output Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . .
Understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
the Output Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Select Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating the Digital Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pointer Method Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Data (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11--2
11--3
11--3
11--3
11--4
11--5
11--5
11--6
11--6
11--6
11--6
11--6
11--7
11--7
11--8
11--9
11--9
11--9
11--10
11--10
11--10
11--11
11--11
11--12
11--12
11--14
ix
Table of Contents
Writing Data (Multiplexing Example) Continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--15
Sending Data to One Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--16
Analog andDigital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--16
Chapter 12: F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA 2-Channel
Analog Current Output
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Output Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . .
Understanding the Output Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating the Digital Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engineering Units Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Data (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Data to One Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending the Same Data to Both Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12--2
12--3
12--3
12--3
12--4
12--5
12--5
12--5
12--5
12--6
12--6
12--7
12--8
12--8
12--8
12--9
12--9
12--10
12--10
12--10
12--11
12--11
12--13
12--14
12--14
12--15
Chapter 13: F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel
Isolated Output
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Output Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitter Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . .
13--2
13--3
13--3
13--3
13--4
13--5
13--6
13--6
13--6
13--6
13--7
13--7
13--8
x
Table of Contents
Understanding the Output Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating the Digital Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engineering Units Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Data (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Data to One Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending the Same Data to Both Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13--8
13--9
13--9
13--9
13--10
13--11
13--11
13--11
13--12
13--12
13--14
13--15
13--15
13--16
Chapter 14: F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
Combination Analog
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combination Analog Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Loop Transmitter Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) .
Output Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) .
Understanding the I/O Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Channel Indicator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Indicator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Channel Selection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input Power Failure Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating the Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read / Write Program (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Input Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Input Channel Selected (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Output Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Data to One Channel (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending the Same Data to Both Channels (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14--2
14--2
14--3
14--3
14--3
14--4
14--5
14--5
14--5
14--6
14--7
14--8
14--8
14--8
14--9
14--9
14--10
14--10
14--11
14--11
14--11
14--12
14--12
14--13
14--13
14--13
14--15
14--16
14--18
14--19
14--19
14--20
14--20
xi
Table of Contents
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--20
Filtering Input Noise (DL250--1, DL260 CPUs Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--21
Chapter 15: F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out
Analog Current Combination
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware and Firmware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Placement and Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Loop Transmitter Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Channel Scanning Sequence (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Channel Update Sequence (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding the I/O Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special V--Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Configuration Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of I/O Channels Enabled & Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Resolution Selection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Track and Hold Selection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Module to Read / Write I/O (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module 12 Bit Input Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module 14 Bit Input Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module 16 Bit Input Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog and Digital Input Data Value Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Value Comparisons: Analog, Digital, Engineering Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Input Track and Hold Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module16 Bit Output Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital and Analog Output Data Value Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Value Comparisons: Analog, Digital, Engineering Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating the Digital Output Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating Output Data; Engineering Units Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15--2
15--2
15--3
15--4
15--5
15--5
15--6
15--6
15--6
15--7
15--8
15--9
15--9
15--10
15--11
15--12
15--12
15--13
15--13
15--14
15--15
15--15
15--16
15--16
15--20
15--20
15--20
15--21
15--21
15--22
15--25
15--27
15--27
15--27
15--28
15--28
Chapter 16: F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out
Analog Voltage Combination
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware and Firmware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16--2
16--2
16--3
16--4
16--5
xii
Table of Contents
Module Placement and Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Channel Scanning Sequence (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Channel Update Sequence (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding the I/O Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special V--Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Configuration Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of I/O Channels Enabled & Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Resolution Selection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input and Output Range Selection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Track and Hold Selection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Module to Read / Write I/O (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module 12 Bit Input Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module 14 Bit Input Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module 16 Bit Input Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog and Digital Input Data Value Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Input Track and Hold Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module16 Bit Output Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital and Analog Output Data Value Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Value Comparisons: Analog, Digital, Engineering Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating the Digital Output Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating Output Data; Engineering Units Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16--5
16--6
16--6
16--6
16--7
16--8
16--8
16--9
16--10
16--11
16--11
16--12
16--12
16--13
16--14
16--14
16--15
16--16
16--16
16--20
16--20
16--20
16--21
16--22
16--24
16--26
16--26
16--26
16--27
16--27
Appendix A: DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Map
X Input / Y Output Bit Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Relay Bit Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O Bit Map (DL 260 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A--2
A--4
A--8
1
Getting Started
In This Chapter. . . .
— Introduction
— Conventions Used
— Physical Characteristics
— Analog Input Module Terminology
— Analog Output Module Terminology
— Selecting the Appropriate Module
— Analog Made Easy -- Four Simple Steps
1
1--2
Getting Started
Getting Started
Getting Started
Introduction
The Purpose of
this Manual
Supplemental
Manuals
Technical Support
This manual will show you how to select
and install analog input and analog
output modules. It also shows several
ways to use the analog data in your PLC
program. If you understand the DL205
instruction set and system setup
requirements, this manual will provide
the information you need to install and
use the analog modules. This manual is
not intended to be a tutorial on analog
signal theory, but rather a user reference
manual for the DL205 Analog I/O
modules.
How to
Use
DL205
Analog
Modules
The OP-1500 and OP-1510
Operator panels may be
reconfigured to exchange data
with
your
programmable
controller.
You may also want to have a copy of the
DL205 User Manual (D2--USER--M) at
hand when you are working with the
analog modules. The DL205 User
Manual is not absolutely necessary, but
it does provide detailed descriptions of
the instructions used to acquire the
analog data. The User Manual also
provides a more thorough description of
how the I/O points are assigned to the
module. Now, you have the material
necessary to quickly understand the
DL205 Analog I/O modules. So, let’s get
started!
We realize that even though we strive to be the best, we may have arranged our
information in such a way you cannot find what you are looking for. First, check these
resources for help in locating the information:
Table of Contents -- chapter and section listing of contents, in the front
of this manual
S Appendices -- reference material for key topics, near the end of this
manual
You can also check our online resources for the latest product support information:
S Internet -- Our address is
http://www.automationdirect.com
If you still need assistance, please call us at 770--844--4200. Our technical support
group is glad to work with you in answering your questions. They are available
Monday through Friday from 9:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. Eastern Standard Time. If you
have a comment or question about any of our products, services, or manuals, please
fill out and return the ‘Suggestions’ card that was shipped with this manual.
S
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Getting Started
1--3
Conventions Used
When you see the “notepad” icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its
immediate right will be a special note.
The word NOTE: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.
When you see the “exclamation mark” icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to
its immediate right will be a warning. This information could prevent injury, loss of
property, or even death (in extreme cases).
The word WARNING: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.
Key Topics for
Each Chapter
The beginning of each chapter will list the
key topics that can be found in that
chapter.
1
Physical Characteristics
The DL205 Analog Modules provide many features that make the modules easy to
use. With the exception of the Thermocouple module, the terminal blocks are
removable, which makes wiring a simple task.
All of the DL205 analog modules have normal screw terminal connectors. Access
the module terminals by removing the front cover (not shown). To remove the front
cover, press the tab on the lower front corner of the cover. For ease of removal, the
terminal blocks have squeeze tabs on the top and bottom. To remove a terminal
block, press the tabs and pull the terminal block away from the module.
WARNING: For some modules, field device power may still be present on the
terminal block even though the PLC system is turned off. To minimize the risk of
electrical shock, check all field device power before you remove the connector.
Press tabs
to remove
terminal
block.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Getting Started
When you see the “light bulb” icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its
immediate right will give you a special tip.
The word TIP: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.
1--4
Getting Started
Getting Started
Getting Started
Analog Input Module Terminology
We use several different terms throughout the rest of this manual. You do not have to
be an expert on analog terms to use the products, but it may help make it easier to
select the appropriate modules if you take a few minutes to review these definitions.
Channels per
Module
Input Ranges
The total number of analog signals the module receives from field devices.
Resolution
The number of binary weighted bits available on the digital side of the module for use
in converting the analog value to a digital value.
Input Type
Specifies if the module accepts single ended, or differential input signals.
Input Impedance
The resistive load of the module as seen by a voltage or current input signal.
Conversion
Method
PLC Update Rate
The method the module uses to convert the analog signal to a digital value.
Linearity Error
The relative accuracy of the digital representation over the entire input range.
Maximum
Inaccuracy
Maximum absolute error of the digital representation of the signal over the entire
input range. Factors which contribute to maximum inaccuracy are also specified
separately. These factors are full-scale calibration error, offset calibration error, and
accuracy vs. temperature.
Accuracy vs.
Temperature
The variations in the module’s conversion accuracy with temperature over the
module’s operating temperature range.
I/O Points
Required
External Power
Source
The number of I/O points the CPU must dedicate to the module.
Base Power
Required
The amount of base current required by the module. Use this value in your power
budget calculations.
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Step Response
The minimum and maximum temperatures the module will operate within.
The minimum to maximum spans in voltage or current the module will successfully
convert to digital values.
Speed at which the analog signals are digitized and acknowledged in the PLC.
Some modules require a separate 12VDC or 24VDC power source. The 24VDC
output supply at the local base can be used as long as you do not exceed the current
ratings of 300mA.
The minimum and maximum humidity the module will operate within.
The time required for an analog input to reach 95% of its final value at the converter
following a step change in the input signal level.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Getting Started
1--5
Analog Output Module Terminology
The total number of analog signals the module sends to field devices.
Output Ranges
The minimum to maximum spans in voltage or current the module outputs,
converted from digital values.
Resolution
The number of binary weighted bits available on the digital side of the module for use
in converting the digital value to an analog signal.
Output Current
The maximum current the module will drive using a voltage output signal.
Output
Impedance
Load
Impedance
The output impedance of the module using a voltage output signal.
PLC Update Rate
The speed at which digital values in the PLC are converted to analog output signals.
Linearity Error
The relative accuracy of the digital representation over the entire output range.
Maximum
Inaccuracy
Maximum absolute error of the digital representation of the signal over the entire
output range. Factors which contribute to maximum inaccuracy are also specified
separately. These factors are full-scale calibration error, offset calibration error, and
accuracy vs temperature.
Accuracy vs.
Temperature
The variations in the module’s conversion accuracy with temperature over the
module’s operating temperature range.
External Power
Source
All output modules contain circuitry which is optically isolated from PLC-side logic.
That circuitry requires field-side power from a separate 24VDC power source. The
24VDC output supply at the local base can be used as long as you do not exceed the
current ratings.
Base Power
Required
The amount of base current required by the module. Use this value in your power
budget calculations.
Operating
Temperature
The minimum and maximum temperatures the module will operate within.
Relative
Humidity
I/O Points
Required
The range of air humidity over which the module will operate properly.
The minimum and maximum resistance the module can drive, specified for current
and voltage output signals.
The number of I/O points the CPU must dedicate to the module.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Getting Started
Channels per
Module
1--6
Getting Started
Getting Started
Getting Started
Selecting the Appropriate Module
Wide Variety of
Modules
There are a wide variety of Analog I/O modules available for use with the DL205
family of automation products. These modules are well suited for monitoring and
controlling various types of analog signals such as pressure, temperature, etc. No
complex programming or module setup software is required. Simply install the
module, add a few lines to your RLL program, and you’re ready!
Read the
input data
Store input
data
Data OUT
Calculate output
values
Write output
values
Data IN
Analog input, temperature input and analog output modules are available. These
modules are designed and manufactured by FACTS Engineering. FACTS has been
producing feature-packed products for the DirectLOGIC families (and compatible
products) for years! These modules are readily identifiable by their F2-- prefix in the
part number.
Diagnostic
Features
The DL205 Analog Modules use an on-board microcontroller that automatically
monitors module diagnostics. You can easily detect missing field-side supply 24
VDC voltage or a loose terminal block.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Getting Started
1--7
Analog Input
Special
Input
Specification F2--04AD-1, (L) F2--04AD-2, (L)
F2--08AD-1
Channels
4
4
Input Ranges
4 -- 20 mA
0 -- 5V, 0 -- 10V, 4 -- 20 mA
--5 to +5V,
--10 to +10V
0 -- 5V, 0 -- 10V,
--5 to +5V,
--10 to +10V
Resolution
12 bit
(1 in 4096)
12 bit
(1 in 4096)
Input Type
Single ended
12 bit (1 in
4096), and 13
bit (1 in 8192)
Single ended
Single ended
12 bit (1 in
4096), and 13
bit (1 in 8192)
Single ended
Maximum
Inaccuracy
¦ 0.5% at
25 C (77 F ),
¦ 0.1% at
25 C (77 F ),
¦ 0.1% at
25 C (77 F ),
¦ 0.1% at
25 C (77 F ),
¦ 0.65% at
0 -- 60 C
(32 -- 140 F)
See Chapter... 2
¦ 0.3% at
0 -- 60 C
(32 -- 140 F)
3
¦ 0.25% at
0 -- 60 C
(32 -- 140 F)
4
¦ 0.3% at
0 -- 60 C
(32 -- 140 F)
5
Specification
8
F2--08AD-2
F2--04RTD
8
F2--04THM
Input Channels
4
4
Resolution
16 bit internal
16 bit voltage ranges
24 bit Internal
Input Ranges
Pt100, -200.0 -- 850.0 _C Type J -190 -- 760C
E -210 -- 1000C
(-328 -- 1562 _F)
K -150 -- 1372C
Pt1000, -200.0 -- 595.0 _C
R 65 -- 1768C
(-328 -- 1103 _F)
R Wide 0 -- 1768C
jPt100, -38.0 -- 450.0 _C
S 65 -- 1768C
(-36 -- 842 _F)
T -230 -- 400C
Cu. 25, Cu. 10
B 529 -- 1820C
-200.0 -- 260.0 _C
N -70 -- 1300C
(-328 -- 500 _F)
C 65 -- 2320C
Voltage Ranges
0--5 VDC ¦ 5 VDC
0--156mVDC ¦ 156mVDC
Input Type
Differential
Differential
Maximum Input
Inaccuracy
¦ 1.0C
¦ 3.0C Temperature
¦ 0.02% Voltage
See Chapter...
6
7
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Getting Started
The following tables provide a condensed version of the information you need to select
the appropriate module. The most important thing is to simply determine the number of
channels required and the signal ranges that must be supported. Once you’ve
determined these parameters, look in the specific chapter for the selected module to
determine the installation and operation requirements.
1--8
Getting Started
Getting Started
Getting Started
Analog Output
Specification
F2--02DA-1, (L)
Channels
2
2
Output Ranges
4 -- 20 mA
0 -- 5V, 0 -- 10V,
--5 to +5V,
--10 to +10V
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096)
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Output Type
Single ended
Single ended
See Chapter...
8
9
Specification
F2--08DA--1
F2--08DA--2
Channels
8
8
Output Ranges
4 -- 20mA
0 -- 5V, 0 -- 10V
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096)
16 bit (1 in 4096)
Output Type
Single ended
Single ended, 1 common
See Chapter...
10
11
Specification
Combination
Analog
F2--02DA-2, (L)
F2--02DAS--1
F2--02DAS--2
Channels
2
8
Output Ranges
4 -- 20mA
0 -- 5V, 0 -- 10V
Resolution
16 bit (1 in 65536)
16 bit (1 in 65536)
Output Type
Current sourcing
Isolated
See Chapter...
12
13
Specification
F2--4AD2DA
Input Channels
4
Output Channels
2
Input Ranges
4 -- 20 mA
Output Ranges
4 -- 20 mA
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Channel Isolation
Non-isolated (one common)
Input and Output Types
Single ended
Maximum Input Inaccuracy
¦ 0.3% at 25 C (77 F )
¦ 0.45% at 0 -- 60 C (32 -- 140 F)
Maximum Output Inaccuracy
¦ 0.1% at 25 C (77 F )
¦ 0.3% at 0 -- 60 C (32 -- 140 F)
See Chapter . . . .
14
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Getting Started
1--9
Analog Made Easy -- Four Simple Steps
Getting Started
Once you have selected the appropriate
module, use the chapter that describes
that module and complete the following
steps.
Step 1 . Take a minute to review the
detailed specifications to make
sure the module meets your
application requirements.
Step 2 . If applicable, set the module
switches and/or jumpers to
select:
S number of channels
S the operating ranges
Step 3 . Connect the field wiring to the
module connector.
Read the
input data
Step 4 . Review the module operating
characteristics and write the
control program.
Store input
data
Calculate output
values
Write output
values
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-1,
F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel
Analog Current Input
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Setting the Module Jumpers
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Writing the Control Program
2
2--2
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
Module Specifications
F2--04AD--1
The F2--04AD--1 analog Input module provides
several hardware features.
S On-board 250 ohm, 1/2 watt precision resistors
provide substantial over-current-protection for
4--20mA current loops.
S Analog inputs are optically isolated from the
PLC logic.
S The module has a removable terminal block so
the module can be easily removed or changed
without disconnecting the wiring.
S With a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you can read
all four channels in one scan.
S On-board active analog filtering and RISC-like
microcontroller provide digital signal processing
to maintain precision analog measurements in
noisy environments.
F2-04AD-1
IN
ANALOG
4CH
F2--04AD--1
10--30VDC
5mA
0V
+24V
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
CH3-CH3+
CH4-CH4+
ANALOG IN
4--20mA
F2-04AD-1L
F2--04AD--1L (Obsolete)
NOTE: In 2009 the F2--04AD--1L was
discontinued. A re--designed F2--04AD--1 was
released at the same time which can be powered
by either 12 VDC or 24VDC input power supplies.
This new module is a direct replacement for prior
F2--04AD--1 and all F2--04AD--1L modules. The
new module is a single circuit board design and
the jumper link locations are different. See Setting
the Module Jumpers on page 2--5. Also, some
specifications were changed on page 2--3.
Otherwise, the re--designed module functions the
same as the prior designs.
IN
F2--04AD--1
18--26.4VDC
80mA
0V
+12V
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
CH3-CH3+
CH4-CH4+
ANALOG IN
4--20mA
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
ANALOG
4CH
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
Input
Specifications
2--3
These tables provide specifications for both the F2--04AD--1 and F2--04AD--1L
Analog Input Modules (all specifications are the same for both modules except for the
input voltage requirements). Review these specifications to make sure the module
meets your application requirements.
4, single ended (one common)
Input Range
4 to 20 mA current
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Step Response
4.9 ms (*4.0 ms) to 95% of full step change
Crosstalk
--80 dB, 1/2 count maximum
Active Low-pass Filtering
--3 dB at 120Hz (*80Hz), 2 poles (--12 dB per octave)
Input Impedance
250Ω 0.1%, ½W current input
Absolute Maximum Ratings
--40 mA to +40 mA,
mA current input
Converter type
Successive approximation
Linearity Error (End to End)
1 count (0.025%
(0 025% of full scale) maximum
Input Stability
1 count
Full Scale Calibration Error
(Offset error not included)
12 counts maximum,
maximum @ 20mA current input
Offset Calibration Error
7 counts maximum,
maximum @ 4mA current input
Maximum Inaccuracy
.5% @ 25C
25 C (77F)
(77 F)
.65% 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F)
Accuracy
y vs. Temperature
p
50 ppm/
ppm/_C
C maximum full scale calibration
(including maximum offset change)
Recommended Fuse (external)
0 032 A,
0.032
A Series 217 fast-acting,
fast-acting current inputs
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
PLC Update Rate
1 channel per scan maximum (DL230 CPU)
4 channels per scan maximum (DL240/250--1/260 CPU)
Digital Inputs
Input points required
12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits, 2 diagnostic bits
16 point (X) input module
Power Budget Requirement
100 mA (*50 mA) maximum,
maximum 5 VDC (supplied by base)
External Power Supply
5mA (*80mA) max., 10 (*18) to 30 VDC (F2-04AD-1)
90mA maximum, 10 to 15 VDC (F2-04AD-1L)
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-20 to 70_ C (-4 to 158 F)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental air
No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304
* Values in parenthesis with an asterisk are for older modules with two circuit board design and date codes
0609F3 or previous. Values not in parenthesis are for single circuit board models with date code 0709G or above.
Analog Input
Configuration
Requirements
Appears as a 16-point discrete input module and can be installed in any slot of a DL205
system. The available power budget and discrete I/O points are the limiting factors.
Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more
information regarding power budget and number of local, local expansion or remote
I/O points.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
Number of Channels
2--4
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
Special Placement
Requirements
(DL230 and
Remote I/O Bases)
Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the
configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you can see in the section on writing
the program, you use V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place the
module so that the input points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions
cannot access the data. This also applies when placing this module in a remote base
using a D2--RSSS in the CPU slot.
F2-04AD-1
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
Correct!
Slot 0
Slot 1
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
Slot 2
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Output
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
X20
-X37
X40
-X57
Y0
-Y17
V40400
Data is correctly entered so input
points start on a V-memory boundary.
Slot 3
Slot 4
V40402
V40401
MSB
LSB
X
3
7
Incorrect
X
2
0
F2-04AD-1
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
8pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
Slot 4
16pt
Output
X0
-X7
X10
-X27
X30
-X47
X50
-X67
Y0
-Y17
Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230.
MSB
V40401
LSB
X X
3 2
0 7
X
3
7
X
2
0
MSB
V40400
LSB
X X
1 7
0
X
1
7
X
0
To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first input address
assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The table also shows
the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations.
X
X0
X20
X40
V
V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
X60
X100
X120
X140
X160
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
2--5
Setting the Module Jumpers
Selecting the
Number of
Channels
Jumper Location on Modules Having
Date Code 0609F3 and Previous
(Two Circuit Board Design)
+1
For example, to select all 4
channels (1 -- 4), leave both
jumpers installed. To select
channel 1, remove both jumpers.
Jumper Location on Modules Having
Date Code 0709G and Above
(Single Circuit Board Design)
+2
+1 +2
Jumper +1
These jumpers are located on the
motherboard, the one with the black
D-shell style backplane connector.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
There are two jumpers, labeled +1 and
+2, that are used to select the number of
channels that will be used. See the
figures below to find the jumpers on your
module. The module is set from the
factory for four channel operation.
Any unused channels are not
processed, so if you only select
channels 1 thru 3, channel 4 will not be
active. The following table shows how to
use the jumpers to select the number of
channels.
No. of Channels
+1
+2
1
No
No
1, 2
Yes
No
1, 2, 3
No
Yes
1, 2, 3, 4
Yes
Yes
2--6
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
Connecting the Field Wiring
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
Wiring Guidelines
User Power
Supply
Requirements
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general
things to consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do
not ground the shield at both the module and the source.
S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or
transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk
of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the
correct method for your application.
The module requires at least one field-side power supply. You may use the same or
separate power sources for the module supply and the current transmitter supply.
The F2-04AD-1 module requires 18--30VDC, at 80 mA. The DL205 bases have
built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. You may use
this with F2-04AD-1 modules instead of a separate supply if you are using only a
couple of analog modules.
It is desirable in some situations to power the transmitters separately in a location
remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the transmitter supply meets the voltage
and current requirements, and the transmitter’s minus (--) side and the module
supply’s minus (--) side are connected together.
WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you calculate
the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system
operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise, you
may notice 3--5 counts of instability in the analog input data if you use the base power
supply. If this is unacceptable, you should try one of the following:
1. Use a separate linear power supply.
2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw
terminal marked “G” on the base.
By using these methods, the input stability is rated at 1 count.
The F2-04AD-1L module requires 10--15VDC, at 90 mA and must be powered by a
separate power supply.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
Current Loop
Transmitter
Impedance
2--7
Standard 4 to 20 mA transmitters and transducers can operate from a wide variety of
power supplies. Not all transmitters are alike and the manufacturers often specify a
minimum loop or load resistance that must be used with the transmitter.
The F2-04AD-1, (L) provides 250 ohm resistance for each channel. If your transmitter
requires a load resistance below 250 ohms, you do not have to make any adjustments.
However, if your transmitter requires a load resistance higher than 250 ohms, you
need to add a resistor in series with the module.
Consider the following example for a transmitter being operated from a 30 VDC supply
with a recommended load resistance of 750 ohms. Since the module has a 250 ohm
resistor, you need to add an additional resistor.
R ≥ 500
R -- resistor to add
Tr -- Transmitter Requirement
Mr -- Module resistance (internal 250 ohms)
Two-wire Transmitter
+
-DC Supply
+30V
0V
Module Channel 1
R
CH1+
CH1-0V
250 ohms
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
R = Tr − Mr
R = 750 − 250
2--8
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
Wiring Diagram
The F2--04AD--1, (L) module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply
squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the
module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. The diagram shows
separate module and transmitter power supplies. If you desire to use only one
field-side supply, just combine the supplies’ positive (+) terminals into one node, and
remove the transmitter supply.
Module Supply
See NOTE 5
10--15 VDC
18--30 VDC
+
--
Internal
Module
Wiring
See NOTE 1
0 VDC See NOTE 5
+24 VDC
--
+
-CH1
4--wire
+
4--20mA
Transmitter
CH1--
CH2--
-CH4
2-wire
+
4--20mA
Transmitter
0V
F2--04AD--1
CH3--
Fuse
250 ohms
CH3+
CH4--
Fuse
10--30VDC
5mA
250 ohms
CH2+
--
CH3
2-wire
+
4--20mA
Transmitter
+5V
+15V
--15V
250 ohms
CH4+
Fuse
Analog Switch
-CH2
3--wire
+
4--20mA
Transmitter
250 ohms
ANALOG
4CH
CH1+
Fuse
+
IN
DC to DC
Converter
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
Typical User Wiring
A to D
Converter
0V
+24V
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
CH3-CH3+
CH4-CH4+
ANALOG IN
4--20mA
+
-18-30VDC
Supply
Transmitter Supply
OV
24 Volts Model Shown
NOTE 1: Shields should be grounded at the signal source.
NOTE 2: More than one external power supply can be used, provided all the power supply commons are connected.
NOTE 3: A Series 217, 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for 4--20 mA current loops.
NOTE 4: If the power supply common of an external power supply is not connected to 0VDC on the module, then the
output of the external transmitter must be isolated. To avoid “ground loop” errors, recommended 4--20 mA
transmitter types are:
2 or 3 wire: Isolation between input signal and power supply.
4 wire:
Isolation between input signal, power supply, and 4--20mA output.
NOTE 5: Use 10--15VDC for F2-04AD-1L
Use 18--30VDC for F2-04AD-1
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
2--9
Module Operation
Channel
Scanning
Sequence for a
DL230 CPU
(Multiplexing)
Scan
System With
DL230 CPU
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Channel 1
Scan N+1
Channel 2
Scan N+2
Channel 3
Scan N+3
Channel 4
Scan N+4
Channel 1
Write to Outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to
understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals.
The module can supply different amounts of data per scan, depending on the type
of CPU you are using. The DL230 can obtain one channel of data per CPU scan.
Since there are four channels, it can take up to four scans to get data for all
channels. Once all channels have been scanned the process starts over with
channel 1. Unused channels are not processed, so if you select only two channels,
then each channel will be updated every other scan. The multiplexing method can
also be used for the DL240/250--1 and DL260 CPUs.
2--10
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
Channel
Scanning
Sequence for a
DL240, DL250--1 or
or DL260 CPU
(Pointer Method)
If you are using a DL240/250--1/260 CPU , you can obtain all four channels of input
data in one scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPU supports special
V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in
more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.
Scan
System With
DL240/250--1/260
CPU
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Write to Outputs
Analog Module
Updates
Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan,
the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts
the signal to a 12-bit binary representation. This enables the module to
continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete
control logic in the RLL program.
For the vast majority of applications, the values are updated much faster than the
signal changes. However, in some applications, the update time can be important.
The module takes approximately 4 milliseconds to sense 95% of the change in the
analog signal.
Note, this is not the amount of time required to convert the signal to a digital
representation. The conversion to the digital representation takes only a few
microseconds. Many manufacturers list the conversion time, but it is the settling
time of the filter that really determines the update time.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
2--11
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
Understanding
the Input
Assignments
You may recall the F2-04AD-1, (L) module requires 16 discrete input points in the
CPU. You can use these points to obtain:
S an indication of which channel is active
S the digital representation of the analog signal
S module diagnostic information
Since all input points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to
determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-04AD-1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
X20
-X37
X40
-X57
V40400
MSB
X XXX
3 3 3 3
7 6 5 4
Analog Data
Bits
V40402
V40401
Data Bits
Slot 4
16pt
Output
Y0
-Y17
V40500
LSB
X
2
0
Within these word locations, the individual bits represent specific information about
the analog signal.
The first twelve bits represent the analog
V40401
data in binary format.
MSB
LSB
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
6
64
1 1 1 1 1 19 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1
2
7
128
5 4 3 21 0
2
4
8
256
3
8
9
512
= data bits
4
16
10
1024
5
32
11
2048
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
Slot 0
2--12
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
Active Channel
Indicator Inputs
Module
Diagnostic
Inputs
Two of the inputs are binary-encoded to
indicate the active channel (remember,
the V-memory bits are mapped directly
to discrete inputs). The inputs are
automatically turned on and off to
indicate the active channel for each
scan.
Scan
X35 X34
Channel
N
Off
Off
1
N+1
Off
On
2
N+2
On
Off
3
N+3
On
On
4
N+4
Off
Off
1
The last two inputs are used for module
diagnostics.
Module Busy — The first diagnostic
input (X36 in this example) indicates a
“busy” condition. This input will always
be active on the first PLC scan, to tell the
CPU the analog data is not valid. After
the first scan, the input usually only
comes on when extreme environmental
(electrical) noise problems are present.
The programming examples in the next
section shows how you can use this
input. The wiring guidelines shown
earlier in this chapter provide steps that
can help reduce noise problems.
V40401
MSB
LSB
X X
3 3
5 4
X
2
0
= channel inputs
V40401
MSB
LSB
X X
3 3
7 6
X
2
0
= diagnostic inputs
Note: When using the pointer
method, the value placed into the
V-memory location will be 8000
instead of the bit being set.
Channel Failure — The last diagnostic input (X37 in this example) indicates the
analog channel is not operating. For example, if the 24 VDC input power is missing or
if the terminal block is loose, the module will turn on this input point. The module also
returns a data value of zero to further indicate there is a problem.
The next section, Writing the Control Program, shows how you can use these inputs
in your control program.
Module
Resolution
Since the module has 12-bit resolution,
the analog signal is converted into 4096
counts ranging from 0 -- 4095 (212). For
example, a 4mA signal would be 0 and a
20mA signal would be 4095. This is
equivalent to a a binary value of 0000
0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to
FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows
how this relates to the signal range.
Each count can also be expressed in
terms of the signal level by using the
equation shown.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
4 -- 20mA
20mA
4mA
0
4095
Resolution = H − L
4095
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
16mA / 4095 = 3.907uA per count
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
2--13
Writing the Control Program
Reading Values:
Pointer Method
and Multiplexing

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
NOTE: DL250 CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this
method. If you must use the DL230 example, module placement in the base is very
important. Review the section earlier in this chapter for guidelines.
The example program shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung
anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage
programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the data into V-memory
locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform math on the data,
compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 is used in the example
but you can use any user V-memory location. In this example the module is installed
in slot 2. You should use the V-memory locations for your module placement. The
pointer method automatically converts values to BCD (depending on the LD
statement in the ladder logic).
SP0
LD
K 04 00
- or -
LD
K 84 00
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the
number of channels (i.e. 1, 2, 3, or 4).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math
functions, whereas the DL250 does.
OUT
V7662
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 2 that contains the
number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered
here would designate the following addresses.
Ch1 -- V2000, Ch2 -- V2001, Ch3 -- V2002, Ch 4 -- V2003
OUT
V7672
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7672 is assigned to slot
2 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal
value in this location to determine exactly where to store the
incoming data.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
Pointer Method
There are two methods of reading values:
S The pointer method
S Multiplexing
You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also
use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not
work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs,
but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer
method.
The DL205 series has special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that
greatly simplify the programming requirements. These V-memory locations allow
you to:
S specify the data format
S specify the number of channels to scan
S specify the storage locations
2--14
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240,
DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0
(zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two
places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the
pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230
(multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero.
The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667
Storage Pointer
V7670 V7671 V7672 V7673 V7674 V7675 V7676 V7677
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Storage Pointer
V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Storage Pointer
V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Storage Pointer
V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Storage Pointer
V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
Reading Values
(Multiplexing)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
2--15
The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to
automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a
single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is
being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to
use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored.
Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The
addresses used would be different if the module was installed in a different I/O
arrangement. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program, or if you are
using stage programming place them in a stage that is always active.
ANDD
KFFF
Store Channel 1
X36
X34
X35
Store Channel 2
X36
X34
X35
Store Channel 3
X36
X34
X35
Store Channel 4
X36
X34
X35
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator.
The V-memory location depends on the I/O
configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map.
This instruction masks the channel identification
bits. Without this, the values used will not be correct
so do not forget to include it.
BCD
It is usually easier to perform math operations in
BCD, so it is best to convert the data to BCD
immediately. You can leave out this instruction if your
application does not require it.
OUT
V2000
When the module is not busy and X34 and X35 are
off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.
OUT
V2001
When X34 is on and X35 is off, channel 2 data is
stored in V2001.
OUT
V2002
OUT
V2003
When X34 is off and X35 is on, channel 3 data is
stored in V2002.
When both X34 and X35 are on, channel 4 data is
stored in V2003.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
Load Data when Module is not busy
X36
LD
V40401
2--16
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
Single Channel
Selected
Since you do not have to determine which channel is selected, the single channel
program is even more simple.
Store Channel 1 when Module is not busy
X36
X34
X35
LD
V40401
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator.
The V-memory location depends on the I/O
configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map.
ANDD
KFFF
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
BCD
OUT
V2000
Analog Power
Failure Detection
This instruction masks the channel identification bits.
Without this, the values used will not be correct so do
not forget to include it.
It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD,
so it is best to convert the data to BCD immediately.
You can leave out this instruction if your application
does not require it.
When the module is not busy and X34 and X35 are
off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.
The Analog module has an on-board processor that can diagnose analog input
circuit problems. You can easily create a simple ladder rung to detect these
problems. This rung shows an input point that would be assigned if the module was
installed as shown in the previous examples. A different point would be used if the
module was installed in a different I/O arrangement.
Multiplexing method
V2000
K0
X37
=
C1
OUT
V-memory location V2000 holds
channel 1 data. When a data value
of zero is returned and input X37 is
on, then the analog circuitry is not
operating properly.
Pointers method
V2000
K8000
=
Scaling the
Input Data
Most applications usually require
measurements in engineering units,
which provides more meaningful data.
This is accomplished by using the
conversion formula shown.
You may have to make adjustments to
the formula depending on the scale you
choose for the engineering units.
C1
OUT
V-memory location V2000 holds
channel 1 data. When a data value
of 8000 is returned, then the analog
circuitry is not operating properly.
Units = A H − L
4095
H = High limit of the engineering
unit range
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)
For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 99.9 then you
would have to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when
you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer.
Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
2--17
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
Analog Value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI
Example without multiplier
Example with multiplier
Units = A H − L
4095
Units = 10 A H − L
4095
Units = 2024 100 − 0
4095
Units = 20240 100 − 0
4095
Units = 49
Units = 494
Handheld Display
Handheld Display
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0494
This value is more accurate
The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the
engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have BCD data loaded
into the appropriate V-memory locations using instructions that apply for the model
of CPU you are using.
Note: this example uses SP1, which is always on. You
could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
SP1
LD
V2000
When SP1 is on, load channel 1 data to the accumulator.
MUL
K1000
Multiply the accumulator by 1000 (to start the conversion).
DIV
K4095
Divide the accumulator by 4095.
OUT
V2010
Analog and
Digital Value
Conversions
Store the result in V2010.
Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion
easier.
Range
4 to 20mA
If you know the digital value...
If you know the analog signal level...
A = 16D + 4
4095
D = 4095 (A − 4)
16
For example, if you have measured the
signal as 10mA, you can use the formula
to easily determine the digital value that
will be stored in the V-memory location
that contains the data.
D = 4095 (A − 4)
16
4095
D=
(10mA – 4)
16
D = (255.93) (6)
D = 1536
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0049
2--18
F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input
Filtering Input
Noise (DL250--1,
DL260 CPU Only)
   
F2--04AD--1, (L)
4-Ch. Current Input
230
240 250-- 1 260
Add the following logic to filter and smooth analog input noise in DL250--1 and
DL260 CPUs. This is especially useful when using PID loops. Noise can be
generated by the field device and/or induced by field wiring.
The analog value in BCD is first converted to a binary number because there is not a
BCD-to-real conversion instruction. Memory location V1400 is the designated work
space in this example. The MULR instruction is the filter factor, which can be from
0.1 to 0.9. The example uses 0.2. A smaller filter factor increases filtering. You can
use a higher precision value, but it is not generally needed. The filtered value is then
converted back to binary and then to BCD. The filtered value is stored in location
V1402 for use in your application or PID loop.
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example,
if you are using the pointer method to get the analog value, it is in BCD and must be
converted to binary. However, if you are using the conventional method of reading
analog and are masking the first twelve bits, then it is already in binary and no
conversion using the BIN instruction is needed.
SP1
LD
V2000
BIN
BTOR
Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to
binary. Remember, this instruction is not
needed if the analog value is originally
brought in as a binary number.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the
accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor),
and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value.
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
RTOB
BCD
OUT
V1402
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
F2-04AD-2,
F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel
Analog Voltage Input
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Setting the Module Jumpers
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Writing the Control Program
3
3--2
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Module Specifications
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
F2--04AD--2
The F2-04AD-2 analog Input module
provides several hardware features.
S Analog inputs are optically
isolated from the PLC logic.
S The module has a removable
terminal block so the module can
be easily removed or changed
without disconnecting the wiring.
S With a DL240/250--1/260 CPU,
you can read all four channels in
one scan.
S On-board active analog filtering
and microcontroller provide digital
signal processing to maintain
precision analog measurements in
noisy environments.
F2--04AD--2L (Obsolete)
NOTE: In 2009 the F2--04AD--2L
was discontinued. A re--designed
F2--04AD--2 was released at the
same time which can be powered
by either 12 VDC or 24VDC input
power supplies. This new module
is a direct replacement for prior
F2--04AD--2 and all F2--04AD--2L
modules. The new module is a
single circuit board design and the
jumper link locations are different.
See Setting the Module Jumpers
on page 3--5. Also, some
specifications were changed on
page 3--3. Otherwise, the
re--designed module functions the
same as the prior designs.
--
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-2
IN
ANALOG
4CH
F2--04AD--2
10--30VDC
5mA
0V
+24V
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
CH3-CH3+
CH4-CH4+
ANALOG IN
0--5, 0--10VDC
+/--5,+/--10VDC
F2-04AD-2L
IN
F2--04AD--2
18--26.4VDC
90mA
0V
+12V
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
CH3-CH3+
CH4-CH4+
ANALOG IN
0--5, 0--10VDC
+/--5,+/--10VDC
ANALOG
4CH
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Input
Specifications
3--3
All specifications are the same for both modules except for the input voltage
requirements. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your
application requirements.
Number of Channels
4, single ended (one common)
Input Ranges
0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 5V, 10V
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096) unipolar (0 -- 4095)
13 bit (1 in 8192) bipolar (--4095 -- +4095)
--50 dB at 800 Hz
Step Response
8.2 ms (*10 ms) to 95% of full step change
Crosstalk
--70 dB, 1 count maximum
Active Low-pass Filtering
--3 dB at 80Hz, 2 poles (--12 dB per octave)
Input Impedance
> 20 MΩ
Absolute Maximum Ratings
--75 to +75 VDC
Converter type
Successive approximation
Linearity Error (End to End)
1 count (0.025% of span) maximum unipolar
2 counts maximum bipolar
Input Stability
1 count
Full Scale Calibration Error
(Offset error not included)
Offset Calibration Error
3 counts maximum
Maximum Inaccuracy
.1% @ 25C
25 C (77
(77F)
F)
.3% 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F)
1 count maximum (0V input)
Accuracy vs
vs. Temperature
General
Specifications
50 ppm / _C full scale calibration change (including
maximum offset change of 2 counts)
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
1 channel per scan maximum (D2--230 CPU)
PLC Update Rate
4 channels per scan max. (D2--240/250--1/260CPU)
Digital Inputs
Input points required
12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits, 1 sign/diagnostics
bit 1 diagnostic bit
bit,
16 point (X) input module
Power Budget Requirement
External Power Supply
110 mA (*60 mA) maximum,
maximum 5 VDC (supplied by base)
5 mA (*90 mA) max., 10--30 VDC (*18--26.4 VDC)
(F2-04AD-2 models);
90 mA maximum, 10 to 15 VDC (F2-04AD-2L models)
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F )
--20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental air
No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304
ICS3 304
* Values in parenthesis with an asterisk are for older modules with two circuit board design and date codes 0609F4
and previous. Values not in parenthesis are for single circuit board models with date code 0709G and above.
Analog Input
Configuration
Requirements
Appears as a 16-point discrete input module and can be installed in any slot of a DL205
system. The available power budget and discrete I/O points are the limiting factors. Check
the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information
regarding power budget and number of local, local expansion or remote I/O points.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
Common Mode Rejection
3--4
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Special Placement
Requirements
(DL230 and
Remote I/O Bases)
Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the
configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you can see in the section on writing
the program, you use V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place
the module so that the input points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the
instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when placing this module in a
remote base using a D2--RSSS in the CPU slot.
F2--04AD-2
Correct!
Slot 0
Slot 1
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
Slot 2
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
X20
-X37
X40
-X57
V40400
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Output
Y0
-Y17
V40402 V40500
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
V40401
Data is correctly entered so input points
start on a V-memory boundary.
MSB
LSB
X
3
7
Incorrect
X
2
0
F2--04AD-2
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
8pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
Slot 4
16pt
Output
X0
-X7
X10
-X27
X30
-X47
X50
-X67
Y0
-Y17
Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230.
V40401
MSB
LSB
X X
3 2
0 7
X
3
7
X
2
0
V40400
MSB
LSB
X X
1 7
0
X
1
7
X
0
To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first input address
assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The table also
shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations.
X
X0
X20
V
V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
X40
X60
X100
X120
X140
X160
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
3--5
Setting the Module Jumpers
Selecting the
Number of
Channels
There are two jumpers, labeled +1 and
+2, that are used to select the number of
channels that will be used. See the
figures below to find the jumpers on your
module. The module is set from the
factory for four channel operation.
Any unused channels are not
processed, so if you only select
channels 1 thru 3, channel 4 will not be
active. The following table shows how to
use the jumpers to select the number of
channels.
Channel
+1
+2
1
No
No
1, 2
Yes
No
1, 2, 3
No
Yes
1, 2, 3, 4
Yes
Yes
For example, to select all 4
channels (1--4), leave both jumpers
installed. To select channel 1,
remove both jumpers.
Jumper Location on Modules Having
Date Code 0609F4 and Previous
(Two Circuit Board Design)
+1
+2
Jumper Location on Modules Having
Date Code 0709G and Above
(Single Circuit Board Design)
Use jumpers
+1 and +2 to
select number
of channels.
+1 +2
Jumper +1
These jumpers are located on the
motherboard, the one with the black
D-shell style backplane connector.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
Yes = jumper installed
No = jumper removed
3--6
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Selecting the
Input Signal
Range
There is another jumper, labeled either
J2 or J3 (depending on the whether you
have a single or double circuit board
module), that is used to select between
the 5V ranges and the 10V ranges. See
the figures below to locate the jumper on
your module. The module comes from
the factory set for 10V operation (jumper
not installed).
Jumper J2 Location on Modules Having
Date Code 0609F4 and Previous
(Two Circuit Board Design)
Install jumper J2 or J3 for
0--5V or 5V operation.
Remove J2 or J3, or store on
a single pin, for 0 to10 or
10V operation.
Jumper J3 Location on Modules Having
Date Code 0709G and Above
(Single Circuit Board Design)
J3
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
Jumper J2
Jumper J2 is located on the smaller
circuit board, which is on top of the
motherboard.
Install J2 for 0--5V or 5V operation.
Remove J2, or store on a single pin,
for 0 to10 or 10V operation.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Install J3 for 0--5V or 5V operation.
Remove J3, or store on a single pin,
for 0 to10 or 10V operation.
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
3--7
Connecting the Field Wiring
Wiring
Guidelines
User Power
Supply
Requirements
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things
to consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do
not ground the shield at both the module and the source.
S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches,
or transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the
risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose
the correct method for your application.
WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you
calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable
system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise,
you may notice 3--5 counts of instability in the analog input data if you use the
base power supply. If this is unacceptable, you should try one of the following:
1. Use a separate linear power supply.
2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw
terminal marked “G” on the base.
By using these methods, the input stability is rated at 1 count.
The F2-04AD-2L requires 10--15VDC at 90mA and must be powered by a separate
power supply.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
The module requires at least one field-side power supply. You may use the same or
separate power sources for the module supply and the voltage transmitter supply.
The F2-04AD-2 module requires 18--26.4VDC at 80 mA. The DL205 bases have
built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. You may use
this instead of a separate supply if you are using only a couple of analog modules.
It is desirable in some situations to power the transmitters separately in a location
remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the transmitter supply meets the
voltage and current requirements, and the transmitter minus (--) side and the
module supply’s minus (--) side are connected together.
3--8
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Custom Input
Ranges
Occasionally you may have the need to connect a (current) transmitter with an
unusual signal range. By changing the wiring slightly and adding an external
resistor to convert the current to voltage, you can easily adapt this module to meet
the specifications for a transmitter that does not adhere to one of the standard input
ranges. The following diagram shows how this works. The example below only
shows channel 1, but you can also use the other channels as well.
Module internal circuitry
0V
24V
24 V
IN+
0V
CH1
IN--
CH2
R
-CH3
Analog Switch
Current
Transmitter
+5V
+15V
--15V
+
50mA
DC to DC
Converter
Field wiring
0V
A to D
Converter
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
CH4
R=
OV
Vmax
Imax
R = value of external resistor
Vmax = high limit of selected voltage range (5V or 10V)
Imax = maximum current supplied by the transmitter
Example: current transmitter capable of 50mA, 0 -- 10V range selected.
R=
10V
R = 200 ohms
50mA
NOTE:Your choice of resistor can affect the accuracy of the module. A resistor that
has 0.1% tolerance and a 50ppm / _C temperature coefficient is
recommended.
If you use 4--20mA signals and convert them to voltage using this method, you can
easily check for broken transmitter conditions. For example, if you are using the
0--5V range and the lowest signal for the 4--20mA transmitter is 4mA, the lowest
digital value for the signal is not 0, but instead is 819.
If the transmitter is working properly, the smallest value would be 819 in the DL205.
If you see a value of less than about 750 (allowing for tolerance), then you know the
transmitter is broken.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
3--9
The module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply squeeze the
top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the module. Use
the following diagram to connect the field wiring. The diagram shows separate
module and transmitter power supplies. If you desire to use only one field-side
supply, just combine the supplies’ positive (+) terminals into one node and remove
the transmitter supply.
Wiring Diagram
Notes: 1. Shields should be grounded at the signal source.
2. Unused inputs should be jumpered together (i.e. Ch4-- to Ch4+).
3. More than one external power supply can be used provided the
commons are connected together.
4. F2-04AD-2L requires 10--15 VDC input supply.
Module Supply
See NOTES 3, 4
18-26.4VDC
+
Typical User Wiring
--
See NOTE 1
Internal
Module
Wiring
0 VDC
24 V
CH1--
0V
10--30VDC
5mA
CH2
CH3-CH3+
CH3
Voltage
+
Transmitter
CH3
CH4-CH4+
CH4
--
CH4
Voltage
+
Transmitter
Analog Switch
CH2+
--
F2--04AD--2
CH1
CH2--
+
-CH2
Voltage
+
Transmitter
+
+5V
+15V
--15V
CH1+
ANALOG
4CH
A to D
Converter
0V
+24V
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
CH3-CH3+
CH4-CH4+
ANALOG IN
0--5, 0--10VDC
+/--5,+/--10VDC
+
See NOTE 3
-5-12VDC
Supply
Transmitter Supply
OV
24 volts model shown, but wiring is
the same for 12 volts model.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
+
-CH1
Voltage
+
Transmitter
DC to DC
Converter
--
+
0V
+24 VDC
IN
3--10
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Module Operation
Channel
Scanning
Sequence for a
DL230 CPU
(Multiplexing)
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to
understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals.
The module can supply different amounts of data per scan, depending on the type
of CPU you are using. The DL230 can obtain one channel of data per CPU scan.
Since there are four channels, it can take up to four scans to get data for all
channels. Once all channels have been scanned the process starts over with
channel 1. Unused channels are not processed, so if you select only two channels,
then each channel will be updated every other scan. The multiplexing method can
also be used for the DL240/250--1/DL260 CPUs.
Scan
System With
DL230 CPU
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Write to Outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Scan N
Channel 1
Scan N+1
Channel 2
Scan N+2
Channel 3
Scan N+3
Channel 4
Scan N+4
Channel 1
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Channel Scanning
Sequence with a
DL240, DL250--1
or DL260 CPU
(Pointer Method)
3--11
If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can obtain all four channels
of input data in one scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPU supports
special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer (this is
discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program).
Scan
System With
DL240/250--1/
260CPU
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Write to Outputs
Analog Module
Updates
Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan,
the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts
the signal to a 12-bit binary representation. This enables the module to
continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete
control logic in the RLL program.
For the vast majority of applications, the values are updated much faster than the
signal changes. However, in some applications, the update time can be important.
The module takes approximately 10 milliseconds to sense 95% of the change in the
analog signal.
Note, this is not the amount of time required to convert the signal to a digital
representation. The conversion to the digital representation takes only a few
microseconds. Many manufacturers list the conversion time, but it is the settling
time of the filter that really determines the update time.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
Scan N
3--12
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Understanding
the Input
Assignments
You may recall that the module appears to the CPU as a 16-point discrete input
module. You can use these points to obtain:
S an indication of which channel is active.
S the digital representation of the analog signal.
S module diagnostic information.
Since all input points are automatically mapped into V memory, it is very
easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2--04AD-2
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
X20
-X37
X40
-X57
V40400
Slot 4
16pt
Output
Y0
-Y17
V40402
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
V40401
MSB
LSB
XXXX
3 3 3 3
7 6 5 4
Data Bits
X
2
0
Within these word locations, the individual bits represent specific information
about the analog signal.
Analog Data
Bits
Active Channel
Indicator Inputs
The first twelve bits represent the
analog data in binary format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
6
64
1
2
7
128
2
4
8
256
3
8
9
512
4
16
10
1024
5
32
11
2048
Two of the inputs are binary encoded to
indicate the active channel (remember,
the V-memory bits are mapped directly
to discrete inputs). The inputs
automatically turn on and off to indicate
the current channel for each scan.
Scan
X35 X34
Channel
N
Off
Off
1
N+1
Off
On
2
N+2
On
Off
3
N+3
On
On
4
N+4
Off
Off
1
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
V40401
MSB
LSB
11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
10
= data bits
V40401
MSB
X X
3 3
5 4
= channel inputs
LSB
X
2
0
3--13
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Module Diagnostic
and Sign Inputs
The last two inputs are used for module
diagnostics.
Module Busy — The first diagnostic
input (X36 in this example) indicates a
“busy” condition. This input will always
be active on the first PLC scan, to tell the
CPU that the analog data is not valid.
After the first scan, the input usually only
comes on when extreme environmental
(electrical) noise problems are present.
V40401
MSB
LSB
XX
3 3
7 6
X
2
0
= Module Busy
= diagnostics and sign
The last input (X37 in this example) is used for two purposes.
Module
Resolution
Since the module has 12-bit unipolar
resolution, the analog signal is
converted into 4096 counts ranging from
0 -- 4095 (212). For example, with a 0 to
10V scale, a 0V signal would be 0 and a
10V signal would be 4095. This is
equivalent to a binary value of 0000
0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to
FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows
how this relates to each signal range.
The bipolar ranges utilize a sign bit to
provide 13-bit resolution. A value of
4095 can represent the upper limit of
either side of the range. Use the sign bit
to determine negative values.
Unipolar
Ranges
Bipolar
Ranges
+V
+V
0V
0V
0
4095
--V
--4095
0
4095
Unipolar Resolution = H – L
4095
H
Bipolar Resolution = – L
8191
H or L = high or low limit of the range
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation
shown. The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will
result in one LSB change in the data value for each input signal range.
Range
Signal Span
(H -- L)
Divide By
Smallest Detectable
Change
0 to +10V
10V
4095
2.44 mV
--10 to +10V
20V
8191
2.44 mV
0 to +5V
5V
4095
1.22 mV
--5V to +5V
10V
8191
1.22 mV
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
Signal Sign — When using bipolar ranges you need to know if the value returned is
positive or negative. When this input is off, the value stored represents a positive
analog signal (0V or greater). If the input is on, then the value stored represents a
negative input signal (less than 0V).
Channel Failure — This input can also indicate an analog channel failure. For
example, if the 24 VDC input power is missing or the terminal block is loose, the
module turns on this input and returns a data value of zero (remember, if this input is
on and the data value is not equal to zero, then it is just showing the sign).
The next section, Writing the Control Program, shows how you can use these inputs
in your control program.
3--14
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Writing the Control Program
Reading Values:
Pointer Method
and Multiplexing
Pointer Method

F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
230
 

240 250-- 1 260
There are two methods of reading values:
S The pointer method
S Multiplexing
You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also
use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not
work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs,
but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer
method.
DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs have special V-memory locations assigned to
each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. These
V-memory locations:
S specify the data format
S specify the number of channels to scan
S specify the storage locations
NOTE: DL250 CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this
method. If you must use the DL230 example, module placement in the base is very
important. Review the section earlier in this chapter for guidelines.
The example program shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung
anywhere in the ladder program or in the Initial Stage if you are using RLL PLUS
instructions. This is all that is required to read the data into V-memory locations.
Once the data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data, compare the data
against preset values, and so forth. V2000 is used in the example but you can use
any user V-memory location. In this example the module is installed in slot 2. You
should use the V-memory locations for your module placement. The pointer method
automatically converts values to BCD.
SP0
LD
K 04 00
- or -
LD
K 84 00
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the
number of channels (i.e. 1, 2, 3, or 4).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math
functions, whereas the DL250 does.
OUT
V7662
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 2 that contains the
number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered
here would designate the following addresses.
Ch1 -- V2000, Ch2 -- V2001, Ch3 -- V2002, Ch 4 -- V2003
OUT
V7672
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7672 is assigned to slot
2 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal
value in this location to determine exactly where to store the
incoming data.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
3--15
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240,
DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0
(zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two
places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the
pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230
(multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero.
The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667
Storage Pointer
V7670 V7671 V7672 V7673 V7674 V7675 V7676 V7677
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Storage Pointer
V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Storage Pointer
V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Storage Pointer
V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Storage Pointer
V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.
3--16
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Using Bipolar
Ranges
(Pointer Method)
   
230
240 250-- 1 260
With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic to determine whether the
value being returned represents a positive voltage or a negative voltage. For
example, you may need to know the direction for a motor. With the DL240/250 CPU,
you cannot use the last input (X37 in the previous examples) to show the sign for
each channel. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 reads all four channels in one
scan. Therefore, if you tried to use X37 you would only be monitoring the last
channel that was read. You would not be able to determine the sign for the previous
three channels. There is a simple solution:
S
If you get a value greater than or equal to 8001, the value is negative.
The sign bit is the most significant bit, which combines 8000 to the data value. If the
value is greater than or equal to 8001, you only have to mask the most significant bit
and the active channel bits to determine the actual data value.
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
The following program shows how you can accomplish this. Since you always want
to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be placed before any other
operations that use the data, such as math instructions, scaling operations, and so
forth. Also, if you are using stage programming instructions, these rungs should be
in a stage that is always active. Please note, you only need this logic for each
channel that is using bipolar input signals. The example only shows two channels.
Check Channel 1
SP1
V2000
Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the
accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative.
Contact SP1 is always on.
ANDD
K7FFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data if it
is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct, so do not forget to include it.
OUT
V2020
Put the actual signal value in V2020. Now you can use
the data normally.
K8001
Check Channel 2
SP1
V2001
K8001
²
C1
OUT
²
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
LD
V2000
Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of --1
reads as 8001, --2 is 8002, etc.).
LD
V2001
Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator.
Remember, the data can be negative. Contact SP1 is
always on.
ANDD
K7FFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data if it
is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct, so do not forget to include it.
OUT
V2021
Put the actual signal value in V2021. Now you can use
the data normally.
C2
OUT
Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of --1
reads as 8001, --2 is 8002, etc.).
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Reading Values
(Multiplexing)
   
230
240 250-- 1 260
3--17
The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to
automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed from a
single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is
being read. Since the module appears as 16 X input points to the CPU, it is very
easy to use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being
monitored.
Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The
addresses used would be different if the module was used in a different I/O
configuration. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program, or if you are
using stage programming place them in a stage that is always active.
Load data when module is not busy.
X36
LD
V40401
ANDD
KFFF
Store Channel 2
X36
X34
X35
Store Channel 3
X36
X34
X35
Store Channel 4
X36
X34
X35
This instruction masks the channel identification bits.
Without this, the values used will not be correct, so do
not forget to include it.
BCD
It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD.
So it is best to convert the data to BCD immediately.
You can leave out this instruction if your application
does not require it.
OUT
V2000
When the module is not busy and X34 and X35 are
off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.
OUT
V2001
When X34 is on and X35 is off, channel 2 data is
stored in V2001.
OUT
V2002
OUT
V2003
When X34 is off and X35 is on, channel 3 data is
stored in V2002.
When both X34 and X35 are on, channel 4 data is
stored in V2003.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
Store Channel 1
X36
X34
X35
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator.
The V-memory location depends on the I/O
configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map.
3--18
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Single Channel
Selected
Since you do not have to determine which channel is selected, the single channel
program is even simpler.
Store channel 1 when module is not busy.
X36
X34
X35
LD
V40401
This instruction masks the channel identification bits.
Without this, the values used will not be correct, so do
not forget to include it.
ANDD
KFFF
It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD,
so it is best to convert the data to BCD immediately.
You can leave out this instruction if your application
does not require it.
BCD
OUT
V2000
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
Using Bipolar
Ranges
(Multiplexing)
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator.
The V-memory location depends on the I/O
configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map.
When the module is not busy and X34 and X35 are off,
channel 1 data is stored in V2000.
With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic because you need to know if
the value being returned represents a positive voltage or a negative voltage. For
example, you may need to know the direction for a motor. Since the DL230 only
reads one channel per scan, you can use the last input (X37 in the examples) to
show the sign.
The following program shows how you can accomplish this. Since you always want
to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be placed before any
operations that use the data, such as math instructions, scaling operations, and so
forth. Also, if you are using stage programming instructions these rungs should be
in a stage that is always active. Please note, you only need the additional logic for
those channels that are using bipolar input signals. The example shows two
channels but you can repeat these steps for all four channels if necessary.
Load data when module is not busy.
X36
LD
V40401
Loads the complete data word into the
accumulator. The V-memory location depends
on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for
the memory map.
This instruction masks the channel identification
bits. Without this, the values used will not be
correct, so do not forget to include it.
ANDD
KFFF
X36
X34
It is usually easier to perform math operations in
BCD, so it is best to convert the data to BCD
immediately. You can leave out this instruction if
your application does not require it.
BCD
Store Channel 1
X35
OUT
V2000
C0
When the module is not busy and X34 and X35
are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000. C0 is
reset to indicate channel one’s value is positive.
RST
X37
Store Channel 2
X36
X34
C0
SET
X35
OUT
V2001
C1
If X37 is on, then the data value represents a
negative voltage. C0 is set to indicate channel 1’s
value is negative.
When the module is not busy, and X34 is on
and X35 is off, channel 2 data is stored in
V2001. C1 is reset to indicate that channel 2’s
value is positive.
RST
X37
C1
SET
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
If X37 is on, then the data value represents a
negative voltage. C1 is set to indicate that
channel 2’s value is negative.
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Using 2’s
Complement
(Multiplexing)

230
 
3--19
The 2’s complement data format may be required to display negative values on some
operator interface devices. It could also be used to simplify data averaging on bipolar
signals.

240 250-- 1 260
The example shows two channels, but you can repeat these steps for all four channels
if necessary.
Load data when module is not busy.
X36
LD
V40401
Store Channel 1
X36
X34
X35
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator.
The V-memory location depends on the I/O
configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map.
ANDD
KFFF
This instruction masks the channel identification bits.
Without this, the values used will not be correct, so
do not forget to include it.
OUT
V2000
When the module is not busy and X34 and X35 are
off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000. C0 is reset to
indicate that channel 1’s value is positive.
C0
RST
X37
C0
SET
Invert the bit pattern in the accumulator.
BCD
ADDD
K1
X36
X34
X35
Channel 1 data is in double word starting at V2040.
OUTD
V2040
Store Channel 2
X36
X34
X35
When the module is not busy and X34 is on and X35
is off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001. C1 is reset
to indicate channel 2’s value is positive.
OUT
V2001
C1
RST
X37
C1
SET
INV
If X37 is on, then the data value represents a
negative voltage. C1 is set to indicate that channel
2’s value is negative.
Invert the bit pattern in the accumulator.
BCD
ADDD
K1
X36
X34
X35
OUTD
V2042
Channel 2 data is in double word starting at V2042.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
INV
If X37 is on, then the data value represents a
negative voltage. C0 is set to indicate that channel
1’s value is negative.
3--20
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Analog Power
Failure Detection
The analog module has a microcontroller that can diagnose analog input circuit
problems. You can easily create a simple ladder rung to detect these problems.
This rung shows an input point that would be assigned if the module was used as
shown in the previous examples. A different point would be used if the module was
installed in a different I/O configuration.
Multiplexing method
V2000
K0
X37
=
C0
OUT
V-memory location V2000 holds
channel 1 data. When a data value
of zero is returned and input X37 is
on, then the analog circuitry is not
operating properly.
Pointers method
V2000
K8000
C0
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
=
Scaling the
Input Data
OUT
Most applications usually require
measurements in engineering units,
which provide more meaningful data.
This is accomplished by using the
conversion formula shown.
You may have to make adjustments to
the formula depending on the scale you
choose for the engineering units.
V-memory location V2000 holds
channel 1 data. When a data value
of 8000 is returned, then the analog
circuitry is not operating properly.
Units = A H − L
4095
H = high limit of the engineering
unit range
L = low limit of the engineering
unit range
A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)
For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 99.9 then you
would have to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when
you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer.
Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI
Example without multiplier
Example with multiplier
Units = A H − L
4095
Units = 10 A H − L
4095
Units = 2024 100 − 0
4095
Units = 20240 100 − 0
4095
Units = 49
Units = 494
Handheld Display
V 2001
0000
V 2000
0049
Handheld Display
V 2001
0000
V 2000
0494
This value is more accurate.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
3--21
Here is how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion.
This example assumes you have BCD data loaded into the appropriate V-memory
locations using instructions that apply for the model of CPU you are using.
NOTE: This example uses SP1, which is always on. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
SP1
LD
V2000
When SP1 is on, load channel 1 data to the accumulator.
MUL
K1000
Multiply the accumulator by 1000 (to start the conversion).
DIV
K4095
Divide the accumulator by 4095.
OUT
V2010
Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
troubleshooting. Remember, this module does not operate like other versions of
analog input modules that you may be familiar with. The bipolar ranges use 0--4095
for both positive and negative voltages. The sign bit allows this, which actually
provides better resolution than those modules that do not offer a sign bit. The
following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range
If you know the digital value ...
If you know the signal level ...
0 to 5V
--5V to +5V
A = 5D
4095
D = 4095 (A)
5
0 to 10V
--10V to +10V
A = − 10D
4095
D = 4095 ABS(A)
10
For example, if you are using the --10 to
+10V range and you have measured the
signal at 6V, use the following formula to
determine the digital value that is stored
in the V-memory location that contains
the data.
D = 4095 (A)
10
D = 4095 (6V)
10
D = (409.5) (6)
D = 2457
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
Analog
and Digital
Value
Conversions
Store the result in V2010.
3--22
F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Filtering Input
Noise (DL250--1,
DL260 CPUs Only)
   
230
240 250-- 1 260
Add the following logic to filter and smooth analog input noise in DL250--1/DL260
CPUs. This is especially useful when using PID loops. Noise can be generated by
the field device and/or induced by field wiring.
The analog value in BCD is first converted to a binary number because there is not a
BCD-to-real conversion instruction. Memory location V1400 is the designated
workspace in this example. The MULR instruction is the filter factor, which can be
from 0.1 to 0.9. The example uses 0.2. A smaller filter factor increases filtering. You
can use a higher precision value, but it is not generally needed. The filtered value is
then converted back to binary and then to BCD. The filtered value is stored in
location V1402 for use in your application or PID loop.
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example,
if you are using the pointer method to get the analog value, it is in BCD and must be
converted to binary. However, if you are using the conventional method of reading
analog and are masking the first twelve bits, then it is already in binary and no
conversion using the BIN instruction is needed.
F2-04AD-2, (L)
4-Ch. Voltage Input
SP1
LD
V2000
BIN
BTOR
Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to
binary. Remember, this instruction is not
needed if the analog value is originally
brought in as a binary number.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the
accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor),
and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value.
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
RTOB
BCD
OUT
V1402
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: the BCD instruction
is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
F2-08AD-1
8-Channel Analog
Current Input
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Setting the Module Jumpers
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Writing the Control Program
4
4--2
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
Module Specifications
NOTE: A re--designed F2--08AD--1 with a single circuit board design was released in 2009.
The jumper link location is different. See Setting the Module Jumpers on page 4--5. Also,
some specifications were changed on page 4--3. Otherwise, the re--designed module
functions the same as the prior design.
The F2-08AD-1 Analog Input module
provides several hardware features:
S Analog inputs are optically isolated
from the PLC logic.
S On-board 250 ohm, 1/2 watt
precision resistors provide
substantial over-current-protection
for 4--20mA current loops.
S The module has a removable
terminal block so the module can
be easily removed or changed
without disconnecting the wiring.
S With a DL240, DL250--1 and
DL260 CPU, you can read all
channels in one scan.
IN
F2--08AD-1
10--30VDC
5mA
0V
+24V
CH1+
CH2+
CH3+
CH4+
CH5+
CH6+
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
CH7+
Firmware Requirements:
To use this module, D2--230 CPUs must
have firmware version 1.6 or later. To use
the pointer method of writing values,
D2--240 CPUs require firmware version
2.2 or later.
All versions of the D2--250--1 and
D2--260 CPU’s firmware support this
module and the pointer method.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
CH8+
ANALOG IN
4--20mA
ANALOG
8CH
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
4--3
The following tables provide the specifications for the F2--08AD--1 Analog Input
Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your
application requirements.
Input
Specifications
Number of Channels
8, single ended (one common)
Input Range
4 to 20 mA current
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Step Response
1 ms (*7 ms) to 95% of full step change
Crosstalk
--70 dB, 1 count maximum
Active Low--Pass Filtering
--3dB @ 200Hz (-6 dB per octave)
Input Impedance
250Ω 0.1%, ½W current input
Absolute Maximum Ratings
--45 mA to +45 mA,
mA current input
Linearity Error (End to End)
1 count (0.025%
(0 025% of full scale) maximum
Input Stability
1 count
Full Scale Calibration Error
(Offset Error Included)
5 counts maximum, @ 20.000mA
Offset Calibration Error
2 counts maximum
maximum, @ 4.000mA
4 000mA
Maximum Inaccuracy
.1% @ 25C
25 C
.25% 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F)
Accuracy vs. Temperature
50 ppm/_C
ppm/ C maximum full scale calibration
(including maximum offset change)
Recommended Fuse (external)
0 032 A,
0.032
A Series 217 fast-acting,
fast-acting current inputs
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in
4096).
General
Specifications
1 channel per scan maximum (DL230 CPU)
8 channels per scan maximum (DL240/250--1/260 CPU)
Data Acquisition Time
3ms/channel (asynchronous)
Digital Inputs
Input Points Required
12 binary data bits, 3 channel ID bits, 1 broken
transmitter detection bit
16 point (X) input module
Power Budget Requirement
100 mA (*50 mA) maximum,
maximum 5 VDC (supplied by base)
External Power Supply
5 mA (*80 mA) maximum, 10--30 VDC (*18--26.4 VDC)
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
--20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental air
No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304
* Values in parenthesis with an asterisk are for older modules with two circuit board design and date codes 0609B5
and previous. Values not in parenthesis are for single circuit board models with date code 0709C1 and above.
Analog Input
Configuration
Requirements
The F2-08AD-1 Analog Input appears as a 16-point discrete input module. The
module can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system. The available power budget
and discrete I/O points are the limiting factors. Check the user manual for your
particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget
and number of local, local expansion or remote I/O points.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
PLC Update Rate
4--4
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
Special
Placement
Requirements
(DL230 and
Remote I/O Bases)
Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the
configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you will see in the section on writing
the program, you use V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place
the module so that the input points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the
instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when placing this module in a
remote base using a D2--RSSS in the CPU slot.
F2-08AD-1
Correct!
Slot 0
Slot 1
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
Slot 2
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Output
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
X20
-X37
X40
-X57
Y0
-Y17
V40400
Data is correctly entered so input
points start on a V-memory boundary.
Slot 3
Slot 4
V40402
V40401
MSB
LSB
X
3
7
X
2
0
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
Incorrect
F2-08AD-1
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
8pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
Slot 4
16pt
Output
X0
-X7
X10
-X27
X30
-X47
X50
-X67
Y0
-Y17
Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230.
MSB
X
3
7
V40401
LSB
X X
3 2
0 7
X
2
0
MSB
V40400
LSB
X X
1 7
0
X
1
7
X
0
To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first input address
assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The table also
shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations.
X X0
X20
X40
X60
X100
X120
X140
X160
V V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
4--5
Setting the Module Jumpers
There are three jumpers, labeled +1, +2,
and +4 that are used to select the
number of channels that will be used.
See the figures below to locate the
jumpers on your module. The module is
set from the factory for eight channel
operation (all three jumpers installed).
Any unused channels are not
processed. For example, if you only
select channels 1 thru 3, channels 4 thru
8 will not be active. The following table
shows how to set the jumpers to select
the number of channels.
No. of
+4
Channels
+1
+2
1
No
No
No
1,2
Yes No
No
1,2,3
No
Yes
No
For example, to select 8-channel
1,2,3,4
Yes Yes
No
operation, leave all three jumpers
1,2,3,4,5
No
No
Yes
installed. To select only channel 1,
1,2,3,4,5,6
Yes No
Yes
remove (or store on a single post to
1,2,3,4,5,6,7 No
Yes
Yes
prevent losing them) all three jumpers.
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 Yes Yes
Yes
Selecting the
Number of
Channels
Yes = jumper installed
No = jumper removed
+1 +2
Jumper Location on Modules Having
Date Code 0709C1 and Above
(Single Circuit Board Design)
+4
+1+2
+4
+4
+2
+1
These jumpers are located on the
motherboard, the one with the black
D-shell style backplane connector.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
Jumper Location on Modules Having
Date Code 0609B9 and Previous
(Two Circuit Board Design)
4--6
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
Connecting the Field Wiring
Wiring Guidelines
User Power
Supply
Requirements
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things
to consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do
not ground the shield at both the module and the source.
S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches,
or transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the
risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose
the correct method for your application.
The F2-08AD-1 requires at least one field-side power supply. You may use the
same or separate power sources for the module supply and the current transmitter
supply. The module requires 18--26.4VDC, at 80 mA.
The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of
current . You may use this instead of a separate supply if you are using only a couple
of analog modules.
It is desirable in some situations to power the transmitters separately in a location
remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the transmitter supply meets the
voltage and current requirements, and the transmitter minus (--) side and the
module supply’s minus (--) side are connected together.
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you
calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable
system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise,
you may notice 3--5 counts of instability in the analog input data if you use the base
power supply. If this is unacceptable, you should try one of the following.
1. Use a separate linear power supply.
2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw
terminal marked “G” on the base.
By using these methods, the input stability is rated at 1 count.
If you want to use a separate supply, choose one that meets the following
requirements: 18--26.4 VDC, 80mA current.
Current Loop
Transmitter
Impedance
Standard 4 to 20 mA transmitters and transducers can operate from a wide variety
of power supplies. Not all transmitters are alike and the manufacturers often specify
a minimum loop or load resistance that must be used with the transmitter.
The F2-08AD-1 provides 250 ohm resistance for each channel. If your transmitter
requires a load resistance below 250 ohms, you do not have to make any
adjustments. However, if your transmitter requires a load resistance higher than
250 ohms, you need to add a resistor in series with the module.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
4--7
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
Consider the following example for a transmitter being operated from a 30 VDC
supply with a recommended load resistance of 750 ohms. Since the module has a
250 ohm resistor, you need to add an additional resistor.
R = Tr − Mr
R = 750 − 250
R ≥ 500
R -- resistor to add
Tr -- Transmitter Requirement
Mr -- Module resistance (internal 250 ohms)
Two-wire Transmitter
+
-DC Supply
+30V
0V
Wiring Diagram
Module Channel 1
R
CH1+
CH1-0V
250 ohms
The F2-08AD-1 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply
squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the
module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. The diagram shows
separate module and transmitter power supplies. If you desire to use only one
field-side supply, just combine the supplies’ positive (+) terminals into one node,
and remove the transmitter supply.
Module Supply
18-26.4VDC
+
--
Internal
Module
Wiring
Typical User Wiring
See NOTE 1
0 VDC
DC to DC
Converter
+24 VDC
--
-CH3
2-wire
+
4--20mA
Transmitter
-CH4
2-wire
+
4--20mA
Transmitter
250 
+5V
+15V
0V
--15V
F2--08AD-1
CH2+
CH3+
Fuse
CH4+
CH5+
Fuse
250 
250 
CH6+
CH7+
Fuse
10--30VDC
5mA
250 
Analog Switch
-CH2
3--wire
+
4--20mA
Transmitter
CH1+
ANALOG
8CH
250 
CH1+
CH2+
CH4+
250 
CH5+
CH6+
250 
Fuse
A to D
Converter
CH3+
250 
CH8+
0V
+24V
CH7+
CH8+
ANALOG IN
4--20mA
+
--
Transmitter
Supply
OV
NOTE 1: Shields should be grounded at the signal source.
NOTE 2: More than one external power supply can be used, provided all the power supply commons are connected.
NOTE 3: A Series 217, 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for 4--20 mA current loops.
NOTE 4: If the power supply common of an external power supply is not connected to the 0V terminal on the module, then the output of
the external transmitter must be isolated. To avoid “ground loop” errors, recommended 4--20 mA transmitter types are:
-- For 2 or 3 wire connections: Isolation between the input supply signal and the power supply.
‘
-- For 4 wire connections: Isolation between the input supply signal, the power supply, and the 4--20 mA output.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
+
-CH1
4--wire
+
4--20mA
Transmitter
+
IN
4--8
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
Module Operation
Channel
Scanning
Sequence for a
DL230 CPU
(Multiplexing)
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to
understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals.
The F2-08AD-1 module can supply different amounts of data per scan, depending
on the type of CPU you are using. The DL230 can obtain one channel of data per
CPU scan. Since there are eight channels, it can take up to eight scans to get data
for all channels. Once all channels have been scanned the process starts over with
channel 1. Unused channels are not processed, so if you select only two channels,
then each channel will be updated every other scan. The multiplexing method can
also be used for DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.
Scan
System With
DL230 CPU
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Scan N
Channel 1
Scan N+1
Channel 2
(repeat for ch. 3--6)
Store data
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
Write to Outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Scan N+6
Channel 7
Scan N+7
Channel 8
Scan N+8
Channel 1
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
Channel Scanning
Sequence with
a DL240, DL250--1
or DL260 CPU
(Pointer Method)
4--9
If you are using a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you can obtain all eight channels of input
data in one scan. This is because the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs support
special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer (this is
discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.)
Scan
System With
DL240/250--1/
260CPU
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8
Write to Outputs
Analog Module
Updates
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan,
the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts
the signal to a 12-bit binary representation. This enables the module to
continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete
control logic in the RLL program.
For the vast majority of applications, the values are updated much faster than the
signal changes. However, in some applications the update time can be important.
The module takes approximately 7mS to sense 95% of the change in the analog
signal.
Note, this is not the amount of time required to convert the signal to a digital
representation. The conversion to the digital representation takes only a few
microseconds. Many manufacturers list the conversion time, but it is the settling
time of the filter that really determines the update time.
4--10
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
Understanding
the Input
Assignments
You may recall the F2-08AD-1 module requires 16 discrete input points in the CPU.
You can use these points to obtain:
S an indication of which channel is active.
S the digital representation of the analog signal.
S module diagnostic information.
Since all input points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to
determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-08AD-1
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
X20
-X37
X40
-X57
V40400
V40402
V40401
MSB
X XXX
3 3 3 3
7 6 5 4
Slot 4
16pt
Output
Y0
-Y17
V40500
LSB
Data Bits
X
2
0
Within these word locations, the individual bits represent specific information about
the analog signal.
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
Analog Data Bits
The first twelve bits represent the
analog data in binary format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
6
64
1
2
7
128
2
4
8
256
3
8
9
512
4
16
10
1024
5
32
11
2048
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
V40401
MSB
LSB
1 11 11 1 9 8 7 65 4 3 21 0
5 43 21 0
= data bits
4--11
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
Active Channel Three of the inputs are binary-encoded
Indicator Inputs to indicate the active channel.
(Remember, the V-memory bits are
mapped directly to discrete inputs.) The
inputs are automatically turned on and
off to indicate the active channel for each
scan.
Scan
X34 X35
X36 Channel
N
Off
Off
Off
1
N+1
On
Off
Off
2
N+2
Off
On
Off
3
N+3
On
On
Off
4
N+4
Off
Off
On
5
N +5
On
Off
On
6
N +6
Off
On
On
7
N +7
On
On
On
8
Module
Diagnostic
Inputs
Since the module has 12-bit resolution,
the analog signal is converted into 4096
counts ranging from 0 -- 4095 (212). For
example, a 4mA signal would be 0 and a
20mA signal would be 4095. This is
equivalent to a a binary value of 0000
0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to
FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows
how this relates to the signal range.
Each count can also be expressed in
terms of the signal level by using the
equation shown.
LSB
XX X
3 3 3
6 5 4
X
2
0
= channel inputs
V40401
MSB
LSB
X
3
7
X
2
0
= diagnostic inputs
4 -- 20mA
20mA
4mA
0
4095
Resolution = H − L
4095
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
16mA / 4095 = 3.907A per count
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
Module
Resolution
The last input (X37 in this example) is the
broken transmitter and missing 24 volts
input power indicator.
When X37 is on, the input transmitter
maybe broken for the corresponding
input.
If there is no external 24 volts input
power, or if there is a loose or missing
terminal block, then X37 goes on and a
value of zero is returned for all enabled
channels.
V40401
MSB
4--12
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
Writing the Control Program
Reading Values:
Pointer Method
and Multiplexing
Pointer Method

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
There are two methods of reading values:
S The pointer method
S Multiplexing
You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also
use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not
work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs,
but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer
method.
The DL205 series has special V-memory locations (shown in the tables on the next
page) that are assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming
requirements. These V-memory locations allow you to:
S specify the data format
S specify the number of channels to scan
S specify the storage locations
NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release 2.2 or later supports this method.
DL250 CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. If you
must use the DL230 example, module placement in the base is very important.
Review the section earlier in this chapter for guidelines.
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
The example program below shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung
anywhere in the ladder program or in the Initial Stage if you are using RLL PLUS
instructions. This is all that is required to read the data into V-memory locations.
Once the data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data, compare the data
against preset values, and so forth. V2000 is used in the example, but you can use
any user V-memory location. In this example the module is installed in slot 2. You
should use the V-memory locations for your module placement. The pointer method
automatically converts values to BCD.
SP0
LD
K 08 00
- or -
LD
K 88 00
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the
number of channels (i.e. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math
functions, whereas the DL250 does.
OUT
V7662
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 2 that contains the
number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered
here would designate the following addresses.
Ch1 - V2000, Ch2 - V2001, Ch3 - V2002, Ch 4 - V2003
Ch5 - V2004, Ch6 - V2005, Ch7 - V2006, Ch8 - V2007
OUT
V7672
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7672 is assigned to slot
2 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal
value in this location to determine exactly where to store the
incoming data.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
4--13
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240,
DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0
(zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two
places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the
pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230
(multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero.
The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667
Storage Pointer
V7670 V7671 V7672 V7673 V7674 V7675 V7676 V7677
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Storage Pointer
V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Storage Pointer
V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Storage Pointer
V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Storage Pointer
V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
4--14
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
Reading Values
Multiplexing

 
230

240 250-- 1 260
The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to
automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a
single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is
being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to
use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored.
Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The
addresses used would be different if the module was installed in another I/O
configuration. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program or if you are
using stage programming place them in a stage that is always active.
SP1
Store Channel 1
X34
X35
X36
Store Channel 2
X34
X35
X36
LD
V40401
Loads the complete data word into the
accumulator. The V-memory location depends on
the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the
memory map.
ANDD
KFFF
This instruction masks the channel identification
bits. Without this, the values used will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
BCD
It is usually easier to perform math operations in
BCD, so it is best to convert the data to BCD
immediately. You can leave out this instruction if
your application does not require it.
OUT
V2000
When X34, X35 and X36 are off, channel 1 data
is stored in V2000.
OUT
V2001
When X34 is on, X35 and X36 are off, and
broken transmitter detect is off, channel 2 data
is stored in V2001.
OUT
V2006
When X35 and X36 are on and X34 is off,
channel 7 data is stored in V2006.
OUT
V2007
When X34, X35 and X36 are on, channel 8 data
is stored in V2007.
(repeat for channels 3 -- 6)
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
Store Channel 7
X34
X35
X36
Store Channel 8
X34
X35
X36
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
Single
Channel
Selected
Since you do not have to determine which channel is selected, the single channel
program is even more simple.
Store Channel 1
X36
X34
X35
Loads the complete data word into the
accumulator. The V-memory location depends
on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for
the memory map.
This instruction masks the channel
identification bits. Without this, the values used
will not be correct, so do not forget to include it.
It is usually easier to perform math operations
in BCD, so it is best to convert the data to BCD
immediately. You can leave out this instruction
if your application does not require it.
LD
V40401
ANDD
KFFF
BCD
OUT
V2000
Analog Power
Failure
Detection
4--15
When X34, X35 and X36 are off, channel 1 data
is stored in V2000.
The analog module has an on-board processor that can diagnose analog input
circuit problems. You can easily create a simple ladder rung to detect these
problems. This rung shows an input point that would be assigned if the module I/O
begins at X20 as shown in the previous examples. A different point would be used if
the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement.
Multiplexing method
V2000
K0
X37
C1
=
OUT
V-memory location V2000 holds
channel 1 data. When a data value
of zero is returned and input X37 is
on, then the analog circuitry is not
operating properly.
Pointers method
V2000
K8000
C1
Scaling the
Input Data
Most applications usually require
measurements in engineering units,
which provide more meaningful data.
This is accomplished by using the
conversion formula shown.
You may have to make adjustments to
the formula depending on the scale you
choose for the engineering units.
V-memory location V2000 holds
channel 1 data. When a data value
of 8000 is returned, then the analog
circuitry is not operating properly.
Units = A H − L
4095
H = high limit of the engineering
unit range
L = low limit of the engineering
unit range
A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)
For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 99.9 then you
would have to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when
you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer.
Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
=
OUT
4--16
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
Analog value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI
Example without multiplier
Example with multiplier
Units = A H − L
4095
Units = 2024 100 − 0
4095
Units = 10 A H − L
4095
Units = 49
Units = 494
Units = 20240 100 − 0
4095
Handheld Display
Handheld Display
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0049
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0494
This value is more accurate.
Here is how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit
conversion. Note, this example will work with all DL205 CPUs, but it assumes you
have already loaded the BCD data into the appropriate V-memory locations using
instructions that apply for the model of CPU you are using.
Note, this example uses SP1, which is always on. You
could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
SP1
LD
V2000
When SP1 is on, load channel 1 data to the accumulator.
MUL
K1000
Multiply the accumulator by 1000 (to start the conversion).
DIV
K4095
Divide the accumulator by 4095.
Store the result in V2010.
OUT
V2010
Analog and
Digital Value
Conversions
Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion
easier.
Range
4 to 20mA
If you know the digital value...
A = 16D + 4
4095
For example, if you have measured the
signal as 10mA, you can use the formula
to easily determine the digital value that
will be stored in the V-memory location
that contains the data.
If you know the analog signal level...
D = 4095 (A − 4)
16
D = 4095 (A − 4)
16
D = 4095 (10mA – 4)
16
D = (255.93) (6)
D = 1536
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input
Filtering Input
Noise (DL250--1,
DL260 CPU Only)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
4--17
Add the following logic to filter and smooth analog input noise in DL250--1 and
DL260 CPUs. This is especially useful when using PID loops. Noise can be
generated by the field device and/or induced by field wiring.
The analog value in BCD is first converted to a binary number because there is not a
BCD-to-real conversion instruction. Memory location V1400 is the designated
workspace in this example. The MULR instruction is the filter factor, which can be
from 0.1 to 0.9. The example uses 0.2. A smaller filter factor increases filtering. You
can use a higher precision value, but it is not generally needed. The filtered value is
then converted back to binary and then to BCD. The filtered value is stored in
location V1402 for use in your application or PID loop.
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example,
if you are using the pointer method to get the analog value, it is in BCD and must be
converted to binary. However, if you are using the conventional method of reading
analog and are masking the first twelve bits, then it is already in binary and no
conversion using the BIN instruction is needed.
SP1
LD
V2000
BIN
BTOR
Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to
binary. Remember, this instruction is not
needed if the analog value is originally
brought in as a binary number.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the
accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor),
and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value.
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
RTOB
BCD
OUT
V1402
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-1
8-Ch. Current Input
SUBR
V1400
F2-08AD-2
8-Channel Analog
Voltage Input
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Setting the Module Jumpers
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Writing the Control Program
5
5--2
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Module Specifications
NOTE: A re--designed F2--08AD--2 with a single circuit board design was released in 2009.
The jumper link location is different. See Setting the Module Jumpers on page 5--5. Also,
some specifications were changed on page 5--3. Otherwise, the re--designed module
functions the same as the prior design.
The F2-08AD-2 Analog Voltage Input
module provides several hardware
features:
S Analog inputs are optically isolated
from the PLC logic.
S The module has a removable
terminal block so the module can
be easily removed or changed
without disconnecting the wiring.
S With a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260
CPU, you can update all channels
in one scan.
IN
F2-08AD-2
10--30VDC
5mA
0V
+24V
CH1+
CH2+
CH3+
CH4+
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
Firmware Requirements:
To use this module, D2--230 CPUs must
have firmware version 1.6 or later. To use
the pointer method of writing values,
D2--240 CPUs require firmware version
2.2 or later.
All versions of the D2--250--1 and
D2--260 CPU’s firmware support this
module and the pointer method.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
CH5+
CH6+
CH7+
CH8+
ANALOG IN
0--5,0--10VDC
+/--5,+/--10VDC
ANALOG
8CH
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
5--3
The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-08AD-2 Analog Input
Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your
application requirements.
Input
Specifications
Number of Channels
8, single ended (one common)
Input Ranges
0 - 5V, 0 - 10V,  5V.,  10V.
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096) unipolar (0 -- 4095)
13 bit (1 in 8192) bipolar (--4095 -- +4095)
Step Response
1 ms (*4 ms) to 95% of full step change
Crosstalk
--70 dB, 1 count maximum
Active Low--Pass Filtering
--3dB @ 200Hz (-6 dB per octave)
Input Impedance
> 20MΩ
Maximum Continuous Overload
--75 VDC to +75 VDC
Linearity Error (End to End)
±0.025% of span (1 count maximum unipolar)
(  2 count maximum bipolar)
Input Stability
1 count
Full Scale Calibration Error
(Offset error not included)
3 counts maximum
Offset Calibration Error
1 count maximum,
maximum @ 0 VDC
Maximum Inaccuracy
.1% @ 25C
25 C
.3% 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F)
Accuracy vs. Temperature
50 ppm/_C
ppm/ C maximum full scale calibration
(including maximum offset change of 2 counts)
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in
4096).
General
Specifications
1 channel per scan maximum (DL230 CPU)
8 channels per scan maximum (DL240/250--1/260 CPU)
Data Acquisition Time
3ms/channel (asynchronous)
Digital Inputs
Input points required
12 binary data bits, 1 sign bit, 3 channel ID bits,
1 diagnostic bit
16 point (X) input module
Power Budget Requirement
100 mA (*60 mA) maximum,
maximum 5 VDC (supplied by base)
External Power Supply
5 mA (*80 mA) maximum, 10--30 (*18--26.4) VDC
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
--20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental air
No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304
* Values in parenthesis with an asterisk are for older modules with two circuit board design and date codes 0609D4
and previous. Values not in parenthesis are for single circuit board models with date code 0709E1 and above.
Analog Input
Configuration
Requirements
The F2-08AD-2 Analog Input appears as a 16-point discrete input module. The
module can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system. The available power budget
and discrete I/O points are the limiting factors. Check the user manual for your
particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget
and number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
PLC Update Rate
5--4
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Special Placement
Requirements
(DL230 and
Remote I/O Bases)
Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the
configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you will see in the section on writing
the program, you use V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place
the module so that the input points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the
instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when placing this module in a
remote base using a D2--RSSS in the CPU slot.
F2-08AD-2
Correct!
Slot 0
Slot 1
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
Slot 2
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Output
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
X20
-X37
X40
-X57
Y0
-Y17
V40400
Data is correctly entered so input points
start on a V-memory boundary.
Slot 3
Slot 4
V40402
V40401
MSB
LSB
X
3
7
X
2
0
Incorrect
F2-08AD-2
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
8pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
Slot 4
16pt
Output
X0
-X7
X10
-X27
X30
-X47
X50
-X67
Y0
-Y17
Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230.
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
MSB
V40401
LSB
X X
3 2
0 7
X
3
7
X
2
0
MSB
X
1
7
V40400
LSB
X X
1 7
0
X
0
To use the required V-memory references, the first input address assigned to the
module must be one of the following X locations. The table also shows the
V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations.
X X0
X20
X40
X60
X100
X120
X140
X160
V V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
5--5
Setting the Module Jumpers
There are three jumpers, labeled +1, +2,
and +4 that are used to select the
number of channels that will be used.
See the figures below to locate the
jumpers on your module. The module is
set from the factory for eight channel
operation (all three jumpers installed).
Any unused channels are not
processed. For example, if you only
select channels 1 thru 3, channels 4 thru
8 will not be active. The following table
shows how to set the jumpers to select
the number of channels.
No. of
+4
Channels
+1
+2
1
No
No
No
1,2
Yes No
No
1,2,3
No
Yes
No
1,2,3,4
Yes Yes
No
1,2,3,4,5
No
No
Yes
1,2,3,4,5,6
Yes No
Yes
1,2,3,4,5,6,7 No
Yes
Yes
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 Yes Yes
Yes
Selecting the
Number of
Channels
Jumper Location on Modules Having
Date Code 0609D4 and Previous
(Two Circuit Board Design)
+1
+2
For example, to select 8-channel
operation, leave all three jumpers
installed. To select only channel 1,
remove (or store on a single post to
prevent losing them) all three jumpers.
Yes = jumper installed
No = jumper removed
Jumper Location on Modules Having
Date Code 0709E1 and Above
(Single Circuit Board Design)
+4
Use jumpers +1, +2
and +4 to select
number of channels.
+1 +2
+4
+4
+2 +1
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
These jumpers are located on the
motherboard, the one with the black
D-shell style backplane connector.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
5--6
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Selecting the
Input Voltage
Range
There is another jumper labeled J3 that
is used to select between the 5V ranges
and the 10V ranges. See the figures
below to locate the jumber on your
module. The module comes from the
factory set for 10V operation (jumper is
removed and is stored on one of the
pins).
Jumper J3 Location on Modules Having
Date Code 0609D4 and Previous
(Two Circuit Board Design)
Install J3 for 0--5V or 5V
operation. Remove J3 or store
on single pin, for 0 to 10 or
10V operation.
Jumper J3 Location on Modules Having
Date Code 0709E1 and Above
(Single Circuit Board Design)
J3
Jumper J3
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
J3 is located on the smaller circuit board,
which is on top of the motherboard.
Install J3 for 0--5V or 5V operation.
Remove J3 or store on single pin, for 0 to 10
or 10V operation.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Install J3 for 0--5V or 5V operation.
Remove J3 or store on single pin, for
0 to 10 or 10V operation.
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
5--7
Connecting the Field Wiring
Wiring
Guidelines
User Power
Supply
Requirements
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things
to consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do
not ground the shield at both the module and the source.
S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches,
or transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the
risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose
the correct method for your application.
You may use the same or separate power source for the transmitter voltage supply.
The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of
current. You may use this instead of a separate supply if you are using only a couple
of analog modules.
It is desirable in some situations to power the transmitters separately in a location
remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the transmitter supply meets the
voltage and current requirements, and the transmitter’s minus (--) side and the
module supply’s minus (--) side are connected together.
WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you
calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable
system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise,
you may notice ±3--5 counts of instability in the analog input data if you use the
base power supply. If this is unacceptable, try one of the following:
1. Use a separate linear power supply.
2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw
terminal marked “G” on the base.
By using these methods, the input stability is rated at ±1 count.
Unused inputs should be shorted together and connected to common.
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
5--8
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Wiring Diagram
The F2-08AD-2 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply
squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the
module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring.
CH1+
IN
CH1+
Voltage
Transmitter
CH2+
CH2+
F2-08AD-2
CH3+
CH4+
CH5+
Voltage
Transmitter
CH6+
10--30VDC
5mA
ADC
CH3+
Analog Mux
Voltage
Transmitter
0V
+24V
CH1+
CH2+
CH3+
CH4+
CH7+
Voltage
Transmitter
CH8+
CH4+
CH5+
CH6+
CH7+
0 VDC
+24 VDC
+
CH8+
ANALOG IN
0--5,0--10VDC
+/--5,+/--10VDC
--
Transmitter
Supply
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
Note 1: Connect unused channels (CH5+, CH6+, CH7+, CH8+ in this diagram) to common (0 VDC).
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
ANALOG
8CH
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
5--9
Module Operation
Channel
Scanning
Sequence for a
DL230 CPU
(Multiplexing)
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to
understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals.
The F2-08AD-2 module can supply different amounts of data per scan, depending
on the type of CPU you are using. The DL230 can obtain one channel of data per
CPU scan. Since there are eight channels, it can take up to eight scans to get data
for all channels. Once all channels have been scanned the process starts over with
channel 1. Unused channels are not processed, so if you select only two channels,
then each channel will be updated every other scan. The multiplexing method can
also be used for DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.
Scan
System With
DL230 CPU
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Channel 1
Scan N+1
Channel 2
(repeat for ch. 3--6)
Store data
Write to Outputs
Channel
Scanning
Sequence for a
DL240, DL250--1 o
DL260 CPU
(Pointer Method)
Scan N
Scan N+6
Channel 7
Scan N+7
Channel 8
Scan N+8
Channel 1
If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can obtain all eight
channels of input data in one scan. This is because those CPUs supports special
V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer (this is discussed in
more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.)
Scan
System With
DL240/250--1/
260CPU
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8
Write to Outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
Store data
Scan N
5--10
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Analog Module
Updates
Understanding
the Input
Assignments
Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan,
the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts
the signal to a 12-bit binary representation. This enables the module to
continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete
control logic in the RLL program.
For the vast majority of applications, the values are updated much faster than the
signal changes. However, in some applications the update time can be important.
The module takes approximately 4ms to sense 95% of the change in the analog
signal.
Note, this is not the amount of time required to convert the signal to a digital
representation. The conversion to the digital representation takes only a few
microseconds. Many manufacturers list the conversion time, but it is the settling
time of the filter that really determines the update time.
You may recall the F2-08AD-2 module requires 16 discrete input points in the CPU.
You can use these points to obtain:
S an indication of which channel is active.
S the digital representation of the analog signal.
S module diagnostic information.
Since all input points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to
determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-08AD-2
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Input
16pt
Input
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
X20
-X37
X40
-X57
V40400
MSB
Slot 4
16pt
Output
Y0
-Y17
V40402
V40401
X XXX
3 3 3 3
7 6 5 4
V40500
LSB
Data Bits
X
2
0
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
Within these word locations, the individual bits represent specific information about
the analog signal.
Analog Data Bits
The first twelve bits represent the analog
data in binary format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
6
64
1
2
7
128
2
4
8
256
3
8
9
512
4
16
10
1024
5
32
11
2048
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
V40401
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 10
= data bits
5--11
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Active Channel
Indicator Inputs
Module
Diagnostic
and Sign
Module
Resolution
Three of the inputs are binary-encoded
to indicate the active channel.
(remember, the V-memory bits are
mapped directly to discrete inputs.) The
inputs are automatically turned on and
off to indicate the active channel for each
scan.
Scan
X34 X35
X36 Channel
N
Off
Off
Off
1
N+1
On
Off
Off
2
N+2
Off
On
Off
3
N+3
On
On
Off
4
N+4
Off
Off
On
5
N +5
On
Off
On
6
N +6
Off
On
On
7
N +7
On
On
On
8
V40401
MSB
X XX
3 3 3
6 5 4
X
2
0
= channel inputs
The MSB input is the broken transmitter/
no 24 volts indicator and sign indicator.
If bit is on and the data is zero, there is no
24 volts input power or the terminal block is
loose or missing. If the data is not zero
then the input represents the sign bit.
Since the module has 12-bit unipolar
resolution, the analog signal is
converted into 4096 counts ranging from
0 -- 4095 (212). For example, with a 0 to
10V scale, a 0V signal would be 0, and a
10V signal would be 4095. This is
equivalent to a binary value of 0000
0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to
FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows
how this relates to each signal range.
The bipolar ranges utilize a sign bit to
provide 13-bit resolution. A value of
4095 can represent the upper limit of
either side of the range. Use the sign bit
to determine negative values.
LSB
V40401
MSB
X
3
7
LSB
X
2
0
= diagnostic input / sign bit
Unipolar
Ranges
Bipolar
Ranges
+V
+V
0V
0V
0
4095
--V
--4095
0
4095
Unipolar Resolution = H – L
4095
H
Bipolar Resolution = – L
8191
H or L = high or low limit of the range
Range
Signal Span
(H -- L)
Divide By
Smallest Detectable
Change
0 to +10V
10V
4095
2.44 mV
--10 to +10V
20V
8191
2.44 mV
0 to +5V
5V
4095
1.22 mV
--5V to +5V
10V
8191
1.22 mV
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation
shown. The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will
result in one LSB change in the data value for each input signal range.
5--12
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Writing the Control Program
Reading Values:
Pointer Method
and Multiplexing
Pointer Method

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
There are two methods of reading values:
S The pointer method
S Multiplexing
You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also
use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not
work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs,
but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer
method.
The DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs have special V-memory locations
assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements.
These V-memory locations:
S specify the data format.
S specify the number of channels to scan.
S specify the storage locations.
NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release 2.2 or later supports this method. DL250
CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. If you must
use the DL230 example, module placement in the base is very important. Review
the section earlier in this chapter for guidelines.
The example program shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung
anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage
programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the data into V-memory
locations. Once the data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data,
compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 is used in the
example, but you can use any user V-memory location. In this example the module
is installed in slot 2. You should use the V-memory locations for your module
placement. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD.
SP0
LD
K 08 00
- or -
LD
K 88 00
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the
number of channels (i.e. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8).
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math
functions, whereas the DL250 does.
OUT
V7662
LDA
O2000
OUT
V7672
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 2 that contains the
number of channels to scan.
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered
here would designate the following addresses.
Ch1 -- V2000, Ch2 -- V2001, Ch3 -- V2002, Ch4 -- V2003
Ch5 - V2004, Ch6 - V2005, Ch7 - V2006, Ch8 -V2007
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7672 is assigned to slot
2 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal
value in this location to determine exactly where to store the
incoming data.
5--13
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240,
DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0
(zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two
places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the
pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230
(multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero.
The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667
Storage Pointer
V7670 V7671 V7672 V7673 V7674 V7675 V7676 V7677
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Storage Pointer
V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Storage Pointer
V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Storage Pointer
V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Storage Pointer
V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
No. of Channels
5--14
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Using Bipolar
Ranges
(Pointer Method)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic to determine whether the
value being returned represents a positive or a negative voltage. For example, you
may need to know the direction for a motor. With the pointer method, you cannot
use the last input (X37 in the previous examples) to show the sign for each channel
because the DL240/250--1/260 read all eight channels in one scan. If you tried to
use X37, you would only be monitoring the last channel that was read. You would
not be able to determine the sign for the previous channels. There is a simple
solution:
S If you get a value greater than or equal to 8001, the value is negative.
The sign bit is the most significant bit, which combines 8000 to the data value. If the
value is greater than or equal to 8001, you only have to mask the most significant bit
and the active channel bits to determine the actual data value.
The following program shows how you can accomplish this. Since you always want
to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be placed before any other
operations that use the data, such as math instructions, scaling operations, and so
forth. Also, if you are using stage programming instructions, these rungs should be
in a stage that is always active. Note, you only need this logic for each channel that
is using bipolar input signals. The example only shows two channels.
Check Channel 1
SP1
V2000
LD
V2000
Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the
accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative.
Contact SP1 is always on.
ANDD
K7FFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data if it
is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct, so do not forget to include it.
OUT
V2020
Put the actual signal value in V2020. Now you can use
the data normally.
K8001
C1
OUT
²
Check Channel 2
SP1
V2001
Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of --1
reads as 8001, --2 is 8002, etc.).
LD
V2001
Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator.
Remember, the data can be negative. Contact SP1 is
always on.
ANDD
K7FFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data, if it
is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct, so do not forget to include it.
OUT
V2021
Put the actual signal value in V2021. Now you can use
the data normally.
K8001
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
²
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
C2
OUT
Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of --1
reads as 8001, --2 is 8002, etc.).
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Reading Values
(Multiplexing)
   
230
240 250-- 1 260
5--15
The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to
automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a
single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is
being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to
use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored.
Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The
addresses used would be different if the module was used in a different slot. You
can place these rungs anywhere in the program, or if you are using stage
programming instructions place them in a stage that is always active.
SP1
Store Channel 1
X34
X35
X36
Store Channel 2
X34
X35
X36
LD
V40401
Loads the complete data word into the
accumulator. The V-memory location depends on
the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the
memory map.
ANDD
KFFF
This instruction masks the channel identification
bits. Without this, the values used will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
BCD
It is usually easier to perform math operations in
BCD, so it is best to convert the data to BCD
immediately. You can leave out this instruction if
your application does not require it.
OUT
V2000
When X34, X35 and X36 are off, channel 1 data
is stored in V2000.
OUT
V2001
When X34 is on, X35 and X36 are off, and
broken transmitter detect is off, channel 2 data
is stored in V2001.
(repeat for channels 3 -- 6)
Store Channel 7
X34
X35
X36
Store Channel 8
X34
X35
X36
Single
Channel
Selected
OUT
V2006
When X35 and X36 are on and X34 is off,
channel 7 data is stored in V2006.
OUT
V2007
When X34, X35 and X36 are on, channel 8 data
is stored in V2007.
Since you do not have to determine which channel is selected, the single channel
program is even simpler.
Store Channel 1
X36
X34
X35
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator.
The V-memory location depends on the I/O
configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map.
ANDD
KFFF
This instruction masks the channel identification bits.
Without this, the values used will not be correct, so do
not forget to include it.
BCD
OUT
V2000
It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD.
So it is best to convert the data to BCD immediately.
You can leave out this instruction if your application
does not require it.
When the module is not busy, and X34 and X35 are
off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
LD
V40401
5--16
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Using Bipolar
Ranges
(Multiplexing)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic because you need to know if
the value being returned represents a positive voltage or a negative voltage. For
example, you may need to know the direction for a motor. Since the DL230 only
reads one channel per scan, you can use the last input (X37 in the examples) to
show the sign.
The following program shows how you can accomplish this. Since you always want
to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be placed before any
operations that use the data, such as math instructions, scaling operations, and so
forth. Also, if you are using stage programming instructions, these rungs should be
in a stage that is always active. Note, you only need the additional logic for those
channels that are using bipolar input signals. The example shows two channels, but
you can repeat these steps for all eight channels if necessary.
Load Data
SP1
Store Channel 1
X34
X35
X36
LD
V40401
Loads the complete data word into the
accumulator. The V-memory location depends
on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the
memory map.
ANDD
KFFF
This instruction masks the channel identification
bits. Without this, the values used will not be
correct, so do not forget to include it.
BCD
It is usually easier to perform math operations in
BCD, so it is best to convert the data to BCD
immediately. You can leave out this instruction if
your application does not require it.
OUT
V2000
When the module is not busy, and X34, X35 and
X36 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000. C0
is reset to indicate channel 1’s value is positive.
C0
RST
X37
C0
SET
Store Channel 2
X34
X35
X36
OUT
V2001
C1
RST
X37
C1
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
SET
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
If X37 is on, then the data value represents a
negative voltage. C0 is set to indicate channel
1’s value is negative.
When the module is not busy, and X34 is on and
X35 and X36 are off, channel 2 data is stored in
V2001. C1 is reset to indicate channel 2’s value
is positive.
If X37 is on, then the data value represents a
negative voltage. C1 is set to indicate channel
2’s value is negative.
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Using 2’s
Complement
(Multiplexing)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
5--17
The 2’s complement data format may be required to display negative values on
some operator interface devices. It could also be used to simplify data averaging on
bipolar signals. The example shows two channels, but you can repeat these steps
for all eight channels if necessary.
Load data when module is not busy.
X36
LD
V40401
Store Channel 1
X36
X34
X35
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator.
The V-memory location depends on the I/O
configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map.
ANDD
KFFF
This instruction masks the channel identification bits
Without this, the values used will not be correct, so
do not forget to include it.
OUT
V2000
When the module is not busy, and X34, X35 and
X36 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000. C0
is reset to indicate that channel 1’s value is positive.
C0
RST
X37
C0
SET
INV
If X37 is on, then the data value represents a
negative voltage. C0 is set to indicate that
channel 1’s value is negative.
Invert the bit pattern in the accumulator.
BCD
ADDD
K1
X36
X34
X35
Store Channel 2
X36
X34
X35
OUTD
V2040
Channel 1 data is in double word starting at V2040.
OUT
V2001
When the module is not busy, and X34 is on and
X35 and X36 are off, channel 2 data is stored in
V2001. C1 is reset to indicate that channel 2’s
value is positive.
C1
RST
X37
C1
SET
INV
If X37 is on, then the data value represents a
negative voltage. C1 is set to indicate that
channel 2’s value is negative.
Invert the bit pattern in the accumulator.
BCD
X36
X34
X35
OUT
V2042
Channel 2 data is in double word starting at V2042.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
ADDD
K1
5--18
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Analog Power
Failure Detection
The analog module has an on-board RISC-like microcontroller that can diagnose
analog input circuit problems. You can easily create a simple ladder rung to detect
these problems. This rung shows an input point that would be assigned if the
module was used as shown in the previous examples. A different point would be
used if the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement.
Multiplexing method
V2000
=
K0
X37
C1
OUT
V-memory location V2000 holds
channel 1 data. When a data value
of zero is returned and input X37 is
on, the analog channel is not
operating properly.
Pointer method
V2000
Scaling the Input
Data
=
K8000
C1
OUT
Most applications usually require
measurements in engineering units,
which provide more meaningful data.
This is accomplished by using the
conversion formula shown.
You may have to make adjustments to
the formula depending on the scale you
choose for the engineering units.
V-memory location V2000 holds
channel 1 data. When a data value
of 8000 is returned, the analog
channel is not operating properly.
Units = A H − L
4095
H = high limit of the engineering
unit range
L = low limit of the engineering
unit range
A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)
For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 99.9 you would
have to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when you
view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice
how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
Example without multiplier
Example with multiplier
Units = A H − L
4095
Units = 10 A H − L
4095
Units = 2024 100 − 0
4095
Units = 20240 100 − 0
4095
Units = 49
Units = 494
Handheld Display
Handheld Display
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0049
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0494
This value is more accurate.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
5--19
The example below shows how you would write the program to perform the
engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have BCD data loaded
into the appropriate V-memory locations using instructions that apply for the model
of CPU you are using.
Note, this example uses SP1, which is always on. You
could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
SP1
LD
V2000
When SP1 is on, load channel 1 data to the accumulator.
MUL
K1000
Multiply the accumulator by 1000 (to start the conversion).
DIV
K4095
Divide the accumulator by 4095.
OUT
V2010
Analog
and Digital
Value
Conversions
Store the result in V2010.
Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
troubleshooting. Remember, this module does not operate like other versions of
analog input modules that you may be familiar with. The bipolar ranges use 0--4095
for both positive and negative voltages. The sign bit allows this, which actually
provides better resolution than those modules that do not offer a sign bit. The
following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range
If you know the digital value ...
If you know the signal level ...
0 to 5V
--5V to +5V
A = 5D
4095
D = 4095 (A)
5
0 to 10V
--10V to +10V
A = 10D
4095
D = 4095 (A)
10
D = 4095 (A)
10
D = 4095 (6V)
10
D = (409.5) (6)
D = 2457
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
For example, if you are using the --10 to
+10V range and you have measured the
signal at 6V, use the following formula to
determine the digital value that is stored
in the V-memory location that contains
the data.
5--20
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input
Filtering Input
Noise (DL250--1,
DL260 CPUs Only)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
Add the following logic to filter and smooth analog input noise in DL250--1 and
DL260 CPUs. This is especially useful when using PID loops. Noise can be
generated by the field device and/or induced by field wiring.
The analog value in BCD is first converted to a binary number because there is not a
BCD-to-real conversion instruction. Memory location V1400 is the designated
workspace in this example. The MULR instruction is the filter factor, which can be
from 0.1 to 0.9. The example uses 0.2. A smaller filter factor increases filtering. You
can use a higher precision value, but it is not generally needed. The filtered value is
then converted back to binary and then to BCD. The filtered value is stored in
location V1402 for use in your application or PID loop.
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example,
if you are using the pointer method to get the analog value, it is in BCD and must be
converted to binary. However, if you are using the conventional method of reading
analog and are masking the first twelve bits, then it is already in binary and no
conversion using the BIN instruction is needed.
SP1
LD
V2000
BIN
BTOR
F2-08AD-2
8-Ch. Voltage Input
Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to
binary. Remember, this instruction is not
needed if the analog value is originally
brought in as a binary number.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the
accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor),
and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value.
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
RTOB
BCD
OUT
V1402
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not need for PID loop PD (loop PD is a
binary number).
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
F2-04RTD
4-Channel RTD Input
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Setting the Module Jumpers
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Writing the Control Program
6
F2-04RTD
4 Ch. RTD Input
6--2
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
Module Specifications
The F2-04RTD 4-Channel Resistive Temperature Detector
Input Module provides several features and benefits:
S Provides four RTD input channels with 0.1F
resolution.
S Automatically converts type Pt100 jPt100
Pt1000 Cu 25 Cu10 signals into direct
temperature readings. No extra scaling or complex
conversion is required.
S Temperature data format is selectable between
 F or  C , magnitude plus sign, or 2’s complement.
S Precision lead wire resistance compensation by dual
matched current sources and ratiometric
measurements.
S Temperature calculation and linearization are based
on data provided by the National Institute of
Standards and Technology (NIST).
S Diagnostics features include detection of short
circuits and input power disconnection.
IN
RTD
TEMP
F2--04RTD
RTD
INPUT
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
COM
COM
CH3-CH3+
CH4-CH4+
F2-04RTD
Module
Calibration
The module automatically re-calibrates every five seconds to remove any offset
and gain errors. The F2-04RTD module requires no user calibration. However, if
your process requires calibration, it is possible to correct the RTD tolerance using
ladder logic. You can subtract or add a constant to the actual reading for that
particular RTD.
RTD Input
Configuration
Requirements
The F2-04RTD module requires 32 discrete input points from the CPU. The module
can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system, including remote bases. The limiting
factors on the number of analog modules used are:
S For local and local expansion systems, the available power budget and
number of discrete I/O points.
S For remote I/O systems, the available power budget and number of
remote I/O points.
Check the user manual for your particular CPU model for more information
regarding the available power budget and number of local, local expansion or
remote I/O points.
NOTE: DL230 CPUs with firmware release version 1.6 or later, DL240 CPUs with
firmware release 2.5 or later, DL250 CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or
later are required for proper operation.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs
6--3
Input
Specifications
Number of Channels
4, differential inputs
Input Ranges
Pt100
-200C to 850C (-328F to 1562F)
Pt 1000
-200C to 595C (-328F to 1103F)
jPt100
-38C to 450C (-36F to 842F)
10Cu.
-200C to 260C (-328F to 500F)
25Cu.
-200C to 260C (-328F to 500F)
Resolution
0.1 C, 0.1 F (  3276.7)
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Fault protected input, 50 Vdc
Converter Type
Charge balancing, 24-bit
Sampling Rate
160 msec per channel
Linearity Error (End to End)
0.05 C maximum,0.01 C typical
PLC Update Rate
4 Channels/Scan max. 240/250--1/260 CPU
1 Channel/Scan max. 230 CPU
Temperature Drift
5ppm per C (maximum)
Maximum Inaccuracy
1C
RTD Excitation Current
200 A
Common Mode Range
0--5 VDC
Notch Filter
>100dB notches @ 50/60 Hz
f --3dB = 13.1 Hz
Digital Input Points Required
32 (X) input points
15 binary data bits, 1 sign bit, 2 channel ID bits
4 fault bits
Power Budget Requirement
90 mA @ 5 VDC (from base)
Operating Temperature
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
--20 to 70 C (--4 to 158 F)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental air
No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04RTD
4-Ch. RTD Input
The following table provides the specifications for the F2-04RTD module. Review
these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.
F2-04RTD
4 Ch. RTD Input
6--4
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
Special
Placement
Requirements
(DL230 and
Remote I/O Bases)
It is important to examine the configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you
can see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to send
the analog data. If you place the module so that the input points do not start on a
V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies
when placing this module in a remote base using a D2--RSS in the CPU slot. See
the table below.
F2-04RTD
Correct!
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
16pt
Input
32pt
Input
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y27
X0
-X17
X20
-X57
Data is correctly entered so input points start on a
V-memory boundary address from the table below.
V40402
LSB MSB
MSB
X
5
7
XX
54
07
X
4
0
Slot 4
8pt
Input
X60
-X67
V40400
V40403
V40401 -- V40402
V40401
LSB
XX
32
07
X
3
7
X
2
0
Incorrect
F2-04RTD
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
Slot 4
32pt
Input
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y27
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
X30
-X67
Data is split over three locations, so instructions
cannot access data from a DL230.
MSB
X
7
7
V40403
LSB
XX
76
07
X
6
0
V40402
MSB
XX
5 4
0 7
X
5
7
LSB
X
4
0
MSB
X
3
7
V40401
LSB
XX
3 2
0 7
X
2
0
To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first input address
assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The table also
shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations.
X
X0
X20
X40
V
V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
X60
X100
X120
X140
X160
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs
6--5
Jumper
Locations
Selecting the
Number of
Channels
Locate the bank of seven jumpers (J8) on the PC board. Notice that the description
of each jumper is on the PC board. You can select the following options by installing
or removing the jumpers:
S Number of channels: 1 thru 4.
S The input type: 10  ohms) or 25  copper RTDs; jPt 100 , Pt 100 
or Pt 1000  RTDs
S Temperature conversion: 2’s complement or magnitude plus sign format
in Fahrenheit or Celsius.
To prevent losing a jumper when it is removed, store it near its original location by
sliding one of its sockets over a single pin.
The two jumpers labeled CH+1 and CH+2 are used to select the number of channels
that will be used. The factory default setting is four-channel operation (both jumpers
installed). Any unused channels are not processed. For example, if you select
channels 1 thru 3, channel 4 will be inactive. The table shows how to arrange the
jumpers to select the number of channels.
X = jumper installed, empty space = jumper removed
Number of
Channels
Jumper
CH+1
CH+2
1
2
CH+2
Setting
Input Type
RTD-0
X
3
4
J8
CH+1
RTD-1
X
X
X
RTD-2
Jumper
Descriptions
Units-0
Units-1
The jumpers labeled RTD-0, RTD-1, and RTD-2 are used to select the type of RTD.
The module can be used with many types of RTDs. All channels of the module must
be the same RTD type.
The default setting from the factory is Pt100  RTD-2 comes with the jumper
removed). This selects the DIN 43760 European type RTD. European curve type
RTDs are calibrated to DIN 43760, BS1905, or IEC751 specifications which is
.00385  / /  C (100 C = 138.5 ).
The jPt100  type is used for the American curve (.00392 // C), platinum 100 
RTDs. The 10  and 25  RTD settings are used with copper RTDs.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04RTD
4-Ch. RTD Input
Setting the Module Jumpers
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
The table shows how to arrange the jumpers to set the input type.
X = jumper installed, empty space = jumper removed
F2-04RTD
4 Ch. RTD Input
6--6
Jumper Pins
RTD Inputs
RTD-0
RTD-1
RTD-2
Cu 10 
Cu 25 
X
jPt100 
X
Pt100 
X
X
Pt1000 
Selecting the
Conversion
Units
X
Use the last two jumpers, Units-0 and Unit-1, to set the conversion unit. The
options are magnitude + sign or 2’s complement in Fahrenheit or Celsius. The
module comes from the factory with both jumpers installed for magnitude + sign
conversion in Fahrenheit.
All RTD types are converted into a direct temperature reading in either Fahrenheit
or Celsius. The data contains one implied decimal place. For example, a value in
V-memory of 1002 would be 100.2_C or _F.
Negative temperatures can be represented in either 2’s complement or magnitude
plus sign form. If the temperature is negative, the most significant bit in the
V-memory location is set (X17).
The 2’s complement data format may be required to correctly display bipolar data
on some operator interfaces. This data format could also be used to simplify
averaging a bipolar signal. To view this data format in DirectSoft32, select Signed
Decimal.
The table shows how to arrange the jumpers.
X = jumper installed, empty space = jumper removed.
Temperature Conversion Units
Jumper
Magnitude + Sign
_F
_C
Units-0
X
Units-1
X
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
2’s Complement
_F
_C
X
X
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs
6--7
Wiring
Guidelines
RTD -- Resistance
Temperature
Detector
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things
to consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do
not ground the shield at both the module and the source.
S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches,
or transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the
risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose
the correct method for your application.
Use shielded RTDs whenever possible to minimize noise on the input signal.
Ground the shield wire at one end only. Connect the shield wire to the COM
terminal.
Lead Configuration for RTD Sensors
The suggested three-lead configuration shown below provides one lead to the CH+
terminal, one lead to the CH- terminal, and one lead to the common terminal.
Compensation circuitry nulls out the lead length for accurate temperature
measurements.
Some sensors have four leads. When making connections, do not connect the
second lead to the CH+ input; leave that lead unconnected.
Do not use configurations having only one lead connected to each input. There is
no compensation and temperature readings will be inaccurate.
This module has low RTD excitation current, worst-case dissipation is only .016
mW.
Wiring Connections For Typical RTD Sensor
Black
Black
To CH-To COM
Sensor
Red
To CH+
Red (if applicable)
No Connection
(if sensor has 4 leads, only
connect one lead to CH+)
Ambient
Variations in
Temperature
The F2-04RTD module has been designed to operate within the ambient
temperature range of 0_C to 60_C.
Precision analog measurement with no long term temperature drift is assured by a
chopper stabilized programmable gain amplifier, ratiometric referencing, and
automatic offset and gain calibration.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04RTD
4-Ch. RTD Input
Connecting the Field Wiring
F2-04RTD
4 Ch. RTD Input
6--8
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
The F2-04RTD module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply
squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the
module.
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
IN
Note 1
Ch1 +
200 mA
Current
Ch2 --
Source
Ch2 +
C
C
Note 2
x
Ch3 -Ch3 +
Ch4 -Ch4 +
ANALOG MULTIPLEXER
Ch1 --
RTD
TEMP
F2--04RTD
Ref.
Adj.
RTD
INPUT
+
--
CH1-CH1+
A/D
CH2-CH2+
COM
COM
200 mA
Current
CH3--
Source
CH4--
CH3+
CH4+
F2-04RTD
Notes:
1. The three wires connecting the RTD to the module must be the same type and length. Do not use the
shield or drain wire for the third connection.
2. If the RTD sensor has four wires, the plus (+) sense wire should be left unconnected as shown.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs
6--9
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to
understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals.
Channel
Scanning
Sequence for a
DL230 CPU
(Multiplexing)
The F2-04RTD module can supply different amounts of data per scan, depending
on the type of CPU you are using. The DL230 can obtain one channel of data per
CPU scan. Since there are four channels, it can take up to four scans to get data for
all channels. Once all channels have been scanned the process starts over with
channel 1. Unused channels are not processed, so if you select only two channels,
each channel will be updated every other scan. The multplexing method can also
be used for the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.
Scan
System With
DL230 CPU
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Channel 1
Scan N+1
Channel 2
Scan N+2
Channel 3
Scan N+3
Channel 4
Scan N+4
Channel 1
Write to Outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04RTD
4-Ch. RTD Input
Module Operation
F2-04RTD
4 Ch. RTD Input
6--10
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
Channel
Scanning
Sequence for a
DL240, DL250--1
or DL260 CPU
(Pointer Method)
If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can obtain all four channels
of input data in one scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs support
special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is
discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.
Scan
System With
DL240/250--1/260 CPU
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Write to Outputs
Analog Module
Updates
Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan,
the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts
the signal to a 16-bit binary representation. This enables the module to
continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete
control logic in the RLL program.
The time required to sense the temperature and copy the value to V-memory is 160
milliseconds minimum to 640 milliseconds plus 1 scan time maximum (number of
channels x 160 msec + 1 scan time).
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs
6--11
Reading Values:
Pointer Method
and Multiplexing
There are two methods of reading values:
S The pointer method
S Multiplexing
You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also
use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not
work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs,
but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer
method.
Pointer Method
   
The CPU has special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly
simplify the programming requirements. These V-memory locations:
S specify the number of channels to scan.
S specify the storage locations.
230
240 250-- 1 260
The example program shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung
anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage
programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the data into V-memory
locations. Once the data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data,
compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 is used in the
example, but you can use any user V-memory location. In the examples, the
module is installed in slot 2. You should use the V-memory locations used in your
application. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD.
NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release version 2.5 or later and DL250 CPUs
with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. Use the DL230
multiplexing example if your firmware revision is earlier (verify that the addresses in
the CPU are zero).
SP0
LD
K 04 00
- or -
LD
K 84 00
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the
number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math
functions, whereas the DL250 does.
OUT
V7662
LDA
O2000
OUT
V7672
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 2 that contains the
number of channels to scan.
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered
here would designate the following addresses:
Ch1 -- V2000, V2001, Ch 2 -- V2002, V2003, Ch 3 -- V2004, V2005,
Ch 4 -- V2006, V2007.
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7672 is assigned to slot
2 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal
value in this location to determine exactly where to store the
incoming data.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04RTD
4-Ch. RTD Input
Writing the Control Program
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240,
DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0
(zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two
places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the
pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230
(multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero.
F2-04RTD
4 Ch. RTD Input
6--12
The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667
Storage Pointer
V7670 V7671 V7672 V7673 V7674 V7675 V7676 V7677
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Storage Pointer
V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Storage Pointer
V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Storage Pointer
V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Storage Pointer
V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs
6--13
With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic to determine whether the
value being returned represents a positive voltage or a negative voltage. For
example, you may need to know the direction for a motor. There is a simple solution:
S If you are using bipolar ranges and you get a value greater than or
equal to 8000H, the value is negative.
S If you get a value less than or equal to 7FFFH, the value is positive.
230
The sign bit is the most significant bit, which combines 8000H to the data value. If
the value is greater than or equal to 8000H, you only have to mask the most
significant bit and the active channel bits to determine the actual data value.
240 250-- 1 260
NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release version 2.5 or later and DL250 CPUs
with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. Use the DL230
multiplexing example if your firmware revision is earlier.
The following two programs show how you can accomplish this. The first example
uses magnitude plus sign (binary) and the second example uses magnitude plus
sign (BCD).
Since you always want to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be
placed before any other operations that use the data, such as math instructions,
scaling operations, and so forth. Also, if you are using stage programming
instructions, these rungs should be in a stage that is always active. Note: you only
need this logic for each channel that is using bipolar input signals. The following
examples only show two channels.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04RTD
4-Ch. RTD Input
Negative
Temperature
Readings with
Magnitude Plus
Sign (Pointer
Method)
   
F2-04RTD
4 Ch. RTD Input
6--14
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
Magnitude Plus
Sign (Binary)
Check Channel 1
SP1
V2000
Check Channel 2
SP1
Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the
accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on.
ANDD
K7FFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the binary data, if
it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUT
V2010
Put the actual signal value in V2010. Now you can use
the data normally.
K8000
C1
OUT
²
V2002
Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator.
Contact SP1 is always on.
ANDD
K7FFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the binary data, if
it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUT
V2012
Put the actual signal value in V2012. Now you can use
the data normally.
V2001
C2
OUT
Check Channel 1
SP1
Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the
accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative.
Contact SP1 is always on.
ANDD
K7FFFFFFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data, if it
is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUTD
V2010
Put the actual signal value in V2010. Now you can use
the data normally.
C1
OUT
²
V2003
K8000
²
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of
--1.0 reads as 8010, --2.0 is 8020, etc.).
LDD
V2000
K8000
Check Channel 2
SP1
Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of
--1.0 reads as 8010, --2.0 is 8020, etc.).
LD
V2002
K8000
²
Magnitude Plus
Sign (BCD)
LD
V2000
Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of
--1.0 reads as 8000 0010, --2.0 is 8000 0020, etc.).
LDD
V2002
Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator.
Remember, the data can be negative. Contact SP1 is
always on.
ANDD
K7FFFFFFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data, if it
is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUTD
V2012
Put the actual signal value in V2012. Now you can use
the data normally.
C2
OUT
Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of
--1.0 reads as 8000 0010, --2.0 is 8000 0020, etc.).
6--15
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs
230
You can use the 2’s complement mode for negative temperature display purposes,
while at the same time using the magnitude plus sign of the temperature in your
control program. The DirectSOFT32 element Signed Decimal is used to display
negative numbers in 2’s complement form. To find the absolute value of a negative
number in 2’s complement, invert the number and add 1 as shown in the following
example:
240 250-- 1 260
V2000
K8000
Load negative value into the accumulator so we
can convert it to a positive value.
LD
V2000
²
Invert the binary pattern in the accumulator.
INV
ADDB
K1
Add 1.
Save Channel 1 data at V2010.
OUT
V2010
Repeat for other channels as required.
Understanding
the Input
Assignments
(Multiplexing
Ladder Only)
   
230
240 250-- 1 260
You may recall that this module appears to the CPU as a
32-point discrete input module. You can use these points to obtain:
S An indication of which channel is active
S The digital representation of the analog signal
S Module diagnostic information
Since all input points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very
easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-04RTD
Slot 0
Slot 1
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
Slot 2
32pt
Input
16pt
Input
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
X20
-X57
X60
-X77
V40400
MSB
V40402
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
X
5
7
8
7
X X
5 4
0 7
LSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
X
4
0
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Output
Y0
-Y17
V40403
MSB
V40401
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
X
3
7
8
7
LSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
X X
3 2
0 7
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
0
X
2
0
F2-04RTD
4-Ch. RTD Input
Negative
Temperatures
2’s Complement
(Binary / Pointer
Method)
   
6--16
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
F2-04RTD
4 Ch. RTD Input
Remember, when using DL230 CPUs input points must start on a V-memory
boundary. To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first
input address assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The
table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations.
Analog Data Bits
Active
Channel
Bits
Broken
Transmitter
Bits
(Pointer and
Multiplexing
Ladder Methods)
X
X0
X20
X40
X60
V
V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407
The first 16 bits represent the analog
data in binary format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
8
256
1
2
9
512
2
4
10
1024
3
8
11
2048
4
16
12
4096
5
32
13
8192
6
64
14
16384
7
128
15
32768
The active channel bits represent the
multiplexed channel selections in binary
format.
Channel
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
3
1
1
4
The broken transmitter bits are on when
the corresponding RTD is open.
Channel
Bit
8
1
9
2
10
3
11
4
X100
X120
X140
X160
V40401
MSB
LSB
1 1 111 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 321 0
X
3
7
X
2
0
= data bits
V40402
MSB
X
5
7
LSB
10
X
= active channel bits 4
0
V40402
MSB
X
5
7
LSB
11 9 8
10 X
5
0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
4
0
X
4
7
= broken transmitter bits
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs
230
The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to
automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a
single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is
being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to
use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored.
240 250-- 1 260
NOTE: DL230 CPUs with firmware release version 1.6 or later required for
multiplexing ladder.
SP1
Loads the complete data word into the
accumulator. The V-memory location depends on
the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the
memory map.
LD
V40401
This instruction masks the sign bit. Without this,
the values used will not be correct so do not forget
to include it.
ANDD
K7FFF
Store Channel 1
X40
X41
X50
OUT
V2000
C0
When X40, X41, and X50 are off, channel 1 data is
stored in V2000. C0 is reset to indicate that
channel 1’s value is positive.
RST
X37
C0
SET
Store Channel 2
X40
X41
X51
OUT
V2001
C1
If X37 is on, the data value represents a negative
temperature. C0 is set to indicate that channel 1’s
value is negative.
When X40 is on and X41 and X51 are off, channel
2 data is stored in V2001. C1 is reset to indicate
that channel 2’s value is positive.
RST
X37
C1
SET
Store Channel 3
X40
X41
X52
If X37 is on, the data value represents a negative
temperature. C1 is set to indicate that channel 2’s
value is negative.
When X40 and X52 are off and X41 is on, channel
3 data is stored in V2002. C2 is reset to indicate
that channel 3’s value is positive.
OUT
V2002
C2
RST
Store Channel 4
X40
X41
X37
C2
SET
X53
OUT
V2003
C3
If X37 is on, then the data value represents a
negative temperature. C2 is set to indicate that
channel 3’s value is negative.
When both X40 and X41 are on and X53 is off,
channel 4 data is stored in V2003. C3 is reset to
indicate that channel 4’s value is positive.
RST
X37
C3
SET
If X37 is on, the data value represents a negative
temperature. C3 is set to indicate that channel 4’s
value is negative.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04RTD
4-Ch. RTD Input
Reading
Magnitude Plus
Sign Values
(Multiplexing)
   
6--17
F2-04RTD
4 Ch. RTD Input
6--18
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
Reading 2’s
Complement
Values
(Multiplexing)
   
230
240 250-- 1 260
The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to
automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a
single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is
being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to
use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored.
The 2’s complement data format may be required to correctly display bipolar data
on some operator interfaces. This data format could also be used to simplify
averaging a bipolar signal. To view this data format in DirectSOFT32, select Signed
Decimal.
Load Data
SP1
LD
V40401
ANDD
K7FFF
Store Channel 1
X40
X41
X50
Store Channel 2
X40
X41
X51
Store Channel 3
X40
X41
X52
Store Channel 4
X40
X41
X53
Scaling the Input
Data
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator.
The V-memory location depends on the I/O
configuration.
This instruction masks the channel sign bit.
OUT
V2000
When X40, X41 and X50 are off, channel 1 data is
stored in V2000.
OUT
V2001
When X40 is on and X41 and X51 are off, channel 2
data is stored in V2001.
OUT
V2002
OUT
V2003
When X40 and X52 are off and X41 is on, channel 3
data is stored in V2002.
When both X40 and X41 are on and X53 is off, channel
4 data is stored in V2003.
No scaling of the input temperature is required. The readings directly reflect the
actual temperatures. For example: a reading of 8482 is 848.2 _C, a reading of
16386 is --0.2_C. (magnitude plus sign) and a reading of 32770 is --0.2_C (2’s
complement).
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs
230
240 250-- 1 260
Add the following logic to filter and smooth analog input noise in DL250--1 and
DL260 CPUs. This is especially useful when using PID loops. Noise can be
generated by the field device and/or induced by field wiring.
The analog value in BCD is first converted to a binary number because there is not a
BCD-to-real conversion instruction. Memory location V1400 is the designated
workspace in this example. The MULR instruction is the filter factor, which can be
from 0.1 to 0.9. The example uses 0.2. A smaller filter factor increases filtering. You
can use a higher precision value, but it is not generally needed. The filtered value is
then converted back to binary and then to BCD. The filtered value is stored in
location V1402 for use in your application or PID loop.
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example,
if you are using the pointer method to get the analog value, it is in BCD and must be
converted to binary. However, if you are using the conventional method of reading
analog and are masking the first fifteen bits, then it is already in binary and no
conversion using the BIN instruction is needed. Also, if you are using the
conventional method, change the LLD V2000 instruction to LD V2000.
SP1
LDD
V2000
BIN
BTOR
Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to
binary. Remember, this instruction is not
needed if the analog value is originally
brought in as a binary number.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the
accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor),
and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value.
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
RTOB
BCD
OUTD
V1402
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04RTD
4-Ch. RTD Input
Filtering Input
Noise (DL250--1,
DL260 CPUs Only)
   
6--19
F2-04THM
4-Channel
Thermocouple Input
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Setting The Module Jumpers
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Writing the Control Program
7
7--2
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Module Specifications
The F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input Module
IN
TEMP
VOLT
provides several features and benefits.
S Four thermocouple input channels with 16-bit voltage
resolution or 0.1 _C/_F temperature resolution.
S Automatically converts type E, J, K, R, S, T, B, N, or
F2--04THM
C thermocouple signals into direct temperature
readings. No extra scaling or complex conversion is
required.
CH 1+
S Temperature data can be expressed in _F or _C.
CH 1
CH 2+
S Module can be configured as 5V, 156mV,
CH 2
0--5V or 0--156 mV and will convert volts and millivolt
CH 3+
signal levels into 16-bit digital (0--65535) values.
CH 3
S Signal processing features include automatic cold
CH 4+
junction compensation, thermocouple linearization,
CH 4
and digital filtering.
+24V
S The temperature calculation and linearization are
0V
based on data provided by the National Institute of
Standards and Technology (NIST).
S Diagnostic features include detection of
thermocouple burnout or disconnection.
The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-04THM Analog Input
Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your
application requirements.
F2-04THM
4-Ch. Thermocouple
THERMOCOUPLE mV
0--5, -5--+5VDC
18--26.4VDC, 60mA
General
Specifications
Number of Channels
4, differential
Common Mode Range
5VDC
Common Mode Rejection
90dB min. @ DC, 150dB min. @ 50/60 Hz.
Input Impedance
1MΩ
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Fault protected inputs to 50 VDC
Fault-protected
Accuracy vs. Temperature
5 ppm/_C maximum full scale calibration
(including maximum offset change)
PLC Update Rate
4 channels per scan max. DL240/250--1/260 CPU
1 channel per scan max. DL230 CPU
Digital Inputs
Input Points Required
16 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits, 4 diagnostic bits
32 point (X) input module
External Power Supply
60 mA maximum, 18 to 26.4 VDC
Power Budget Requirement
110 mA maximum,
maximum 5 VDC (supplied by base)
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
--20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental air
No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in
65535).
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Thermocouple
Specifications
Type J --190 to 760_C --310 to 1400_F
Type E --210 to 1000_C --346 to1832_F
Type K --150 to 1372_C --238 to 2502_F
Type R 65 to 1768_C
149 to 3214_F
Type R Wide* 0 to 1768_C 32 to 3214_F
Type S 65 to 1768_C
149 to 3214_F
Type T --230 to 400_C --382 to 752_F
Type B 529 to 1820_C 984 to 3308_F
Type N --70 to 1300_C --94 to 2372_F
Type C 65 to 2320_C
149 to 4208_F
Display Resolution
 0.1C /  0.1_F
Cold Junction Compensation
Automatic
Warm-Up Time
30 min. typically  1C repeatability
Linearity Error (End to End)
 .05C maximum,  .01C typical
Maximum Inaccuracy
 3C (excluding thermocouple error)
* R Wide range is available only on modules with date code 0410E2 and later.
Voltage
Specifications
Thermocouple
Input
Configuration
Requirements
Voltage: 0-5V, 5V, 0-156.25mV,  156.25mVDC
Resolution
16 bit (1 in 65535)
Full Scale Calibration Error
(Offset Error Included)
13 counts typical, 33 maximum
Offset Calibration Error
1 count maximum, @ 0V input
Linearity Error (End to End)
1 count maximum
Maximum Inaccuracy
 02% @ 25C (77F)
.02%
The F2-04THM module requires no calibration. The module automatically
calibrates every five seconds, which removes offset and gain errors. For each
thermocouple type, the temperature calculation and linearization performed by the
microprocessor is accurate to within .01 _C.
The F2-04THM module requires 32 discrete input points from the CPU. The module
can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system. The limitations on the number of
analog modules are:
S For local and local expansion systems, the available power budget and
number of discrete I/O points.
S For remote I/O systems, the available power budget and number of
remote I/O points.
Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more
information regarding power budget and number of local, local expanison or remote
I/O points.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
4-Ch. Thermocouple
Module
Calibration
Voltage Ranges
F2-04THM
4 Ch. Thermocouple
Input Ranges
7--3
7--4
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Special
Placement
Requirements
(DL230 and
Remote I/O Bases)
It is important to examine the configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you
can see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to send
the analog data. If you place the module so that the input points do not start on a
V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies
when placing this module in a remote base using a D2--RSSS in the CPU slot.
F2-04THM
F2-04THM
4-Ch. Thermocouple
Correct!
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
16pt
Input
32pt
Input
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y27
X0
-X17
X20
-X57
V40402
MSB
X
5
7
LSB
XX
54
07
V40403
V40401
X
7
7
V40403
XX
76
07
LSB
XX
32
07
X
3
7
Incorrect
MSB
X60
-X67
V40401 -- V40402
MSB
X
4
0
8pt
Input
V40400
Data is correctly entered so input points start on a
V-memory boundary address from the table below.
Slot 4
X
2
0
F2-04THM
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
32pt
Input
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y27
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
X30
-X67
Data is split over three locations, so instructions
cannot access data from a DL230.
V40402
MSB
LSB
LSB MSB
X
6
0
XX
5 4
0 7
X
5
7
X
4
0
X
3
7
Slot 4
V40401
LSB
XX
3 2
0 7
X
2
0
To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first input address
assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The table also
shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations.
X
X0
X20
X40
X60
X100
X120
X140
X160
V
V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
7--5
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Setting the Module Jumpers
Use the figures below to locate the single jumper (J9) and bank of eight jumpers (J7)
on the PC board. Notice that the PC board was re--designed starting with date code
0806E1 and the jumper locations changed; the functionality of the jumpers did not
change. To prevent losing a jumper when it is removed, store it in its original location
by sliding one of its sockets over a single pin. You can select the following options by
installing or removing the appropriate jumpers:
S Number of channels
Jumper
Locations
Input type
S
Conversion units
S
Calibrate enable
Jumper Locations on Modules
Having Date Code Prior to 0806E1
Jumper Locations on Modules Having
Date Code 0806E1 and Later
J7
J9
J7
Calibrate enable
F2-04THM
4 Ch. Thermocouple
S
Options
CH+1
J7
J7
Options
CH+2
Tc Type 0
CH+1
Tc Type 1
CH+2
J7
Tc Type 2
Tc Type 0
J9
J7
Tc Type 1
Units-0
Units-1
Tc Type 3
Units-0
Units-1
Calibrate Enable
J9
Calibrate enable
Locate the “Calibrate Enable” jumper J9. The jumper comes from the factory in the
“jumper removed” setting (the jumper is installed over only one of the two pins).
Installing this jumper disables the thermocouple active burn-out detection circuitry,
which enables you to attach a thermocouple calibrator to the module.
To make sure that the output of the thermocouple calibrator is within the 5V
common mode voltage range of the module, connect the negative side of the
differential voltage input channel to the 0V terminal, then connect the thermocouple
calibrator to the differential inputs (for example, Ch 3+ and Ch 3).
For the voltage input ranges, this jumper is inactive and can be installed or removed
with no effect on voltage input.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
4-Ch. Thermocouple
Tc Type 2
Tc Type 3
J9
7--6
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
F2-04THM
4-Ch. Thermocouple
Selecting the
Number of
Channels
The top two J7 jumpers labeled CH+1 and
CH+2 determine the number of channels
that will be used. The table shows how to
set the jumpers for channels 1 thru 4. The
module comes with both jumpers
installed for four channel operation. For
example, to select channels 1 thru 3,
leave the CH+2 jumper installed and
remove the CH+1 jumper. Any unused
channels are not processed. For
example, if you only select channels 1
thru 3, channel 4 will not be active.
X = jumper installed,
blank space = jumper removed
Jumper
Number of
Channels
CH+1
1
X
2
X
3
4
Setting Input Type
CH+2
X
X
The next four jumpers (Tc Type 0, Tc Type 1, Tc Type 2, Tc Type 3) must be set to
match the type of thermocouple being used or the input voltage level. The module
can be used with many types of thermocouples. Use the table to determine your
settings.
The module comes from the factory with all four jumpers installed for use with a J
type thermocouple. For example, to use an S type thermocouple, remove the
jumper labeled Tc Type 2. All channels of the module must be the same
thermocouple type or voltage range.
X = Jumper installed, and blank space = jumper removed.
Jumper
Thermocouple /
Voltage Inputs
J
Tc Type 0
Tc Type 1
Tc Type 2
Tc Type 3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
K
E
X
R
R Wide*
S
X
X
T
B
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
C
X
X
0--5V.
¦5V.
X
X
X
X
X
X
0--156mV.
¦156mV.
X
X
X
* R Wide range is available only on modules with date code 0410E2 and later.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
7--7
Selecting the
Conversion Units
Use the last two jumpers, Units-0 and Units-1, to set the conversion unit used for
either thermocouples or voltage inputs. The options are magnitude plus sign or 2’s
complement, plus Fahrenheit or Celsius for thermocouples. See the next two
sections for jumper settings when using thermocouples or if using voltage inputs.
Thermocouple
Conversion Units
All thermocouple types are converted into a direct temperature reading in either
Fahrenheit or Celsius. The data contains one implied decimal place. For example, a
value in V-memory of 1002 would be 100.2_C or _F.
For thermocouple ranges which include negative temperatures (J,E,K,T,N), the
display resolution is from --3276.7 to +3276.7. For positive-only thermocouple
ranges (R,S,B,C), the display resolution is 0 to 6553.5.
The 2’s complement data format may be required to correctly display bipolar data
on some operator interfaces. This data format could also be used to simplify
averaging a bipolar signal. To view this data format in DirectSoft32, select Signed
Decimal.
For unipolar thermocouple ranges (R,S,B,C), it does not matter if magnitude plus
sign or 2’s complement is selected.
F2-04THM
4 Ch. Thermocouple
Negative temperatures can be represented in either 2’s complement or magnitude
plus sign form. If the temperature is negative, the most significant bit in the
V-memory location is set (X17).
Use the table to select settings. The module comes with both jumpers installed for
magnitude plus sign conversion in Fahrenheit. For example, remove the Units-0
jumper and leave the Units-1 jumper installed for magnitude plus sign conversion in
Celsius.
X = Jumper installed, and blank space = jumper removed.
Temperature Conversion Units
Units-0
Units-1
Voltage
Conversion
Units
Magnitude Plus Sign
_F
_C
X
X
2’s Complement
_F
_C
X
X
The bipolar voltage input ranges, ¦5V or ¦156mV (see previous page for ¦5V
and ¦156mV settings), may be converted to a 15-bit magnitude plus sign or a
16-bit 2’s complement value.
Use the table to select settings. The module comes with both jumpers installed for
magnitude plus sign conversion. Remove the Units-1 jumper and leave the Units-0
jumper installed for 2’s complement conversion.
X = Jumper installed, and blank space = jumper removed.
Jumper
Pi
Pins
Voltage Conversion Units
Units-0
Magnitude
Plus Sign
X
Units-1
X
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
2’s
Complement
X
4-Ch. Thermocouple
Jumper
7--8
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Connecting the Field Wiring
F2-04THM
4-Ch. Thermocouple
Wiring
Guidelines
User Power
Supply
Requirements
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things
to consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do
not ground the shield at both the module and the source.
S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches,
or transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the
risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose
the correct method for your application.
You may use the same or separate power source for the 0--5V or 0--156mV
transmitter voltage supply. The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies
that provide up to 300mA of current. You may use this instead of a separate supply if
you are using only a couple of analog modules and voltage transmitters.
It is desirable in some situations to power the transmitters separately in a location
remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the transmitter supply meets the
voltage and current requirements and the transmitter’s minus (--) side and the
module supply’s minus (--) side are connected together.
WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you
calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable
system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise,
you may notice some instability in the analog input data if you use the base power
supply. If this is unacceptable, you should try one of the following:
1. Use a separate linear power supply.
2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw
terminal marked “G” on the base.
Unused temperature inputs should be shorted together and connected to common.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Thermocouples
7--9
F2-04THM
4 Ch. Thermocouple
Use shielded thermocouples whenever possible to minimize the presence of noise
on the thermocouple wire. Ground the shield wire at one end only. For grounded
thermocouples, connect the shield at the sensor end. For ungrounded
thermocouples, connect the shield to the 0V (common) terminal.
Grounded Thermocouple Assembly
A grounded thermocouple provides better response time than an ungrounded
thermocouple because the tip of the thermocouple junction is in direct contact with
the protective case.
Ungrounded Thermocouple Assembly
An ungrounded thermocouple is electrically isolated from the protective case. If the
case is electrically grounded it provides a low-impedance path for electrical noise to
travel. The ungrounded thermocouple provides a more stable and accurate
measurement in a noisy environment.
Exposed Grounded Thermocouple
The thermocouple does not have a protective case and is directly connected to a
device with a higher potential. Grounding the thermocouple assures that the
thermocouple remains within the common mode specifications. Because a
thermocouple is essentially a wire, it provides a low-impedance path for electrical
noise. The noise filter has a response of >100dB @ 50/60 Hz.
WARNING: A thermocouple can become shorted to a high voltage potential.
Because common terminals are internally connected together, whatever voltage
potential exists on one thermocouple will exist on the other channels.
The F2-04THM module has been designed to operate within the ambient
temperature range of 0_C to 60_C.
The cold junction compensation is calibrated to operate in a still-air environment. If
the module is used in an application that has forced convection cooling, an error of
2--3_C may be introduced. To compensate for this you can use ladder logic to
correct the values.
When configuring the system design it is best to locate any heat-producing devices
above and away from the PLC chassis because the heat will affect the temperature
readings. For example, heat introduced at one end of the terminal block can cause
a channel-to-channel variation.
When exposing the F2-04THM module to abrupt ambient temperature changes it
will take several minutes for the cold junction compensation and terminal block to
stabilize. Errors introduced by abrupt ambient temperature changes will be less
than 4_C.
Wiring Diagram
Use the following diagrams to connect the field wiring.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
4-Ch. Thermocouple
Ambient
Variations in
Temperature
7--10
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Thermocouple Input Wiring Diagram
See Notes 1 and 2
IN
CH1+
TEMP
VOLT
CH1
Examples of differential
thermocouple wiring
F2-04THM
4-Ch. Thermocouple
CH3
Examples of grounded
thermocouple wiring
Module Supply
ADC
CH3+
THERMOCOUPLE mV
0--5, -5--+5VDC
Analog Mux
CH2
18--26.4
VDC
F2--04THM
CH2+
CH 1+
CH 1
CH4+
CH 2+
CH 2
CH 3+
CH 3
CH4
CH 4+
CH 4
+24V
0V
+24VDC
0V
18--26.4VDC, 60mA
Note 1: Terminate shields at the respective signal source.
Note 2: Connect unused channels to a common terminal (0V, CH4+, CH4).
Voltage Input Wiring Diagram
See Notes 3 and 4
IN
CH1+
Voltage
Transmitter
CH1
F2--04THM
CH2+
CH2
ADC
CH3+
THERMOCOUPLE mV
0--5, -5--+5VDC
Analog Mux
Voltage
Transmitter
TEMP
VOLT
CH 1+
CH 1
Voltage
Transmitter
CH3
+
Transmitter
-Supply
CH4+
CH 2+
CH 2
CH 3+
CH 3
CH4
CH 4+
CH 4
18--26.4
VDC
+24V
0V
+24
VDC
0V
18--26.4VDC, 60mA
Module Supply
Note 3: Connect unused channels to a common terminal (0V, CH4+, CH4).
Note 4: When using 0--156mV and 5V ranges, connect (--) or (0) volts terminals
(CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH+4) to 0V to ensure common mode range acceptance.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
7--11
Module Operation
Channel
Scanning
Sequence for a
DL230 CPU
(Multiplexing)
Scan
System With
DL230 CPU
Read Inputs
F2-04THM
4 Ch. Thermocouple
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to
understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals.
The F2-04THM module can supply different amounts of data per scan, depending
on the type of CPU you are using. The DL230 can obtain one channel of data per
CPU scan. Since there are four channels, it can take up to four scans to get data for
all channels. Once all channels have been scanned the process starts over with
channel 1. Unused channels are not processed, so if you select only two channels,
then each channel will be updated every other scan. The multiplexing method can
also be used for the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Channel 1
Scan N+1
Channel 2
Scan N+2
Channel 3
Scan N+3
Channel 4
Scan N+4
Channel 1
4-Ch. Thermocouple
Write to Outputs
Scan N
7--12
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Channel
Scanning
Sequence for a
a DL240, DL250--1
or DL260 CPU
(Pointer Method)
If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or a DL260 CPU, you can obtain all four
channels of input data in one scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs
support special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer (this
is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program).
Scan
System With
DL240/250-- 1/260
CPU
F2-04THM
4-Ch. Thermocouple
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch. 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+1
Ch. 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+2
Ch. 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+3
Ch. 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+4
Ch. 1, 2, 3, 4
Write to Outputs
Analog Module
Updates
Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan,
the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts
the signal to a 16-bit binary representation. This enables the module to
continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete
control logic in the RLL program.
The time required to sense the temperature and copy the value to V-memory is 160
milliseconds minimum to 640 milliseconds plus 1 scan time maximum (number of
channels x 160 milliseconds + 1 scan time).
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
7--13
Writing the Control Program
Reading Values:
Pointer Method
and Multiplexing
There are two methods of reading values:
S
The pointer method
S
Multiplexing
Pointer Method

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
The CPU has special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly
simplify the programming requirements. These V-memory locations:
S
specify the number of channels to scan.
S
specify the storage locations.
The example program shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung
anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage
programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the data into V-memory
locations. Once the data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data,
compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 is used in the
example, but you can use any user V-memory location. In the examples, the
module is installed in slot 2. You should enter the V-memory locations used in your
application. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD.
SP0
LD
K 04 00
- or -
LD
K 84 00
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the
number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math
functions, whereas the DL250 does.
OUT
V7662
LDA
O2000
OUT
V7672
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 2 that contains the
number of channels to scan.
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered
here would designate the following addresses:
Ch1 -- V2000, V2001, Ch 2 -- V2002, V2003, Ch 3 -- V2004, V2005,
Ch 4 -- V2006, V2007.
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7672 is assigned to slot
2 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal
value in this location to determine exactly where to store the
incoming data.
4-Ch. Thermocouple
NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release version 2.5 or later and DL250 CPUs
with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. Use the DL230
multiplexing example if your firmware revision is earlier.
F2-04THM
4 Ch. Thermocouple
You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also
use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not
work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs,
but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer
method.
7--14
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240,
DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0
(zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two
places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the
pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230
(multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero.
The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
F2-04THM
4-Ch. Thermocouple
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667
Storage Pointer
V7670 V7671 V7672 V7673 V7674 V7675 V7676 V7677
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Storage Pointer
V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Storage Pointer
V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Storage Pointer
V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Storage Pointer
V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Negative
Temperature
Readings with
Magnitude Plus
Sign (Pointer
Method)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
7--15
With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic to determine whether the
value being returned represents a positive voltage or a negative voltage. For
example, you may need to know the direction for a motor. There is a simple solution:
S
If you are using bipolar ranges and you get a value greater than or
equal to 8000H , the value is negative.
S
If you get a value less than or equal to 7FFFH, the value is positive.
The sign bit is the most significant bit, which combines 8000H to the data value. If
the value is greater than or equal to 8000H, you only have to mask the most
significant bit and the active channel bits to determine the actual data value.
The following two programs show how you can accomplish this. The first example
uses magnitude plus sign (binary) and the second example uses magnitude plus
sign (BCD).
Since you always want to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be
placed before any other operations that use the data, such as math instructions,
scaling operations, and so forth. Also, if you are using stage programming
instructions, these rungs should be in a stage that is always active. Note: you only
need this logic for each channel that is using bipolar input signals. The examples
only show two channels.
Magnitude Plus
Sign (Binary)
F2-04THM
4 Ch. Thermocouple
NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release version 2.5 or later and DL250 CPUs
with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. Use the DL230
multiplexing example if your firmware revision is earlier.
Check Channel 1
SP1
Check Channel 2
SP1
Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the
accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on.
ANDD
K7FFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the binary data, if
it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUT
V2010
Put the actual signal value in V2010. Now you can use
the data normally.
K8000
²
V2002
C1
OUT
K8000
²
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of
--1.0 reads as 8010, --2.0 is 8020, etc.).
LD
V2002
Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator.
Contact SP1 is always on.
ANDD
K7FFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the binary data, if
it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUT
V2012
Put the actual signal value in V2012. Now you can use
the data normally.
C2
OUT
Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of
--1.0 reads as 8010, --2.0 is 8020, etc.).
4-Ch. Thermocouple
V2000
LD
V2000
7--16
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
F2-04THM
4-Ch. Thermocouple
Magnitude Plus
Sign (BCD)
Check Channel 1
SP1
V2001
LDD
V2000
Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the
accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative.
Contact SP1 is always on.
ANDD
K7FFFFFFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data, if it
is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUTD
V2010
Put the actual signal value in V2010. Now you can use
the data normally.
K8000
C1
OUT
²
Check Channel 2
SP1
V2003
K8000
²
Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of
--1.0 reads as 8000 0010, --2.0 is 8000 0020, etc.).
LDD
V2002
Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator.
Remember, the data can be negative. Contact SP1 is
always on.
ANDD
K7FFFFFFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data, if it
is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUTD
V2012
Put the actual signal value in V2012. Now you can use
the data normally.
C2
OUT
Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of
--1.0 reads as 8000 0010, --2.0 is 8000 0020, etc.).
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
7--17
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Negative
Temperatures
2’s Complement
(Binary / Pointer
Method)
   
230
You can use the 2’s complement mode for negative temperature display purposes
while at the same time using the magnitude plus sign of the temperature in your
control program. The DirectSOFT32 element Signed Decimal is used to display
negative numbers in 2’s complement form. To find the absolute value of a negative
number in 2’s complement, invert the number and increment it by 1 as shown in the
following example:
240 250-- 1 260
V2000

K8000
Load channel 1 negative data value into the
accumulator so we can convert it to it’s absolute
value.
LD
V2000
²
Invert the binary pattern in the accumulator.
OUT
V2010
Store the inverted data in V2010.
INCB
V2010
Increment the inverted V2010 data by 1.
F2-04THM
4 Ch. Thermocouple
INV
Repeat for other channels as required.
Understanding
the Input
Assignments
(Multiplexing
Ladder Only)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
You may recall that the F2-04THM module appears to the CPU as a
32-point discrete input module. You can use these points to obtain:
S An indication of which channel is active
S The digital representation of the analog signal
S Module diagnostic information
Since all input points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very
easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
Slot 0
Slot 1
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
Slot 2
32pt
Input
16pt
Input
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
X20
-X57
X60
-X77
V40400
MSB
V40402
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
X
5
7
8
7
X X
5 4
0 7
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
LSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
X
4
0
Slot 3
4-Ch. Thermocouple
F2-04THM
Slot 4
16pt
Output
Y0
-Y17
V40403
MSB
V40401
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
X
3
7
8
7
X X
3 2
0 7
LSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
X
2
0
7--18
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Remember, when using DL230 CPUs input points must start on a V-memory
boundary. To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first
input address assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The
table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations.
F2-04THM
4-Ch. Thermocouple
Analog Data Bits
Active
Channel
Bits
Broken
Transmitter
Bits
(Pointer and
Multiplexing
Ladder Methods)
X
X0
X20
X40
X60
V
V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407
The first 16 bits represent the analog
data in binary format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
8
256
1
2
9
512
2
4
10
1024
3
8
11
2048
4
16
12
4096
5
32
13
8192
6
64
14
16384
7
128
15
32768
The active channel bits represent the
multiplexed channel selections in binary
format.
Channel
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
3
1
1
4
The broken transmitter bits are on when
the corresponding thermocouple is
open.
Channel
Bit
8
1
9
2
10
3
11
4
X100
X120
X140
X160
V40401
MSB
LSB
1 1 111 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 321 0
X
3
7
X
2
0
= data bits
V40402
MSB
X
5
7
LSB
1 0
X
= active channel bits 4
0
V40402
MSB
X
5
7
LSB
11 9 8
10 X
5
0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
4
0
X
4
7
= broken transmitter bits
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Reading
Magnitude Plus
Sign Values
(Multiplexing)

230
 

7--19
The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to
automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a
single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is
being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to
use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored.
240 250-- 1 260
NOTE: DL230 CPUs with firmware release version 1.6 or later is required for
multiplexing ladder.
Loads the complete data word into the
accumulator. The V-memory location depends on
the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the
memory map.
LD
V40401
This instruction masks the sign bit. Without this,
the values used will not be correct so do not forget
to include it.
ANDD
K7FFF
Store Channel 1
X40
X41
X50
OUT
V2000
C0
F2-04THM
4 Ch. Thermocouple
SP1
When X40, X41, and X50 are off, channel 1 data is
stored in V2000. C0 is reset to indicate that
channel 1’s value is positive.
RST
X37
C0
SET
Store Channel 2
X40
X41
X51
OUT
V2001
When X40 is on and X41 and X51 are off, channel
2 data is stored in V2001. C1 is reset to indicate
that channel 2’s value is positive.
RST
X37
C1
SET
Store Channel 3
X40
X41
X52
If X37 is on, the data value represents a negative
temperature. C1 is set to indicate that channel 2’s
value is negative.
When X40 and X52 are off and X41 is on, channel
3 data is stored in V2002. C2 is reset to indicate
that channel 3’s value is positive.
OUT
V2002
C2
RST
Store Channel 4
X40
X41
X37
C2
SET
X53
OUT
V2003
C3
If X37 is on, then the data value represents a
negative temperature. C2 is set to indicate that
channel 3’s value is negative.
When both X40 and X41 are on and X53 is off,
channel 4 data is stored in V2003. C3 is reset to
indicate that channel 4’s value is positive.
RST
X37
C3
SET
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
If X37 is on, the data value represents a negative
temperature. C3 is set to indicate that channel 4’s
value is negative.
4-Ch. Thermocouple
C1
If X37 is on, the data value represents a negative
temperature. C0 is set to indicate that channel 1’s
value is negative.
7--20
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Reading 2’s
Complement
Values
(Multiplexing)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to
automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a
single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is
being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to
use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored.
The 2’s complement data format may be required to correctly display bipolar data
on some operator interfaces. This data format could also be used to simplify
averaging a bipolar signal. To view this data format in DirectSOFT32, select Signed
Decimal.
F2-04THM
4-Ch. Thermocouple
Load Data
SP1
LD
V40401
ANDD
K7FFF
Store Channel 1
X40
X41
X50
Store Channel 2
X40
X41
X51
Store Channel 3
X40
X41
X52
Store Channel 4
X40
X41
X53
Scaling the
Input Data
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator.
The V-memory location depends on the I/O
configuration.
This instruction masks the channel sign bit.
OUT
V2000
When X40, X41 and X50 are off, channel 1 data is
stored in V2000.
OUT
V2001
When X40 is on and X41 and X51 are off, channel 2
data is stored in V2001.
OUT
V2002
OUT
V2003
When X40 and X52 are off and X41 is on, channel 3
data is stored in V2002.
When both X40 and X41 are on and X53 is off, channel
4 data is stored in V2003.
No scaling of the input temperature is required. The readings directly reflect the
actual temperatures. For example: a reading of 8482 is 848.2 _C, a reading of
16386 is --0.2_C. (magnitude plus sign), and a reading of 32770 is --0.2_C (2’s
complement).
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Module Resolution
16-Bit (Unipolar
Voltage Input)
Unipolar analog signals are
converted into 65536 counts
ranging from 0 to 65535 (216).
For example, with a 0 to 156mV
signal range, 78mV would be
32767. A value of 65535 represents the upper limit of the
range.
H or L = high or low limit of the range
Module Resolution
15-Bit Plus Sign
(Bipolar Voltage
Input)
156mV
2.5V
78 mV
0V
0V
0
Bipolar Resolution = H − L
32767
H or L = high or low limit of the range
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
0
Counts
65535
32767
4-Ch. Thermocouple
The module has 16-bit unipolar 156 mV 5 V
or 15-bit + sign bipolar resolution. Bipolar analog signals are
converted into 32768 counts
ranging from 0 to 32767 (215).
For example, with a --156mV to
0V
0V
156mV signal range, 156mV
would be 32767. The bipolar
ranges utilize a sign bit to provide 16-bit resolution. A value of
32767 can represent the upper --156 mV --5 V
limit of either side of the range.
32767
Use the sign bit to determine
negative values.
32767
Counts
F2-04THM
4 Ch. Thermocouple
Unipolar Resolution = H − L
65535
5V
7--21
7--22
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Analog
and Digital
Value
Conversions
Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
troubleshooting. Remember, this module does not operate like other versions of
analog input modules that you may be familiar with. The bipolar ranges use
0--32767 for both positive and negative voltages. The sign bit allows this and it
actually provides better resolution than those modules that do not offer a sign bit.
The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range
F2-04THM
4-Ch. Thermocouple
0 to 5V
If you know the digital value ...
A=
5D
65535
If you know the signal level ...
D = 65535 (A)
5
0 to 156.25mV
A = 0.15625D
65535
D = 65535 (A)
0.15625
5V
A = 10D
65535
D = 65535 (A)
10
156.25mV
A = 0.3125D
65535
D = 65535 (A)
0.3125
For example, if you are using the 5V
range and you have measured the
signal at 2.5V, use the following formula
to determine the digital value that is
stored in the V-memory location that
contains the data.
D = 65535 (A)
10
D = 65535 (2.5V)
10
D = (6553.5) (2.5)
D = 16383.75
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Filtering Input
Noise (DL250--1,
DL260 CPUs Only)
   
230
240 250-- 1 260
7--23
Add the following logic to filter and smooth analog input noise in DL250--1 and
DL260 CPUs. This is especially useful when using PID loops. Noise can be
generated by the field device and/or induced by field wiring.
The analog value in BCD is first converted to a binary number because there is not a
BCD-to-real conversion instruction. Memory location V1400 is the designated
workspace in this example. The MULR instruction is the filter factor, which can be
from 0.1 to 0.9. The example uses 0.2. A smaller filter factor increases filtering. You
can use a higher precision value, but it is not generally needed. The filtered value is
then converted back to binary and then to BCD. The filtered value is stored in
location V1402 for use in your application or PID loop.
SP1
LDD
V2000
BIN
BTOR
Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to
binary. Remember, this instruction is not
needed if the analog value is originally
brought in as a binary number.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the
accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor),
and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value.
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
RTOB
BCD
OUTD
V1402
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
4-Ch. Thermocouple
SUBR
V1400
OUTD
V1400
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
F2-04THM
4 Ch. Thermocouple
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example,
if you are using the pointer method to get the analog value, it is in BCD and must be
converted to binary. However, if you are using the conventional method of reading
analog and are masking the first fifteen bits, then it is already in binary and no
conversion using the BIN instruction is needed. Also, if you are using the
conventional method, change the LDD V2000 instruction to LD V2000.
F2-02DA-1,
F2-02DA-1L
2-Channel Analog
Current Output
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Writing the Control Program
8
8--2
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
Module Specifications
The F2-02DA-1 and F2--02DA--1L
Analog Output modules provide several
hardware features:
S Analog outputs are optically
isolated from the PLC logic.
S The module has a removable
terminal block so the module can
be easily removed or changed
without disconnecting the wiring.
S With a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260
CPU, you can update both
channels in one scan.
S F2-02DA-1: Low-power CMOS
design requires less than 60mA
from an external 18--30 VDC power
supply.
S F2-02DA-1L: Low-power CMOS
design requires less than 70mA
from an external 10--15 VDC power
supply.
OUT
ANALOG
2CH
F2-02DA-1
18--30VDC
60mA
ANALOG OUT
4--20mA
0V
+24V
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
NC
NC
NC
NC
F2--02DA1
F2-02DA--1
NOTE: The F2--02DA--1 and F2--02DA--1L modules look very similar and
it is very easy to mistake one module for the other. If your module does not
work, check the terminal label to see if you have a 12 volts (L) or a 24 volts
model and that it is being supplied with the proper input voltage.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
8--3
The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-02DA-1 and F2--02DA--1L
Analog Output Modules. Review these specifications to make sure the module
meets your application requirements.
Output
Specifications
2
Output Ranges
4 to 20 mA
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Output Type
Single ended, 1 common
Maximum Loop Supply
30VDC
Peak Output Voltage
40VDC (clamped by transient voltage suppressor)
Load Impedance
0Ω minimum
Maximum Load / Power Supply
620Ω /18V,
/18V 910Ω /24V,
/24V 1200Ω /30V
Linearity Error (end to end)
1 count (0.025%
(0 025% of full scale) maximum
Conversion Settling time
100μs maximum (full scale change)
Full-Scale Calibration Error
(offset error included)
5 counts maximum,
maximum 20mA @ 25_C (77_F)
Offset Calibration Error
3 counts maximum, 4mA @ 25_C (77_F)
Maximum Inaccuracy
0.1% @ 25C (77_F)
0.3% @ 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F)
Accuracy vs.
vs Temperature
50 ppm/_C full scale calibration change
(including maximum offset change of 2 counts)
PLC Update Rate
1 channel per scan maximum (D2--230 CPU)
2 channels per scan maximum (D2--240/250--1/260
CPU)
Digital outputs
Output points required
12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits
16 point (Y) output module
Power Budget Requirement
40 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base)
External Power Supply
F2--02DA--1: 18-30 VDC, 60 mA
F2--02DA--1L: 12-15 VDC,
VDC 70 mA
(add 20 mA for each current loop used)
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
--20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F )
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental air
No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in
4096).
Analog Output
Configuration
Requirements
The F2-02DA-1 (L) Analog output appears as a 16-point discrete output module.
The module can be installed in any slot if you are using a DL240 CPU (firmware
V1.5 or later) or DL250 CPU. The available power budget and discrete I/O points
are the limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and
I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local
expanison or remote I/O points.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 1/10
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
General
Specifications
Number of Channels
8--4
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Special
Placement
Requirements
(DL230 and
Remote I/O Bases)
It is important to examine the configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you
can see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to send
the analog data. If you place the module so that the output points do not start on a
V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies
when placing this module in a remote base using a D2--RSSS in the CPU slot.
F2-02DA-1
Correct!
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
Data is correctly entered so output
points start on V-memory boundary.
MSB
Y20
-Y37
Y40
-Y47
V40500
V40502
V40501
LSB
YY
32
07
Y
3
7
Incorrect
Y
2
0
F2-02DA-1
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
16pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y27
Y30
-Y47
Data is split over two locations, so instructions
cannot access data from a DL230.
MSB
V40502
LSB
Y Y
5 4
0 7
Y
5
7
Y
4
0
MSB
V40501
LSB
Y Y
3 2
0 7
Y
3
7
Y
2
0
To use the required V-memory references, the first output address assigned to the
module must be one of the following Y locations. The table also shows the
V-memory addresses that correspond to these Y locations.
Y
Y0
Y20
V
V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Y40
Y60
Y100
Y120
Y140
Y160
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
8--5
Connecting the Field Wiring
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things
to consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not
ground the shield at both the module and the load.
S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches,
or transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the
risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose
the correct method for your application.
User Power
Supply
Requirements
The F2-02DA-1 (L) requires at least one field-side power supply. You may use the
same or separate power sources for the module supply and loop supply. The
module requires 18--30VDC, at 60 mA. The two current loops also require
18--30VDC, but at 20 mA each.
The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of
current. You may use this instead of a separate supply if you are using only a couple
of analog modules. The current required is 60 mA (module) plus 40 mA (two current
loops) for a total of 100 mA.
It is desirable in some situations to power the loops separately in a location remote
from the PLC. This will work as long as the loop supply meets the voltage and
current requirements, and the transmitter’s minus (--) side and the module supply’s
minus (--) side are connected together.
WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you
calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable
system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 1/10
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
Wiring
Guidelines
8--6
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Wiring Diagram
The F2-02DA-1 (L) module has a removable connector to make wiring easier.
Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector
from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. The
diagram shows separate module and loop power supplies. If you desire to use only
one field-side supply, just combine the supplies’ positive (+) terminals into one
node and remove the loop supply.
NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V terminal of the module or 0V of the power supply.
NOTE 2: Unused current outputs should remain open (no connections) for minimum power consumption.
Internal
Module
Wiring
Module Supply
18-30VDC
+
OUT
--
0 VDC
DC to DC
Converter
Typical User Wiring
+24 VDC
60mA
CH1--
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
See
NOTE 1
Ch 1 load
250 ohms
typical
CH2-CH2+
D to A
Converter
N/C
--
F2-02DA-1
Ch 1
Current sinking
N/C
+
0V
D to A
Converter
N/C
Ch 2 load
250 ohms
typical
+5V
+15V
--15V
CH1+
Ch 2
Current sinking
N/C
ANALOG
2CH
18--30VDC
60mA
ANALOG OUT
4--20mA
0V
+24V
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
NC
18--30VDC
Transient protected precision
Loop Supply
digital to analog converter
output circuits
NC
NC
NC
F2--02DA--1
OV
Load Range
The maximum load resistance depends on the particular loop power supply in use.
Loop Power Supply Voltage
Acceptable Load Range
30 VDC
0 to 1200Ω
24 VDC
0 to 910Ω
18 VDC
0 to 620Ω
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
8--7
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Module Operation
Channel Update
Sequence for a
DL230 CPU
(Multiplexing)
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to
understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals.
If you are using a DL230 CPU, you can send one channel of data to the output
module on each scan. The module refreshes both field devices on each scan, but
you can only get new data from the CPU at the rate of one channel per scan. Since
there are two channels, it can take two scans to update both channels. However, if
you are only using one channel, then you can update that channel on every scan.
The multiplexing method can also be used for the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.
Scan
System With
DL230 CPU
Read inputs
Channel 1
Calculate the data
Scan N+1
Channel 2
Scan N+2
Channel 1
Write data
Scan N+3
Channel 2
Scan N+4
Channel 1
Write to outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 1/10
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
Scan N
Execute Application Program
8--8
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Channel Update
Sequence for a
DL240, DL250--1
or DL260 CPU
(Pointer Method)
If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can update both channels
on every scan. This is because those CPUs support special V-memory locations
that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail in the
section on Writing the Control Program.
System With
DL240/250--1/260
CPU
Scan
Read inputs
Scan N
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+1
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+2
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+3
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+4
Channel 1, 2
Execute Application Program
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
Calculate the data
Write data
Write to outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
8--9
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Understanding
the Output
Assignments
You may recall the F2-02DA-1 (L) module appears to the CPU as a 16-point
discrete output module. These points provide the data value and an indication of
which channel to update. Note, if you are using a DL240/250260 CPU, you may
never have to use these bits, but it may help you understand the data format.
Since all output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to
determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-02DA-1
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y37
Y40
-Y47
V40500
V40502
V40501
MSB
LSB
Channel
Select
Outputs
Data Bits
Y
2
0
Within this word location, the individual bits represent specific information about the
analog signal.
Two of the outputs select the active
channel. Remember, the V-memory bits
V40501
are mapped directly to discrete outputs.
MSB
LSB
Turning a bit OFF selects its channel. By
controlling these outputs, you can select
Y Y
Y
3 3
2
which channel(s) gets updated.
4
5
0
Y35
Y34 Channel
On
Off
1
= channel select outputs
Off
On
2
Off
Off
1 & 2 (same data to
both channels)
On
On
none (both channels
hold current values)
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 1/10
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
Not used
YY
3 3
5 4
8--10
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Analog Data Bits
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
Module
Resolution
The first twelve bits represent the analog
data in binary format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
6
64
1
2
7
128
2
4
8
256
3
8
9
512
4
16
10
1024
5
32
11
2048
Since the module has 12-bit resolution,
the analog signal is converted into 4096
counts ranging from 0 -- 4095 (212). For
example, send a 0 to get a 4mA signal
and 4095 to get a 20mA signal. This is
equivalent to a binary value of 0000
0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to
FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows
how this relates to the signal range.
Each count can also be expressed in
terms of the signal level by using the
equation shown.
V40501
MSB
LSB
11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
10
= data bits
4 -- 20mA
20mA
4mA
0
4095
Resolution = H − L
4095
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
16mA / 4095 = 3.907A per count
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
8--11
Writing the Control Program
Reading Values:
Pointer Method
and Multiplexing
Pointer Method

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
There are two methods of reading values:
S The pointer method
S Multiplexing
You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also
use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not
work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs,
but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer
method.
Once you have calculated the data values (shown previously) you have to enter the
program that actually updates the module. The DL240/250--1/260 has special
V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the
programming requirements. By using these V-memory locations you can:
S specify the number of channels to update.
S specify where to obtain the output data.
The following program example shows how to set up these locations. Place this
rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage when using stage
programming. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD.
SP0
LD
K2
- or -
LD
K 82
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. The lower byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the
number of channels (1 or 2).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math
functions, whereas the DL250 does.
OUT
V7663
LDA
O2000
OUT
V7703
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
number of channels to scan.
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the output data. For example, the O2000 entered here
would designate the following addresses.
Ch1 -- V2000, Ch2 -- V2001
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot
3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal
value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output
data.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 1/10
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware version 1.5 or later and DL250 CPUs with
firmware version 1.06 or later support this method. If using the DL230 example,
module placement in the base is very important. Refer to the earlier module
placement section.
8--12
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240,
DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0
(zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two
places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the
pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230
(multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero.
The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667
Storage Pointer
V7700 V7701 V7702 V7703 V7704 V7705 V7706 V7707
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Storage Pointer
V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Storage Pointer
V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Storage Pointer
V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Storage Pointer
V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Writing Data
(Multiplexing )

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
8--13
The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to
automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a
single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel to
write. Since the module appears as Y output points to the CPU, it is very easy to use
the channel selection outputs to determine which channel to update.
Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples.
The addresses used would be different if the module was used in a different slot.
You can place these rungs anywhere in the program or if you are using stage
programming, place them in a stage that is always active.
This example is a two-channel multiplexer that updates each channel on alternate
scans. Relay SP7 is a special relay that is on for one scan, then off for one scan.
NOTE: You must send binary data to the module. If the data is already in binary
format, you should not use the BIN instruction shown in this example.
Load data into the accumulator.
SP7
Loads the data for channel 1 into the accumulator.
LD
V2001
Loads the data for channel 2 into the accumulator.
Send data to V-memory assigned to the module.
SP1
BIN
Convert the data to binary (you must omit this
step if you have converted the data elsewhere).
SP1 is always on.
OUT
V40501
The OUT instruction sends the data to the
module. Our example starts with V40501, but the
actual value depends on the location of the
module in your application.
Select the channel to update.
SP7
Y34
OUT
SP7
Y35
OUT
Selects channel 1 for update when Y34 is OFF
(Y35--ON deselects channel 2). Note, Y34 and Y35
are used as in the previous examples. If the module
was installed in a different I/O arrangement the
addresses would be different.
Selects channel 2 for update when Y35 is OFF
(Y34--ON deselects channel 1). Note, Y34 and
Y35 are used as in the previous examples. If the
module was installed in a different I/O arrangement
the addresses would be different.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 1410
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
SP7
LD
V2000
8--14
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Sending Data
to One
Channel
If you are not using both channels, or if you want to control the updates separately,
use the following program.
SP1
LD
V2000
The LD instruction loads the data into the
accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung
automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
BIN
The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data
to binary (you must omit this step if you have
already converted the data elsewhere).
ANDD
K0FFF
This AND Double instruction logically ANDs the
accumulator with the constant FFF. It keeps the
data from affecting channel select bits.
Y34
The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our
example starts with V40501, but the actual value
depends on the location of the module in your
application.
RST
Y34--OFF selects channel 1 for updating.
OUT
V40501
Y35
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
OUT
Sending the
Same Data to
Both Channels
Y35--ON deselects channel 2 (do not update).
If both channel selection outputs are off, both channels will be updated with the
same data.
SP1
LD
V2000
The LD instruction loads the data into the
accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung
automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
BIN
The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data
to binary (you must omit this step if you have
already converted the data elsewhere).
ANDD
K0FFF
The AND Double instruction logically ANDs the
accumulator value with the constant FFF. It keeps
the data from affecting channel select bits.
OUT
V40501
The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our
example starts with V40501, but the actual value
depends on the location of the module in your
application.
Y34
RST
Y34--OFF selects channel 1 for updating.
Y35
RST
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Y35--OFF selects channel 2 for updating.
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Calculating the
Digital Value
Your program must calculate the digital
value to send to the analog module.
There are many ways to do this, but most
applications are understood more easily
if you use measurements in engineering
units. This is accomplished by using the
conversion formula shown.
You may have to make adjustments to
the formula depending on the scale you
choose for the engineering units.
8--15
A = U 4095
H−L
A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)
U = Engineering Units
H = high limit of the engineering
unit range
L = low limit of the engineering
unit range
Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 99.9 PSI. By
using the formula, you can easily determine the digital value that should be sent to
the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 49.4 PSI. Notice
the formula uses a multiplier of 10. This is because the decimal portion of 49.4
cannot be loaded, so you adjust the formula to compensate for it.
A = 10U
4095
10(H − L)
A = 494
4095
1000 − 0
Analog
and Digital
Value
Conversions
Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion
easier.
Range
4 to 20mA
If you know the digital value ...
If you know the signal level ...
A = 16D + 4
4095
D = 4095 (A − 4)
16
For example, if you know you need a
10mA signal to achieve the desired
result, you can easily determine the
digital value that should be used.
D = 4095 (A − 4)
16
D = 4095 (10mA – 4)
16
D = (255.93) (6)
D = 1536
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 1/10
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
A = 2023
8--16
F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output
The example program shows how you would write the program to perform the
engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have calculated or loaded
the engineering unit values in BCD and stored them in V2300 and V2301 for
channels 1 and 2 respectively.
NOTE: The DL205 offers various instructions that allow you to perform math
operations using BCD format. It is easier to perform math calculations in BCD and
then convert the value to binary before sending the data to the module.
SP1
LD
V2300
F2-02DA-1, (L)
2-Ch. Current Output
MUL
K4095
DIV
K1000
OUT
V2000
SP1
LD
V2301
MUL
K4095
DIV
K1000
OUT
V2001
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion).
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10,
we have to use 1000 instead of 100).
Store the BCD result in V2000 (the actual steps to write the data
were shown earlier).
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 2 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion).
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10,
we have to use 1000 instead of 100).
Store the BCD result in V2001 (the actual steps to write the data
were shown earlier).
F2-02DA-2,
F2-02DA-2L
2-Channel Analog
Voltage Output
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Setting the Module Jumpers
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Writing the Control Program
9
9--2
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Module Specifications
The F2-02DA-2 and F2--02DA--2L
Analog Output modules provide several
hardware features:
S Analog outputs are optically
isolated from the PLC logic.
S The module has a removable
terminal block, so the module can
be easily removed or changed
without disconnecting the wiring.
S With a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260
CPU, you can update both
channels in one scan.
S F2--02DA--2: Low-power CMOS
design requires less than 60mA
from an external 18--30 VDC power
supply.
S F2--02DA--2L: Low-power CMOS
design requires less than 70mA
from an external 10--15 VDC power
supply.
S Outputs can be independently
configured for any of these four
ranges:
1) 0 to 5 VDC
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
2) 0 to 10 VDC
3) 5 VDC
4) 10 VDC
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
OUT
ANALOG
2CH
F2-02DA-2
18--30VDC
60mA
ANALOG OUT
0--5VDC
--5--+5VDC
0V
+24V
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
NC
NC
NC
NC
0--10VDC
--10--+10VDC
F2--02DA--2
F2-02DA--2
NOTE: The F2--02DA--2 and F2--02DA--2L
modules look very similar and it is very easy
to mistake one module for the other. If your
module does not work, check the terminal
label to see if you have a 12 volts (L) or a 24
volts model and that it is being supplied with
the proper input voltage.
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
9--3
The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-02DA-2 and F2--02DA--2L
Analog Output Modules.
Output
Specifications
General
Specifications
2
Output Ranges
0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 5V, 10V
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Output Type
Single ended, 1 common
Peak Output Voltage
15VDC (clamped by transient voltage suppressor)
Load Impedance
2000Ω minimum
Load Capacitance
.01μF maximum
Linearity Error (end to end)
1 count (0.025%
(0 025% of full scale) maximum
Conversion Settling Time
5 μs maximum (full scale change)
Full-Scale Calibration Error
( ff t error included)
(offset
i l d d)
12 counts max. unipolar
p
@ 25_C (77_F)
(
)
16 counts max. bipolar @ 25_C (77_F)
Offset Calibration Error
3 counts maximum @ 25_C ( 77_F) unipolar
8 counts maximum @ 25_C (77_F) bipolar
Accuracy vs.
vs Temperature
50 ppm/_C full scale calibration change
(including maximum offset change of 2 counts)
Maximum Inaccuracy
Unipolar ranges 0.3% @ 25C (77F)
0.45% 0--60C
0 60 C ( 32--140F)
32 140 F)
Bipolar ranges 0.4% @ 25C (77F)
0.55% 0--60C (32--140F)
PLC Update Rate
1 channel per scan maximum (D2--230 CPU)
2 channels per scan maximum (D2--240/250--1/
260 CPU)
Digital Outputs
Output Points Required
12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits, 1 sign bit
16 point (Y) output module
Power Budget Requirement
40 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base)
External Power Supply
F2--02DA--2: 18-30 VDC, 60 mA (outputs fully
loaded)
F2--02DA--2L: 10-15 VDC, 70 mA (outputs fully
loaded)
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
--20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental Air
No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
Analog Output
Configuration
Requirements
The F2-02DA-2 (L) analog output requires 16 discrete output points. The module
can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system, but the available power budget and
discrete I/O points can be limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular
model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and
number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
Number of Channels
9--4
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Special Placement
Requirements
(DL230 and
Remote I/O Bases)
Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the
configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you can see in the section on writing
the program, you use V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place
the module so the output points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the
instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when placing this module in a
remote I/O base using a D2--RSSS in the CPU slot.
F2-02DA-2
Correct!
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y37
V40500
V40502
V40501
MSB
LSB
Data is correctly entered so output
points start on a V-memory boundary.
Y
3
7
Y
2
0
Incorrect
F2-02DA-2
Slot 0
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
Y40
-Y47
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
16pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y27
Y30
-Y47
Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230.
MSB
V40502
LSB
Y Y
5 4
0 7
Y
5
7
Y
4
0
MSB
V40501
LSB
Y Y
3 2
0 7
Y
3
7
Y
2
0
To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first output address
assigned to the module must be one of the following Y locations. The table also
shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these Y locations.
Y
Y0
Y20
Y40
V
V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Y60
Y100
Y120
Y140
Y160
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
9--5
Setting the Module Jumpers
The F2-02DA-2 (L) Analog Output module uses jumpers for selecting the voltage
ranges for each channel. The range of each channel can be independently set.
Available operating ranges are 0--5V, 0--10V, 5V, and 10V.
There are three jumpers for each channel. Two sets are on the top board, and the
third set is along the edge of the bottom board with the black D-shell backplane
connector. Install or remove these jumpers to select the desired range. Unused
jumpers can be stored on a single pin so they do not get lost.
S Two of the top board jumpers are labeled “UNI / 5” and there is one
for each channel.
The two bottom board jumpers are labeled “UNI” and there is one for
each channel. These jumpers determine the format of the channel
output data, and the effect of their settings is independent from that of
the other jumpers on the module. With a UNI jumper removed, the
corresponding channel requires data values in the range of 2047.
With a UNI jumper installed, the channel requires data values in the
range of 0 to 4095.
The other two top board jumpers are labeled “BI-P 0-5” and there is
one for each channel. These jumpers each have three possible settings
(including jumper removed) since there are three pins.
S
S
NOTE: It is important to set the module jumpers correctly. The module will not
operate correctly if the jumpers are not properly set for the desired voltage range.
This figure shows the jumper locations. See the table on the following page to
determine the proper settings for your application.
CH1
CH2
Top Board
UNI / ¦5
CH2--UNI
CH1--UNI
Bipolar (BI--P)/0--5V Jumpers:
BI--P
CH1
0--5
BI--P
0--5
CH2
Bottom Board
Three positions available
(counting removal):
1.
Bipolar (BI--P) Position
3.
2.
0--5V Position
Removed (jumper is shown stored on a
single pin; this is the factory setting)
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
UNI / ¦5
9--6
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Voltage
Range and
Output
Combinations
The table lists the eight possible combinations of voltage ranges and data formats,
along with the corresponding jumper settings. For most applications, use one of the
four standard selections shown in the shaded blocks in the table. Standard unipolar
voltage ranges accept a data format of 0 to 4095. Standard bipolar ranges accept a
data format of --2047 to +2047.
Voltage
Range
Output Data
Format
UNI /  5V
Jumpers
Settings
g
(t board)
(top
b d)
UNI Output
Format
Jumpers
Setti gs
Settings
(bottom
board)
BI-P 0--5V Jumpers
Settings
(top board)
BI-P
(Bipolar)
Position
0 to 5V
0 to 4095
Install
Install
0 to 10V
0 to 4095
Install
Install
0 to 5V
2047
Install
Remove
0 to 10V
2047
Install
Remove
5V
2047
Install
Remove
Install here
10V
2047
Remove
Remove
Install here
5V
0 to 4095
Install
Install
Install here
10V
0 to 4095
Remove
Install
Install here
0--5V
Position
Install here
Completely remove
Install here
Completely remove
Standard selections are shown in shaded cells in the table.
For example, to select settings of “¦5V” voltage range with a “¦2047” output data
format for channel 1, refer to the table above and the figure on the previous page
and arrange the jumpers as follows:
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
S
S
S
Install the “CH1” “UNI / 5V” jumper.
Remove the “CH1--UNI” jumper. Store the jumper so it does not get lost
by placing it on one pin.
Install the “CH1” “BI--P 0--5” jumper in the BI--P (bipolar) position on
the left pin and center pin.
The non-standard selections in the table provide the opposite data format for both
unipolar and bipolar voltage ranges. If you are using unipolar output (0--5V or
0--10V) on one channel and bipolar output (5V, 10V) on the other channel, then
one of the outputs will use a non-standard data format.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
9--7
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
The graphs show the voltage range to output data format relationship for each of
the eight selections.
Unipolar Ranges
0V -- 5V
0V -- 10V
5V
0V -- 5V
10V
5V
10V
(2.5V)
0V
0V
0
4095
0
4095
0V -- 10V
(5V)
0V
--2047
0
+2047
0V
--2047
0
+2047
Bipolar Ranges
5V
+5V
0V
--5V
--2047
0
10V
+2047
5V
10V
+10V
+5V
+10V
0V
0V
0V
--10V
--2047
--10V
--5V
0
+2047
0
(+2047) +4095
0
(+2047) +4095
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
9--8
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Connecting the Field Wiring
Wiring
Guidelines
User Power
Supply
Requirements
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things
to consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not
ground the shield at both the module and the load.
S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches,
or transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the
risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose
the correct method for your application.
The F2-02DA-2 (L) requires a separate field-side power supply. Each module
requires 18--30 VDC at up to 60mA current. The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC
power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. If you are using only a couple of
analog modules, you can use this power source instead of a separate supply. If you
want to use a separate supply, choose one that meets the power requirements of
your application.
WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you
calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable
system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
Wiring
Diagram
The F2-02DA-2 (L) module has a removable connector to make wiring easier.
Simply remove the retaining screws and gently pull the connector from the module.
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring.
NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V terminal of the module or the 0V terminal of the power supply.
OUT
Internal
Module
Wiring
18-30VDC
+
--
F2-02DA-2
0 VDC
Typical User Wiring
Ch 1 load
2k ohms
minimum
Resistance
Ch 2 load
2k ohms
minimum
Resistance
See
NOTE 1
DC to DC
Converter
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
NOTE 2: Unused voltage outputs should remain open (no connections) for minimum power consumption.
+24 VDC
60mA
CH1--
+5V
+15V
0V
--15V
CH1+
Ch 1
Voltage sink/source
CH2--
D to A
Converter
CH2+
Ch 2
Voltage sink/source
N/C
N/C
D to A
Converter
N/C
0V
+24V
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
NC
NC
NC
NC
N/C
Transient protected precision
digital to analog converter
output circuits
OV
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
18--30VDC
60mA
ANALOG OUT
0--5VDC
--5--+5VDC
0--10VDC
--10--+10VDC
F2--02DA--2
ANALOG
2CH
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
9--9
Module Operation
Channel Update
Sequence for a
DL230 CPU
(Multiplexing)
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to
understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals.
If you are using a DL230 CPU, you can send one channel of data to the output
module on each scan. The module refreshes both field devices on each scan, but
you can only get new data from the CPU at the rate of one channel per scan. Since
there are two channels, it can take two scans to update both channels. However, if
you are only using one channel, you can update that channel on every scan. The
multiplexing method can also be used for DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.
System
With
DL230 CPU
Scan
Read inputs
Scan N
Channel 1
Scan N+1
Channel 2
Scan N+2
Channel 1
Scan N+3
Channel 2
Scan N+4
Channel 1
Execute Application Program
Calculate the data
Write data
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
Write to outputs
9--10
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Channel Update
Sequence for a
DL240, DL250--1 or
DL260 CPU
(Pointer Method)
If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can update both channels
on every scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPU supports special
V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in
more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.
System With
DL240/250--1/260
CPU
Scan
Read inputs
Scan N
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+1
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+2
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+3
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+4
Channel 1, 2
Execute Application Program
Calculate the data
Write data
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
Write to outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
9--11
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Understanding
the Output
Assignments
You may recall the F2-02DA-2 (L) module requires 16 discrete output points in the
CPU. These points provide the data value and an indication of which channel to
update. Note, if you are using a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you may never have to use
these bits, but it may help you understand the data format.
Since all output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to
determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-02DA-2
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y37
V40500
V40502
V40501
LSB
MSB
Y
3
7
Y40
-Y47
YY
3 3
5 4
Y
2
0
Data Bits
Not Used
Within this word location, the individual bits represent specific information about the
analog signal.
Two of the outputs select the active
channel. Remember, the V-memory bits
are mapped directly to discrete outputs.
Turning a bit OFF selects its channel. By
controlling these outputs, you can select
which channel(s) gets updated.
Y35
Y34 Channel
On
Off
1
Off
On
2
Off
Off
1 & 2 (same data to
both channels)
On
On
none (both channels
hold current values)
V40501
MSB
LSB
Y Y
3 3
5 4
Y
2
0
= channel select outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
Channel Select
Outputs
9--12
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Analog Data Bits The first twelve bits represent the analog
data in binary format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
6
64
1
2
7
128
2
4
8
256
3
8
9
512
4
16
10
1024
5
32
11
2048
Signal Sign
Output
Bipolar Output
Data
The last output can be used to select the
signal sign (+ or --) for bipolar ranges. By
controlling this output, you can easily
select positive or negative data values.
Programming examples in the next
section show how easy it is to make the
sign selection part of your data value.
If an output channel is configured for an
output format of 0 -- 2047, the maximum
valid value for the lower 12 bits is 2047.
This means the 12’th bit (bit 11) must
always be “0”.
V40501
MSB
LSB
11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
10
= data bits
V40501
MSB
LSB
Y
3
7
Y
2
0
= signal sign output
V40501
MSB
LSB
0
1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 0
10
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
= data bits
Bit 11 must be “0” for output
format ”2047.
WARNING: If the data value exceeds 2047, the 12th bit becomes a “1”, and the
other eleven bits start over at “00000000000”. At this point the module’s channel
output voltage also goes back to the bottom of its range and begins increasing
again. The RLL program will be expecting a maximum output, but it will be minimum
instead. This can have serious consequences in some applications, and may result
in personal injury or damage to equipment. Therefore, in standard bipolar ranges (or
whenever the output format is 2047 in general), be sure that your RLL program
does not create numbers with absolute values greater than 2047.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
9--13
Module Resolution Since the module has 12-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted from 4096
counts ranging from 0--4095 (212). For example, with a 0 to 10V range, send a 0 to
get a 0V signal, and send 4095 to get a 10V signal. This is equivalent to a binary
value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal.
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following
equation:
Resolution = H − L
4095
0 -- 10V
10V
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
0V
0
4095
The following table shows the smallest change in signal level due to a digital value
change of 1 LSB count.
Voltage Range
Signal Span
Divide By
Smallest Output
Change
0 to 5V
5 volts
4095
1.22 mV
0 to 10V
10 volts
4095
2.44 mV
5V
10 volts
4095
2.44 mV
10V
20 volts
4095
4.88 mV
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
9--14
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Writing the Control Program
Calculating the
Digital Value
Your program has to calculate the
digital value to send to the analog
module. There are many ways to do
this, but most applications are
understood more easily if you use
measurements in engineering units.
This is accomplished by using the
conversion formula shown.
You may have to make adjustments
to the formula depending on the
scale
you
choose
for the
engineering units.
A = U 4095
H−L
for 0--4095 output format
A = U 2047
H−L
for 0--2047 output format
A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)
U = Engineering units
H = High limit of the engineering
unit range
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 99.9 PSI. By
using the formula you can easily determine the digital value that should be sent to
the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 49.4 PSI. Notice
the formula uses a multiplier of 10. This is because the decimal portion of 49.4
cannot be loaded, so you must adjust the formula to compensate for it.
A = 10U
4095
10(H − L)
A = 494
4095
1000 − 0
A = 2023
The following example program shows how you would write the program to perform
the engineering unit conversion to output data formats 0--4095. This example
assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values in BCD format
and stored them in V2300 and V2301 for channels 1 and 2 respectively. The DL205
offers instructions that allow you to perform math operations using BCD format. It is
usually easier to perform any math calculations in BCD and then convert the value
to binary before you send the data to the module.
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
SP1
SP1
LD
V2300
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
MUL
K4095
Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion).
DIV
K1000
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10,
we have to use 1000 instead of 100).
OUT
V2000
Store the BCD result in V2000 (the actual steps required to send the
data are shown later).
LD
V2301
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 2 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
MUL
K4095
DIV
K1000
OUT
V2001
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion).
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10,
we have to use 1000 instead of 100).
Store the BCD result in V2001 (the actual steps required to send the
data are shown later).
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Negative Values
with Bipolar
Range
9--15
If you are using the bipolar ranges (5V, 10V) or an output data format of
2047, you also need to specify whether the value is positive or negative. There
are two ways to show that the value is negative:
S Turn on the sign output (Y37 in the examples, DL230 only).
S Embed the sign output in the data value (required for the
DL240/250--1/260 using the pointer method, an optional method for
the DL230).
To embed the sign output in the data values, just OR 8000 to the value. This has the
same effect as turning on Y37. Remember, the V-memory location is mapped
directly to the outputs.
If you are going to use bipolar ranges, you also need to add logic to handle the
positive and negative values. The logic would be similar for both values, but you
should use some type of permissive contact to select the appropriate section of
logic. Here is an example that re-scales a variable from a 0--1000 range to a 0--2047
range. It includes a step that combines 8000 with the value to make it negative.
NOTE: Do not exceed a value of 2047 for 2047 output formats.
Channel 1
X0
X0
X1
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with Channel 1 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
X0 is used, this rung only executes when X0 is on (X1 would be the
input that would indicate a negative value should be used).
MUL
K2047
Multiply the accumulator by 2047 (to start the conversion).
DIV
K1000
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10,
we have to use 1000 instead of 100).
ORD
K8000
This ORD instruction imbeds the sign output in the data value when
X0 and X1 are on. It combines the BCD value (8000) with the
accumulator value to make it negative. Omit this rung if you choose
to control the sign bit of the module (Y37) directly.
OUT
V2000
Store the result in V2000. This is the digital value, in BCD form, that
should be sent to the module (the actual steps required to send the
data are shown later).
LD
V2301
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with Channel 2
into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD.
Since X0 is used, this rung only executes when X0 is on (X2 would be
the input that would indicate a negative value should be used).
MUL
K2047
Multiply the accumulator by 2047 (to start the conversion).
DIV
K1000
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10,
we have to use 1000 instead of 100).
ORD
K8000
This ORD instruction imbeds the sign output in the data value when
X0 and X1 are on. It combines the BCD value (8000) with the
accumulator value to make it negative. Omit this rung if you choose
to control the sign bit of the module (Y37) directly.
OUT
V2001
Store the result in V2001. This is the digital value, in BCD form, that
should be sent to the module (the actual steps required to send the
data are shown later).
Channel 2
X0
X0
X0
X2
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
X0
LD
V2300
9--16
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Writing Values:
Pointer Method
and Multiplexing
Writing Values
(Pointer Method)
   
230
240 250-- 1 260
There are two methods of reading values:
S The pointer method
S Multiplexing
You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also
use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not
work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs,
but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer
method.
Once you have calculated the data values (shown previously) you must enter the
program that actually updates the module. The DL240/250--1/260 has special
V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the
programming requirements. By using these V-memory locations you can:
S specify the number of channels to update.
S specify where to obtain the output data .
NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release 1.5 or later supports this method. DL250
CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. If you must
use the DL230 example, module placement in the base is very important. Review
the section earlier in this chapter for guidelines.
The following program example shows how to setup these locations. Place this
rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage
programming. You may recall in the previous example we used V2000 and V2001
to store the calculated values. Also, in the previous examples we had the analog
module installed in slot 3. You should use the appropriate memory locations for your
application. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD.
SP0
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
LD
K2
- or -
LD
K 82
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. The lower byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the
number of channels (1 or 2).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math
functions, whereas the DL250 does.
OUT
V7663
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the output data. For example, the O2000 entered here
would designate the following addresses:
Ch1 -- V2000, Ch 2 -- V2001
OUT
V7703
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot
3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal
value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output
data.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
9--17
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240,
DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0
(zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two
places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the
pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230
(multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero.
The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667
Storage Pointer
V7700 V7701 V7702 V7703 V7704 V7705 V7706 V7707
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Storage Pointer
V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Storage Pointer
V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Storage Pointer
V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Storage Pointer
V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
9--18
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Writing Data
(Multiplexing)
   
230
240 250-- 1 260
The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to
automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a
single data word, the control program must be set up to determine which channel to
write. Since the module appears as Y output points to the CPU, it is very easy to use
the channel selection outputs to determine which channel to update.
Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The
addresses used would be different if the module was used in a different I/O
arrangement. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program or if you are
using stage programming, place them in a stage that is always active.
This example is a two-channel multiplexer that updates each channel on alternate
scans. SP7 is a special relay that is on for one scan then off for one scan. A
permissive contact on the last rung handles an embedded sign bit.
NOTE: You must send binary data to the module. If the data is already in binary
format, you should not use the BIN instruction shown in this example.
Load data into the accumulator.
SP7
LD
V2000
SP7
Loads the data for channel 1 into the accumulator.
LD
V2001
Loads the data for channel 2 into the accumulator.
Send data to V-memory assigned to the module.
SP1
Convert the data to binary (you must omit this step if you
BIN
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
have converted the data elsewhere).
ANDD
K7FFF
Remove sign bit for BCD to binary conversion. SP1 is
always on.
OUT
V40501
The OUT instruction sends the data to the
module. Our example starts with V40501 but the
actual value depends on the location of the
module in your application.
Select the channel to update.
SP7
Y34
OUT
SP7
Y35
OUT
SP7
SP7
V2000 K8000
Y37
²
OUT
V2001 K8000
²
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Selects channel 1 for update when Y34 is OFF
(Y35--ON deselects channel 2). Note, Y34 and Y35
are used due to the previous examples. If the
module was installed in a different I/O
arrangement, the addresses would be different.
Selects channel 2 for update when Y35 is OFF
(Y34--ON deselects channel 1). Note, Y34 and Y35
are used due to the previous examples. If the
module was installed in a different I/O arrangement,
the addresses would be different.
If the output format is --2047 to +2047, include this
rung to embed the sign bit. For the output format 0 to
4095, omit this rung.
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
9--19
If you are using an output format range of 2047 (most commonly used with bipolar
voltage ranges), you also must specify whether the values are positive or negative.
You could use the previous example with a simple addition to activate the sign
output bit, or the following example uses individual contacts to determine the sign
bit status for each channel.
NOTE: If you embed the sign information into the data value (by adding 8000 to the
data value) you should not use this method. Use the previous example.
Load data into the accumulator.
SP7
LD
V2000
SP7
Loads the data for channel 1 into the accumulator.
LD
V2001
Loads the data for channel 2 into the accumulator.
Send data to V-memory assigned to the module.
SP1
Convert the data to binary (you must omit this step if
BIN
you have converted the data to binary).
SP1 is always on.
The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our
example starts with V40501, but the actual value
depends on the location of the module in your
application.
OUT
V40501
Select the channel to update.
SP7
Y34
OUT
Y35
OUT
SP7
X1
Y37
OUT
SP7
X2
Selects channel 2 for update when Y35 is OFF
(Y34--ON deselects channel 1). Note, Y34 and Y35 are
used due to the previous examples. If the module was
installed in a different I/O arrangement, the addresses
would be different.
The permissive X1 activates Y37 (sign bit) during a
channel 1 update scan. The permissive X2 activates
Y37 during a channel 2 update scan. The sign bit (Y37
ON) indicates that the value is negative. You could use
another permissive, such as a CR, etc.
NOTE: Do not exceed a value of 2047 for 2047 output data formats.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
SP7
Selects channel 1 for update when Y34 is OFF
(Y35--ON deselects channel 2). Note, Y34 and Y35 are
used due to the previous examples. If the module was
installed in a different I/O arrangement, the addresses
would be different.
9--20
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Sending Data to
One Channel
If you are not using both channels, or if you want to control the updates separately,
use the following program. Remember, for bipolar ranges you either have to embed
the sign information or use the sign output bit.
SP1
LD
V2000
The LD instruction loads the data into the
accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung
automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
BIN
The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data
to binary (you must omit this step if you have
already converted the data elsewhere).
ANDD
K0FFF
The ANDD instruction masks off the channel select
bits to prevent an accidental channel selection.
OUT
V40501
The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our
example starts with V40501, but the actual value
depends on the location of the module in your
application.
Y34
RST
Y35
X1
Y34--OFF selects channel 1 for updating.
OUT
Y35--ON deselects channel 2 (do not update).
Y37
The permissive X1 activates Y37, which is the sign bit.
The sign bit indicates that the value is negative. You
could use another permissive, such as a CR, etc. Omit
this rung if you are using the 0 to +4095 output format.
OUT
Sending the Same If both channel selection outputs are off, both channels will be updated with the
same data. Remember, for bipolar ranges you either have to embed the sign
Data to Both
information or use the sign output bit.
Channels
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
SP1
LD
V2000
The LD instruction loads the data into the
accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung
automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
BIN
The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data
to binary (you must omit this step if you have
already converted the data elsewhere.
ANDD
K0FFF
The ANDD instruction masks off the channel select
bits to prevent an accidental channel selection.
OUT
V40501
The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our
example starts with V40501, but the actual value
depends on the location of the module in your
application.
Y34
RST
Y34--OFF selects channel 1 for updating.
Y35
RST
X1
Y37
OUT
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Y35--OFF selects channel 2 for updating.
The permissive X1 activates Y37, which is the sign bit.
The sign bit indicates that the value is negative. You
could use another permissive, such as a CR, etc. Omit
this rung if you are using the 0 to +4095 output format.
F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Analog and
Digital Value
Conversions
9--21
Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion
easier. Remember, if you embed the sign information into the data value, you must
adjust the formulas accordingly.
Range
0 to 10V
10V
(output format
2047)
0 to 5V
5V
(output format
2047)
If you know the digital value ... If you know the signal level ...
A = 10D
4095
D = 4095 (A)
10
A = 10D
2047
D = 2047 (A)
10
A = 5D
4095
D = 4095 (A)
5
A = 5D
2047
D = 2047 (A)
5
For example, if you are using the 10V
range with an output format of 2047,
and you know you need a 6V signal level,
use this formula to determine the digital
value (D) that will be stored in the
V-memory location that contains the data.
D = 2047 (A)
10
D = 2047 (6V)
10
D = (204.7) (6)
D = 1228
F2-02DA-2, (L)
2-Ch. Voltage Output
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08DA-1
8-Channel Analog
Current Output
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Writing the Control Program
10
10--2
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
Module Specifications
The F2-08DA-1 Analog Output module
provides several hardware features:
S Supports DL230, DL240, DL250--1
and DL260 CPUs (see firmware
requirements below).
S Analog outputs are optically
isolated from the PLC logic.
S The module has a removable
terminal block, so the module can
be easily removed or changed
without disconnecting the wiring.
S Can update all channels in one
scan (DL240, DL250--1 and DL260
only).
S Outputs are both current sinking
and sourcing.
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
Firmware Requirements:
To use this module, DL230 CPUs must
have firmware version 2.7 or later. To use
the pointer method of writing values,
DL240 CPUs require firmware version
3.0 or later and DL250 CPUs require
firmware version 1.33 or later.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
OUT
ANALOG
8 CHANNEL
F2-08DA--1
18-- 26.4VDC
80mA
4-- 20mA
SNK-- SRC
1--O
2--O
3--O
4--O
5--O
6--O
7--O
8--O
0V
1--I
2--I
3--I
4--I
5--I
6--I
7--I
8--I
N/C
24V
F2-08DA--1
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
10--3
The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-08DA-1 Analog Output
Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your
application requirements.
Output
Specifications
General
Specifications
8, single-ended
Output Range
4--20mA
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Output Type
Current sinking and current sourcing
Maximum Loop Voltage
30VDC
Source Load
 -- 400 (for loop power 18 -- 30V)
Sink Load
0 -- 600/18V, 0--900/24V, 0--1200/30V
Total Load (sink plus source)
600/18V, 900/24V, 1200/30V
Linearity Error (end to end)
2 count (0.050%
(0 050% of full scale) maximum
Conversion Settling Time
400μs maximum (full scale change)
Full-Scale Calibration Error
12 counts max. sinking (any load)
12 counts max. sourcing
load))
g (125
(
18 counts max. sourcing (250 load)
26 counts max. sourcing (400 load)
Offset Calibration Error
9 counts max. sinking (any load)
9 counts max. sourcing (125 load)
11 counts max. sourcing (250 load)
13 counts max. sourcing (400 load)
Max. Full Scale Inaccuracy @ 60C
60 C
0.5% sinking (any load) & sourcing (125 load)
0.64%
0
6 % sou
sourcing
c g (250
( 50 load)
oad)
0.83% sourcing (400 load)
Max. Full Scale Inaccuracy @ 25C
(includes all errors & temperature drift)
0.3% sinking (any load) & sourcing (125 load)
0 44% sourcing (250 load)
0.44%
0.63% sourcing (400 load)
PLC Update Rate
8 channels per scan maximum
Digital Outputs /
Output Points Required
12 binary data bits, 3 ch. ID bits, 1 output enable bit / 16
(Y) output points required
Power Budget Requirement
30mA @ 5VDC (supplied by base)
External Power Supply
18--30VDC, 50mA plus 20mA/output loop, class 2
Operating Temperature
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
--20 to 70 C (--4 to 158 F)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental Air
No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
Analog Output
Configuration
Requirements
The F2-08DA-1 analog output requires 16 discrete output points. The module can
be installed in any slot of a DL205 system, but the available power budget and
discrete I/O points can be limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular
model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and
number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev B. 4/10
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
Number of Channels
10--4
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
Special Placement
Requirements
(DL230 and
Remote I/O Bases)
Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the
configuration. As you can see in the section on writing the program, you use
V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place the module so the
output points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access
the data. This also applies when module is placed in remote base (D2--RSSS in
CPU slot).
F2-08DA--1
Correct!
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y37
V40500
V40502
V40501
MSB
LSB
Data is correctly entered so output
points start on a V-memory boundary.
Y
3
7
Y
2
0
Incorrect
F2-08DA--1
Slot 0
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
MSB
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
16pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y27
Y30
-Y47
Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data
from a DL230 (or when module is placed in a remote base).
V40502
V40501
LSB
MSB
LSB
Y Y
5 4
0 7
Y
5
7
Y40
-Y47
Y
4
0
Y Y
3 2
0 7
Y
3
7
Y
2
0
To use the V-memory references required for the multiplexing method, the first
output address assigned to the module must be one of the following Y locations.
The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these Y
locations.
Y
Y0
Y20
Y40
V
V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Y60
Y100
Y120
Y140
Y160
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
10--5
Connecting the Field Wiring
Wiring
Guidelines
User Power
Supply
Requirements
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things
to consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not
ground the shield at both the module and the load.
S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches,
or transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the
risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose
the correct method for your application.
The F2-08DA-1 requires a separate field-side power supply. Each module requires
18--30VDC at up to 50mA current. The current loops also require 18--30VDC, but at
20mA each.
The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of
current. If you are using only a couple of analog modules, you can use this power
source instead of a separate supply. The current required is 50mA plus 160mA
(eight loops) for a total of 210mA.
It is desirable in some situations to power the loops separately in a location remote
from the PLC. This will work as long as the loop supply meets the voltage and
current requirements, and the transmitter’s minus (--) side and the module supply’s
minus (--) side are connected together.
WARNING: If you are using 24VDC output power from the base, make sure you
calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable
system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev B. 4/10
10--6
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
The F2-08DA-1 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier.
Squeeze the latches on both ends of the connector and gently pull it from the
module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. Channels 1 and 2 are
shown wired for sourcing, and channels 7 and 8 are shown wired for sinking. The
diagram also shows how to wire an optional loop power supply.
Wiring
Diagram
OUT
Typical User Wiring
ANALOG
8 CHANNEL
Loop Power
Supply
See
NOTE 1
--
+
1--O
Ch 1 load
250 ohms
typical
2--O
3--O
Ch 2 load
250 ohms
typical
4--O
5--O
6--O
Ch 7 load
250 ohms
typical
7--O
Ch 8 load
250 ohms
typical
8--O
0V
1--I
2--I
Internal
Module
Wiring
Sink/Source
Circuitry
F2-08DA--1
18-- 26.4VDC
80mA
4-- 20mA
SNK-- SRC
3--I
4--I
1--O
2--O
5--I
3--O
6--I
4--O
7--I
6--O
5--O
7--O
8--I
8--O
0V
N/C
1--I
2--I
3--I
4--I
5--I
6--I
7--I
8--I
N/C
24V
24V
+
-18--30VDC
NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V terminal of the module.
Load Range
The maximum load resistance depends on the particular loop power supply in use.
Loop Power
Supply Voltage
30 VDC
24 VDC
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
18 VDC
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Source Load Range
0 to
t 400Ω
Sink Load Range
0 to 1200Ω
0 to 900Ω
0 to 600Ω
10--7
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
Module Operation
Channel Update
Sequence for a
DL230 CPU
(Multiplexing)
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to
understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals.
If you are using multiplexing ladder, you can send one channel of data to the output
module on each scan. The module refreshes both field devices on each scan, but
you can only get new data from the CPU at the rate of one channel per scan. Since
there are eight channels, it can take eight scans to update all channels. However, if
you are only using one channel, you can update that channel on every scan. The
multiplexing method can also be used for the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.
System Using
Multiplex
Method
(DL230)
Scan
Read inputs
Scan N
Channel 1
Scan N+1
Channel 2
Scan N+2
Channel 3
Scan N+3
.
.
.
Channel 4
.
.
.
Scan N+8
Channel 8
Execute Application Program
Calculate the data
Write data
Write to outputs
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev B. 4/10
10--8
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
Channel Update
Sequence with a
DL240, DL250--1 or
DL260 CPU
(Pointer)
If you are using pointers (Pointer Method), you can update all channels on every
scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPU supports special V-memory
locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail
in the section on Writing the Control Program.
System With
DL240/250--1/260
CPU Using Pointer Method
Scan
Read inputs
Scan N
Channel 1, 2...8
Scan N+1
Channel 1, 2...8
Scan N+2
Channel 1, 2...8
Scan N+3
Channel 1, 2...8
Scan N+4
Channel 1, 2...8
Execute Application Program
Calculate the data
Write data
Write to outputs
You may recall the F2-08DA-1 module requires 16 discrete output points in the
CPU. These points provide the data value and an indication of which channel to
update. Note, if you are using a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you may never have to use
these bits, but it may help you understand the data format.
Since all output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to
determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
Understanding
the Output
Assignments
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
10--9
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
F2-08DA--1
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y37
Y40
-Y47
V40500
V40502
V40501
LSB
MSB
Y YYY
3 3 3 3
7 6 5 4
Y
2
0
Data Bits
Within this word location, the individual bits represent specific information about the
analog signal.
Channel Select
Outputs
Three of the outputs select the active
channel. Remember, the V-memory bits
are mapped directly to discrete outputs.
The binary weight of these three bits
determines the selected channel. By
controlling these outputs, you can select
which channel gets updated.
V40501
MSB
LSB
YY Y
3 3 3
6 5 4
Y
2
0
= channel select outputs
Y36
Y35
Y34
Channel Number
Selected
1
X
X
X
2
3
X
X
4
5
X
X
X
X
X
7
X
8
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev B. 4/10
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
X
6
10--10
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
Analog Data Bits The first twelve bits represent the analog
data in binary format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
6
64
1
2
7
128
2
4
8
256
3
8
9
512
4
16
10
1024
5
32
11
2048
Output Enable
The last output can be used to update
outputs. If this output is off the outputs
are cleared.
V40501
MSB
LSB
11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
10
= data bits
V40501
MSB
LSB
Y
3
7
Y
2
0
= output enable
Module Resolution Since the module has 12-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted from 4096
counts ranging from 0--4095 (212). For example, send a 0 to get a 4mA signal, and
send 4095 to get a 20mA signal. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000
0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal.
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following
equation:
4--20mA
20mA
Resolution = H − L
4095
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
4mA
4095
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
0
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
10--11
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
Writing the Control Program
Calculating the
Digital Value
Your program has to calculate the
digital value to send to the analog
module. There are many ways to do
this, but most applications are
understood more easily if you use
measurements in engineering units.
This is accomplished by using the
conversion formula shown.
You may have to make adjustments
to the formula depending on the
scale
you
choose
for the
engineering units.
A = U 4095
H−L
for 0--4095 output format
A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)
U = Engineering units
H = High limit of the engineering
unit range
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 99.9 PSI. By
using the formula you can easily determine the digital value that should be sent to
the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 49.4 PSI. Notice
the formula uses a multiplier of 10. This is because the decimal portion of 49.4
cannot be loaded, so you must adjust the formula to compensate for it.
A = 10U
4095
10(H − L)
A = 494
4095
1000 − 0
A = 2023
The following example program shows how you would write the program to perform
the engineering unit conversion to output data formats 0--4095. This example
assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values in BCD format
and stored them in V2300 and V2301 for channels 1 and 2 respectively. The DL205
offers instructions that allow you to perform math operations using BCD format. It is
usually easier to perform any math calculations in BCD and then convert the value
to binary before you send the data to the module.
SP1
SP1
LD
V2300
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion).
DIV
K1000
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10,
we have to use 1000 instead of 100).
OUT
V2000
Store the BCD result in V2000 (the actual steps required to send the
data are shown later).
LD
V2301
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 2 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
MUL
K4095
DIV
K1000
OUT
V2001
Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion).
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10,
we have to use 1000 instead of 100).
Store the BCD result in V2001 (the actual steps required to send the
data are shown later).
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev B. 4/10
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
MUL
K4095
10--12
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
Writing Values:
Pointer Method
and Multiplexing
Pointer Method
Example
   
230
240 250-- 1 260
There are two methods of reading values:
S The pointer method
S Multiplexing method
You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs, but for
ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method.
You must use the multiplexing method when using DL230 CPUs and with remote
I/O modules (the pointer method will not work).
Once you have calculated the data values (shown previously) you must enter the
program that actually updates the module. The DL240/250--1/260 has special
V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the
programming requirements. By using these V-memory locations you can:
S specify the number of channels to update.
S specify where to obtain the output data .
NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release version 3.0 or later and DL250 CPUs
with firmware release 1.33 are required to support this method.
The following program example shows how to setup these locations. Place this
rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage
programming. You may recall in the previous example we used V2000 through
V2007 to store the calculated values. Also, in the previous examples we had the
analog module installed in slot 3. You should use the appropriate memory locations
for your application. The pointer method automatically converts values to binary.
SP0
LD
K8
- or -
LD
K 88
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. The lower byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the
number of channels (1--8).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math
functions, whereas the DL250--1/DL260 does.
OUT
V7663
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
number of channels to scan.
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the output data. For example, the O2000 entered here
would designate the following addresses:
Ch1 -- V2000, Ch 2 -- V2001.....Ch8 -- V2007
OUT
V7703
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot
3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal
value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output
data.
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
LDA
O2000
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
10--13
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240,
DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0
(zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two
places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the
pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230
(multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero.
The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667
Storage Pointer
V7700 V7701 V7702 V7703 V7704 V7705 V7706 V7707
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Storage Pointer
V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Storage Pointer
V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Storage Pointer
V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Storage Pointer
V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev B. 4/10
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
No. of Channels
10--14
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
Writing Data
(Multiplexing)
   
230
The following example shows how to write data using the mutliplexing method.
C10
C0
OUT
240 250-- 1 260
C7
LD
V2007
Restarts the update sequence.
Updates channel 8.
BIN
ORD
K7000
C10
OUT
C6
LD
V2006
Updates channel 7.
BIN
ORD
K6000
C7
OUT
C5
LD
V2005
Updates channel 6.
BIN
ORD
K5000
C6
OUT
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
C4
LD
V2004
Updates channel 5.
BIN
ORD
K4000
C5
OUT
Continued
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
Writing Data
(Multiplexing
Example)
Continued
C3
LD
V2003
10--15
Updates channel 4.
BIN
ORD
K3000
C4
OUT
C2
LD
V2002
Updates channel 3.
BIN
ORD
K2000
C3
OUT
C1
LD
V2001
Updates channel 2.
BIN
ORD
K1000
C2
OUT
C0
SP0
LD
V2000
Updates channel 1.
BIN
ORD
K0
SP1
OUT
V40501
Y37
OUT
Sends the data to the module. Our
example starts with V40501, but the
actual value depends on the location
of the module in your application.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev B. 4/10
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
C1
OUT
10--16
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output
Sending Data to
One Channel
If you are using more than one channel, or if you want to control the updates
separately, use the following program.
SP1
LD
V2000
The LD instruction loads the data into the
accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung
automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
BIN
The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data
to binary (you must omit this step if you have
already converted the data elsewhere).
ANDD
K0FFF
The ANDD instruction masks off the channel select
bits to prevent an accidental channel selection.
OUT
V40501
The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our
example starts with V40501, but the actual value
depends on the location of the module in your
application.
Y34
RST
Y34, Y35, Y36--OFF selects channel 1 for updating.
Y35
RST
Y36
RST
Y37
OUT
Analog and
Digital Value
Conversions
Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion
easier. Remember, if you embed the sign information into the data value, you must
adjust the formulas accordingly.
Range
4 to 20mA
F2-08DA--1
8-Ch. Current Output
Y37 is the output enable bit.
If you know the digital value ... If you know the signal level ...
A = 16D + 4
4095
For example, if you know you need a
10mA signal to achieve the desired result,
you can easily determine the digital value
that should be used.
D = 4095 (A − 4)
16
D = 4095 (A − 4)
16
D = 4095 (10mA − 4)
16
D = (255.93) (6)
D = 1536
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08DA-2
8-Channel Analog
Voltage Output
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Setting the Module Jumper
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Writing the Control Program
11
F2-08DA--2
8-Ch. Voltage Output
11--2
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Module Specifications
The F2-08DA-2 Analog Output module
provides several hardware features:
S Supports DL230, DL240, DL250--1
and DL260 CPUs (see firmware
requirements below).
S Analog outputs are optically
isolated from the PLC logic.
S The module has a removable
terminal block, so the module can
be easily removed or changed
without disconnecting the wiring.
S Can update all channels in one
scan (DL240, DL250--1 and DL260
only).
S Outputs are voltage sourcing.
S Outputs can be configured for
either of these ranges:
1) 0 to 5 VDC
OUT
ANALOG
8CH
F2-08DA--2
21.6--26.4
140mA
ANALOG OUT
0--5VDC
0--10VDC
0V
+24V
+V1
+V2
+V3
+V4
+V5
+V6
+V7
+V8
F2--08DA--2
2) 0 to 10 VDC
Firmware Requirements:
To use this module, DL230 CPUs must
have firmware version 2.7 or later. To use
the pointer method of writing values,
DL240 CPUs require firmware version
3.0 or later and DL250 CPUs require
firmware version 1.33 or later.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08DA--2
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
11--3
Output
Specifications
General
Specifications
Number of Channels
8, single-ended
Output Ranges
0 to 5V, 0 to 10V
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Output Type
Voltage sourcing
Peak Output Voltage
15VDC (clamped by transient voltage suppressor)
Load Impedance
1k (0--5V range); 10k 0--10V range)
Load Capacitance
.01μF maximum
Linearity Error (end to end)
1 count (0.025%
(0 025% of full scale) maximum
Conversion Settling Time
400 μs maximum (full scale change)
4.5ms to 9ms for digital out to analog out
Full Scale Calibration Error
Full-Scale
(offset error included)
12 counts max. @ 25
25C
C (77
(77F)
F)
Offset Calibration Error
3 counts maximum @ 25C ( 77F)
Accuracy vs.
vs Temperature
57 ppm/_C full scale calibration change
(including maximum offset change of 2 counts)
Maximum Inaccuracyy
0.3% @ 25C (77F)
(
)
0.45% 0--60C ( 32--140F)
PLC Update Rate
1 channel per scan maximum (Multiplexing)
8 channels per scan maximum (Pointer
[DL240/DL250--1/260 only])
Digital Outputs /
Output Points Required
12 binary data bits, 3 ch. ID bits, 1 output enable
bit / 16 (Y) output points required
Power Budget Requirement
60 mA @ 5VDC (supplied by base)
External Power Supply
24VDC (10%), 140mA (outputs fully loaded)
Operating Temperature
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
--20 to 70 C (--4 to 158 F)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental Air
No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
Analog Output
Configuration
Requirements
The F2-08DA-2 analog output requires 16 discrete output points. The module can
be installed in any slot of a DL205 system, but the available power budget and
discrete I/O points can be limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular
model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and
number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08DA--2
8-Ch. Voltage Output
The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-08DA-2 Analog Output
Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your
application requirements.
F2-08DA--2
8-Ch. Voltage Output
11--4
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Special Placement
Requirements
(DL230 and
Remote I/O Bases)
Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the
configuration. As you can see in the section on writing the program, you use
V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place the module so the
output points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access
the data. This also applies when module is placed in remote base (D2--RSSS in
CPU slot).
F2-08DA--2
Correct!
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y37
V40500
V40502
V40501
MSB
LSB
Data is correctly entered so output
points start on a V-memory boundary.
Y
3
7
Y
2
0
Incorrect
F2-08DA--2
Slot 0
MSB
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
16pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y27
Y30
-Y47
Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data
from a DL230 (or when module is placed in a remote base).
V40502
V40501
LSB
MSB
LSB
Y Y
5 4
0 7
Y
5
7
Y40
-Y47
Y
4
0
Y Y
3 2
0 7
Y
3
7
Y
2
0
To use the V-memory references required for the multiplexing method, the first
output address assigned to the module must be one of the following Y locations.
The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these Y
locations.
Y
Y0
Y20
V
V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Y40
Y60
Y100
Y120
Y140
Y160
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
11--5
The F2-08DA-2 Analog Output module uses a jumper for selecting the 0--5V or
0--10V voltage ranges.
This figure shows the jumper location and how to set it for either voltage range.
0 -- 5V
0 -- 10V
Top Board
Bottom Board
Voltage
Range and
Output
Combinations
The table lists both possible combinations of voltage ranges and data formats,
along with the corresponding jumper settings.
Voltage Range
Output Data Format
Jumpers Setting
(top board)
0 to 5V
0--4095
Install
0 to 10V
0--4095
Remove
These graphs show the voltage range to output data format relationship for each of
the two selections.
Ranges
0V -- 5V
0V -- 10V
5V
10V
0V
0V
0
4095
0
4095
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2--08DA--2
8-Ch. Voltage Output
Setting the Module Jumper
F2-08DA--2
8-Ch. Voltage Output
11--6
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Connecting the Field Wiring
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things
to consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
Wiring
Guidelines
User Power
Supply
Requirements
S
Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not
ground the shield at both the module and the load.
S
Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches,
or transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S
Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the
risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose
the correct method for your application.
The F2-08DA-2 requires a separate field-side power supply. Each module requires
21.6--26.4VDC at up to 140mA current. The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC
power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. If you are using only a couple of
analog modules, you can use this power source instead of a separate supply. If you
want to use a separate supply, choose one that meets the power requirements of
your application.
WARNING: If you are using 24 VDC output power from the base, make sure you
calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable
system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
Wiring
Diagram
The F2-08DA-2 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier.
Squeeze the latches on both ends of the connector and gently pull it from the
module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring.
OUT
Internal
Module
Wiring
21.6--26.4VDC
@140mA
+
--
F2-08DA--2
0 VDC
+24 VDC
See
NOTE 1
Ch 1 load
1K--10K ohms
minimum
+V1
+5V
+15V
0V
--15V
+V2
NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to
to the 0V terminal of the module.
DC to DC
Converter
Typical User Wiring
+V3
+V4
Ch 1
Voltage source
D to A
Converter
+V6
Ch 8
Voltage source
+V7
Ch 8 load
1K--10K ohms
minimum
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
0V
+24V
+V1
+V2
+V3
+V4
+V5
See
NOTE 1
21.6--26.4
140mA
ANALOG OUT
0--5VDC
0--10VDC
+V8
D to A
Converter
+V5
+V6
+V7
+V8
F2--08DA--2
ANALOG
8CH
11--7
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Channel Update
Sequence for a
DL230 CPU
(Multiplexing)
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to
understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals.
If you are using multiplexing ladder, you can send one channel of data to the output
module on each scan. The module refreshes both field devices on each scan, but
you can only get new data from the CPU at the rate of one channel per scan. Since
there are eight channels, it can take eight scans to update all channels. However, if
you are only using one channel, you can update that channel on every scan. The
multiplexing method can also b used for the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.
System Using
Multiplex
Method
(DL230)
Scan
Read inputs
Scan N
Channel 1
Scan N+1
Channel 2
Scan N+2
Channel 3
Scan N+3
.
.
.
Channel 4
.
.
.
Scan N+8
Channel 8
Execute Application Program
Calculate the data
Write data
Write to outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08DA--2
8--Ch. Voltage Output
Module Operation
F2-08DA--2
8-Ch. Voltage Output
11--8
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Channel Update
Sequence for a
DL240, DL250--1 or
DL260 CPU
(Pointer Method)
If you are using pointers (Pointer Method), you can update all channels on every
scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPU supports special V-memory
locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail
in the section on Writing the Control Program.
System With
DL240/250--1/260
CPU Using Pointer Method
Scan
Read inputs
Scan N
Channel 1, 2...8
Scan N+1
Channel 1, 2...8
Scan N+2
Channel 1, 2...8
Scan N+3
Channel 1, 2...8
Scan N+4
Channel 1, 2...8
Execute Application Program
Calculate the data
Write data
Write to outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
11--9
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
You may recall the F2-08DA-2 module requires 16 discrete output points in the
CPU. These points provide the data value and an indication of which channel to
update. Note, if you are using a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you may never have to use
these bits, but it may help you understand the data format.
Since all output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to
determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-08DA--2
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y37
Y40
-Y47
V40500
V40502
V40501
LSB
MSB
Y YYY
3 3 3 3
7 6 5 4
Y
2
0
Data Bits
Within this word location, the individual bits represent specific information about the
analog signal.
Channel Select
Outputs
Three of the outputs select the active
channel. Remember, the V-memory bits
are mapped directly to discrete outputs.
The binary weight of these three bits
determines the selected channel. By
controlling these outputs, you can select
which channel gets updated.
V40501
MSB
LSB
YY Y
3 3 3
6 5 4
Y
2
0
= channel select outputs
Y36
Y35
Y34
Channel Number
Selected
1
X
X
X
2
3
X
X
4
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
6
7
X
8
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2--08DA--2
8-Ch. Voltage Output
Understanding
the Output
Assignments
F2-08DA--2
8-Ch. Voltage Output
11--10
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Analog Data Bits The first twelve bits represent the analog
data in binary format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
6
64
1
2
7
128
2
4
8
256
3
8
9
512
4
16
10
1024
5
32
11
2048
Output Enable
The last output can be used to update
outputs. If this output is off the outputs
are cleared.
V40501
MSB
LSB
11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
10
= data bits
V40501
MSB
LSB
Y
3
7
Y
2
0
= output enable
Module Resolution Since the module has 12-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted from 4096
counts ranging from 0--4095 (212). For example, with a 0 to 10V range, send a 0 to
get a 0V signal, and send 4095 to get a 10V signal. This is equivalent to a binary
value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal.
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following
equation:
0 -- 10V
Resolution = H − L
4095
10V
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
0V
0
4095
The following table shows the smallest change in signal level due to a digital value
change of 1 LSB count.
Voltage Range
Signal Span
Divide By
Smallest Output
Change
0 to 5V
5 volts
4095
1.22 mV
0 to 10V
10 volts
4095
2.44 mV
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
11--11
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Calculating the
Digital Value
Your program has to calculate the
digital value to send to the analog
module. There are many ways to do
this, but most applications are
understood more easily if you use
measurements in engineering units.
This is accomplished by using the
conversion formula shown.
You may have to make adjustments
to the formula depending on the
scale
you
choose
for the
engineering units.
A = U 4095
H−L
for 0--4095 output format
A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)
U = Engineering units
H = High limit of the engineering
unit range
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 99.9 PSI. By
using the formula you can easily determine the digital value that should be sent to
the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 49.4 PSI. Notice
the formula uses a multiplier of 10. This is because the decimal portion of 49.4
cannot be loaded, so you must adjust the formula to compensate for it.
A = 10U
4095
10(H − L)
A = 494
4095
1000 − 0
A = 2023
The following example program shows how you would write the program to perform
the engineering unit conversion to output data formats 0--4095. This example
assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values in BCD format
and stored them in V2300 and V2301 for channels 1 and 2 respectively. The DL205
offers instructions that allow you to perform math operations using BCD format. It is
usually easier to perform any math calculations in BCD and then convert the value
to binary before you send the data to the module.
SP1
SP1
LD
V2300
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
MUL
K4095
Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion).
DIV
K1000
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10,
we have to use 1000 instead of 100).
OUT
V2000
Store the BCD result in V2000 (the actual steps required to send the
data are shown later).
LD
V2301
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 2 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
MUL
K4095
DIV
K1000
OUT
V2001
Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion).
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10,
we have to use 1000 instead of 100).
Store the BCD result in V2001 (the actual steps required to send the
data are shown later).
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2--08DA--2
8-Ch. Voltage Output
Writing the Control Program
F2-08DA--2
8-Ch. Voltage Output
11--12
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Writing Values:
Pointer Method
and Multiplexing
Pointer Method
Example
   
230
240 250-- 1 260
There are two methods of reading values:
S The pointer method
S Multiplexing method
You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs, but for
ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method.
You must use the multiplexing method when using DL230 CPUs and with remote
I/O modules (the pointer method will not work).
Once you have calculated the data values (shown previously) you must enter the
program that actually updates the module. The DL240/250--1/260 has special
V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the
programming requirements. By using these V-memory locations you can:
S specify the number of channels to update.
S specify where to obtain the output data .
NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release version 3.0 or later and DL250 CPUs
with firmware release 1.33 are required to support this method.
The following program example shows how to setup these locations. Place this
rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage
programming. You may recall in the previous example we used V2000 through
V2007 to store the calculated values. Also, in the previous examples we had the
analog module installed in slot 3. You should use the appropriate memory locations
for your application. The pointer method automatically converts values to binary.
SP0
LD
K8
- or -
LD
K 88
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. The lower byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the
number of channels (1--8).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math
functions, whereas the DL250 does.
OUT
V7663
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the output data. For example, the O2000 entered here
would designate the following addresses:
Ch1 -- V2000, Ch 2 -- V2001.....Ch8 -- V2007
OUT
V7703
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot
3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal
value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output
data.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
11--13
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
F2-08DA--2
8--Ch. Voltage Output
The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240,
DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0
(zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two
places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the
pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230
(multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero.
7
No. of Channels
V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667
Storage Pointer
V7700 V7701 V7702 V7703 V7704 V7705 V7706 V7707
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Storage Pointer
V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Storage Pointer
V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Storage Pointer
V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Storage Pointer
V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Installation and
Safety Guidelines
Slot
F2-08DA--2
8-Ch. Voltage Output
11--14
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Writing Data
(Multiplexing)

230
 

The following example shows how to write data using the mutliplexing method.
C10
C0
OUT
240 250-- 1 260
C7
LD
V2007
Restarts the update sequence.
Updates channel 8.
BIN
ORD
K7000
C10
OUT
C6
LD
V2006
Updates channel 7.
BIN
ORD
K6000
C7
OUT
C5
LD
V2005
Updates channel 6.
BIN
ORD
K5000
C6
OUT
C4
LD
V2004
Updates channel 5.
BIN
ORD
K4000
C5
OUT
Continued
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
C3
LD
V2003
Updates channel 4.
BIN
ORD
K3000
C4
OUT
C2
LD
V2002
Updates channel 3.
BIN
ORD
K2000
C3
OUT
C1
LD
V2001
Updates channel 2.
BIN
ORD
K1000
C2
OUT
C0
SP0
LD
V2000
Updates channel 1.
BIN
ORD
K0
C1
OUT
SP1
OUT
V40501
Y37
OUT
Sends the data to the module. Our
example starts with V40501, but the
actual value depends on the location
of the module in your application.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-08DA--2
8--Ch. Voltage Output
Writing Data
(Multiplexing
Example)
Continued
11--15
F2-08DA--2
8-Ch. Voltage Output
11--16
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output
Sending Data to
One Channel
If you are using more than one channel, or if you want to control the updates
separately, use the following program.
SP1
LD
V2000
The LD instruction loads the data into the
accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung
automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
BIN
The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data
to binary (you must omit this step if you have
already converted the data elsewhere).
ANDD
K0FFF
The ANDD instruction masks off the channel select
bits to prevent an accidental channel selection.
OUT
V40501
The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our
example starts with V40501, but the actual value
depends on the location of the module in your
application.
Y34
RST
Y34, Y35, Y36--OFF selects channel 1 for updating.
Y35
RST
Y36
RST
Y37
OUT
Analog and
Digital Value
Conversions
Y37 is the output enable bit.
Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion
easier. Remember, if you embed the sign information into the data value, you must
adjust the formulas accordingly.
Range
If you know the digital value ... If you know the signal level ...
0 to 10V
A = 10D
4095
D = 4095 (A)
10
0 to 5V
A = 5D
4095
D = 4095 (A)
5
For example, if you are using the 0--10V
range and you know you need a 6V signal
level, use this formula to determine the
digital value (D) that will be stored in the
V-memory location that contains the data.
D = 4095 (A)
10
D = 4095 (6V)
10
D = (409.5) (6)
D = 2457
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA
2-Channel Analog
Current Output
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Writing the Control Program
12
12--2
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output
F2-02DAS--1
2-Ch. Iso. Current Output
Module Specifications
The F2-02DAS-1 Analog Output module
provides several hardware features:
S Supports DL230, DL240, DL250--1
and DL260 CPUs (see firmware
requirements below).
S Analog outputs are isolated from
channel to channel and channel to
PLC logic.
S The module has a removable
terminal block so the module can
be easily removed or changed
without disconnecting the wiring.
S Can update both channels in one
scan (DL240/DL250--1/260 only)
S Loop power supply requirements:
18--32VDC
S Outputs are sourced through
external loop supply
Firmware Requirements:
To use this module, DL230 CPUs must
have firmware version 1.7 or later. To use
the pointer method of writing values,
DL240 CPUs require firmware version
2.9 or later and DL250 CPUs require
firmware version 1.30 or later.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
OUT
ANALOG
2CH
F2-02DAS--1
18--32 VDC
ANALOG OUT
4--20mA
0V1
+V1
--I1
+I1
N/C
N/C
0V2
+V2
--I2
+I2
F2--02DAS--1
F2-02DAS--1
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output
12--3
The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-02DAS-1 Isolated Analog
Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your
application requirements.
Output
Specifications
2, isolated (2 commons)
Output Range
4 to 20 mA
Resolution
16 bit (1 in 65536)
Output Type
Current sourcing
Isolation Voltage
750V continuous, channel to channel, channel to logic
Loop Supply
18--32VDC
Load Impedance
0Ω -- 525Ω
Linearity Error (end to end)
10 counts (0.015%
(0 015% of full scale) maximum
Conversion Settling time
3ms to 0.1%
0 1% of full scale
Gain Calibration Error
32 counts
t (0.05%)
(0 05%)
Offset Calibration Error
13 counts (0.02%)
Output Drift
50 ppm/C
Maximum Inaccuracy
0.07% @ 25C (77_F)
0.18% @ 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F)
PLC Update Rate
1 channel per scan maximum (Multiplexing)
2 channels per scan maximum (Pointer [DL240, DL250,
DL260 only])
Digital outputs
Output points required
16 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits;
32 point (Y) output module
Power Budget Requirement
100 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base)
External Power
18--32VDC @ 50mA per channel, Class 2
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
--20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F )
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental air
No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in
65536).
Analog Output
Configuration
Requirements
The F2-02DAS-1 analog output requires 32 discrete output points. The module can
be installed in any slot of a DL205 system, but the available power budget and
discrete I/O points can be limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular
model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and
number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS--1
2-Ch. Iso. Current OUtput
General
Specifications
Number of Channels
12--4
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Special Placement
Requirements
(DL230 and
Remote I/O Bases)
Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the
configuration if you are using multiplexing ladder. As you can see in the section on
writing the program, you use V-memory locations to send the analog data. If you
place the module so that the output points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the
instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when module is placed in
remote base (D2--RSSS in CPU slot).
F2-02DAS--1
F2-02DAS--1
2-Ch. Iso. Current Output
Correct!
MSB
V40502
Y
5
7
YY
54
07
LSB
Y
4
0
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
32pt
Output
8pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
MSB
Y20
-Y57
V40500
V40503
V40501 -- V40502
LSB
V40501
YY
32
07
Y
3
7
Y
2
0
Incorrect
MSB
Y
7
7
Y60
-Y67
F2-02DAS--1
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
32pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y27
Y30
-Y67
Data is split over three locations, so instructions cannot access data
from a DL230 (or when module is placed in a remote base).
V40501
V40502
LSB MSB
LSB MSB
LSB
V40503
Y
6
7
Y Y
6 5
0 7
Y Y
4 3
0 7
Y Y
3 2
0 7
Y
2
0
To use the required V-memory references, the first output address assigned to the
module must be one of the following Y locations. The table also shows the
V-memory addresses that correspond to these Y locations.
Y
Y0
Y20
V
V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Y40
Y60
Y100
Y120
Y140
Y160
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output
12--5
Connecting the Field Wiring
Loop Power
Supply
Requirements
WARNING: If you are using 24 VDC power from the base, make sure you calculate
the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system
operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
The F2-02DAS-1 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier.
Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector
from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring.
Wiring Diagram
NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V terminal of the module.
NOTE 2: Loads must be within the compliance voltage.
NOTE 3: For non--isolated outputs, connect all 0V’s together (0V1........0V2) and connect all +V’s together (+V1........+V2).
Internal
Module
Wiring
Typical User Wiring
Transmitter
Supply
18--32 VDC
ANALOG
2CH
0 V1
--
+V1
+
4--20 mA current sourcing
--I1
Ch 1 load
0--525 ohms
See NOTE 2
+I1
See
NOTE 1
Transmitter
Supply
18--32 VDC
OUT
100 ohms
D to A
Converter
N/C
N/C
N/C
4--20 mA current sourcing
--I2
Ch 2 load
0--525 ohms
See NOTE 2
N/C
0V2
+I2
See
NOTE 1
0V1
+V1
+I1
+V2
+
18--32 VDC
ANALOG OUT
4--20mA
--I1
0V2
--
F2-02DAS--1
100 ohms
D to A
Converter
+V2
--I2
+I2
F2--02DAS--1
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS--1
2-Ch. Iso. Current Output
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things
to consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not
ground the shield at both the module and the load.
S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches,
or transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the
risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose
the correct method for your application.
The F2-02DAS-1 requires a separate field-side loop power supply. Each module
requires 18--32VDC at up to 50mA per channel (or 100mA).
Wiring
Guidelines
12--6
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Module Operation
F2-02DAS--1
2-Ch. Iso. Current Output
Channel Update
Sequence for a
DL230 CPU
(Multiplexing)
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to
understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals.
If you are using multiplexing ladder, you can send one channel of data to the output
module on each scan. The module refreshes both field devices on each scan, but
you can only get new data from the CPU at the rate of one channel per scan. Since
there are two channels, it can take two scans to update both channels. However, if
you are only using one channel, then you can update that channel on every scan.
The multiplexing method can also be used for the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.
System Using
Multiplex
Method
(DL230)
Scan
Read inputs
Scan N
Channel 1
Scan N+1
Channel 2
Scan N+2
Channel 1
Scan N+3
Channel 2
Scan N+4
Channel 1
Execute Application Program
Calculate the data
Write data
Write to outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Channel Update
Sequence for a
DL240, DL250--1
or DL260 CPU
(Pointer Method)
12--7
If you are using pointers (Pointer Method), you can update both channels on every
scan. This is because the D2--240, DL250--1 and D2--260 CPUs support special
V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in
more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.
Read inputs
Scan N
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+1
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+2
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+3
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+4
Channel 1, 2
Execute Application Program
Calculate the data
Write data
Write to outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS--1
2-Ch. Iso. Current Output
System With
DL240/250--1/260
CPU Using Pointer Method
Scan
12--8
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Understanding
the Output
Assignments
You may recall the F2-02DAS--1 module appears to the CPU as a 32-point discrete
output module. These points provide the data value and an indication of which
channel to update. Note, if you are using a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you may never
have to use these bits, but it may help you understand the data format.
Since all output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to
determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-02DAS--1
2-Ch. Iso. Current Output
F2-02DAS--1
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
32pt
Output
8pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y57
V40500
V40502
MSB
Y
4
0
Y
5
7
Channel
Select
Outputs
LSB
MSB
Y
3
7
Y60
-Y67
V40503
V40501
LSB
Y
2
0
Within this word location, the individual bits represent specific information about the
analog signal.
Two of the outputs select the active
channel. Remember, the V-memory bits
V40502
are mapped directly to discrete outputs.
MSB
LSB
Turning a bit OFF selects its channel. By
controlling these outputs, you can select
Y Y
Y
which channel(s) gets updated.
4 4
5
1 0
7
Y41
Y40 Channel
On
Off
1
= channel select outputs
Off
On
2
Off
Off
1 & 2 (same data to
both channels)
On
On
none (both channels
hold current values)
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Analog Data Bits
Since the module has 16-bit resolution,
the analog signal is converted into
65536 counts ranging from 0 -- 65535
(216). For example, send a 0 to get a 4mA
signal and 65535 to get a 20mA signal.
This is equivalent to a binary value of
0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111
1111, or 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal. The
diagram shows how this relates to the
signal range.
Each count can also be expressed in
terms of the signal level by using the
equation shown.
V40501
MSB
LSB
11 1 1 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
54 3 2 10
= data bits
4 -- 20mA
20mA
4mA
0
65535
Resolution = H − L
65535
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
16mA / 65535 = 0.2241 μA per count
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS--1
2-Ch. Iso. Current Output
Module
Resolution
The first sixteen bits represent the
analog data in binary format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
8
256
1
2
9
512
2
4
10
1024
3
8
11
2048
4
16
12
4096
5
32
13
8192
6
64
14
16384
7
128
15
32768
12--9
12--10
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Writing the Control Program
F2-02DAS--1
2-Ch. Iso. Current Output
Calculating the
Digital Value
Your program must calculate the digital
value to send to the analog module.
There are many ways to do this, but most
applications are understood more easily
if you use measurements in engineering
units. This is accomplished by using the
conversion formula shown.
You may have to make adjustments to
the formula depending on the scale you
choose for the engineering units.
A = U 65535
H−L
A = Analog value (0 -- 65535)
U = Engineering Units
H = high limit of the engineering
unit range
L = low limit of the engineering
unit range
Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 99.9 PSI. By
using the formula, you can easily determine the digital value that should be sent to
the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 49.4 PSI. Notice
the formula uses a multiplier of 10. This is because the decimal portion of 49.4
cannot be loaded, so you adjust the formula to compensate for it.
A = 10U
Engineering Units
Conversion
65535
10(H − L)
A = 494
65535
1000 − 0
A = 32374
The example program shows how you would write the program to perform the
engineering unit conversion to output data formats 0 -- 65535 when using a DL250
CPU. This example assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit
values in BCD format and stored it in V2300 for channel 1.
SP1
LD
V2300
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
BIN
Convert BCD number to binary number.
BTOR
Convert binary number to real number.
MULR
R65535
Multiply the accumumlator by 65535 to start the conversion.
DIVR
R1000
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (1000 = 100.0%).
RTOB
Convert the result to binary.
BCD
Convert the result to BCD.
OUTD
V2000
Store the BCD double word result in V2000 / V2001.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Reading Values:
Pointer Method
and Multiplexing
230
240 250-- 1 260
There are two methods of reading values:
S The pointer method
S Multiplexing
You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs, but for
ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method.
You must use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method
will not work).
Once you have calculated the data values (shown previously) you have to enter the
program that actually updates the module. The DL240/250--1/260 has special
V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the
programming requirements. By using these V-memory locations you can:
S specify the number of channels to update.
S specify where to obtain the output data.
NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware version 3.0 and DL250 CPUs with version 1.33
or later support this method.
The following program example shows how to set up these locations. Place this
rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage when using stage
programming. In this example we are using V2000 and V2002 to store the
calculated values, and the analog module is installed in slot 3. You should use the
appropriate memory locations for your application. The pointer method
automatically converts values to binary.
SP0
LD
K2
- or -
LD
K 82
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. The lower byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the
number of channels (1 or 2).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math
functions, whereas the DL250 does.
OUT
V7663
LDA
O2000
OUT
V7703
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
number of channels to scan.
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the output data. For example, the O2000 entered here
would designate the following addresses.
Ch1 -- V2000, Ch2 -- V2002
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot
3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal
value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output
data.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS--1
2-Ch. Iso. Current Output
Pointer Method
   
12--11
12--12
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output
The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240,
DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0
(zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two
places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the
pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230
(multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero.
The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
F2-02DAS--1
2-Ch. Iso. Current Output
CPU Base: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667
Storage Pointer
V7700 V7701 V7702 V7703 V7704 V7705 V7706 V7707
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Storage Pointer
V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Storage Pointer
V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Storage Pointer
V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Storage Pointer
V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Writing Data
(Multiplexing)
   
230
240 250-- 1 260
12--13
Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program can
be setup to determine which channel to write. Since the module appears as Y
output points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the channel selection outputs to
determine which channel to update.
Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples.
The addresses used would be different if the module was used in a different slot.
You can place these rungs anywhere in the program or if you are using stage
programming, place them in a stage that is always active.
This example is a two-channel multiplexer that updates each channel on alternate
scans. Relay SP7 is a special relay that is on for one scan, then off for one scan.
Load data into the accumulator.
SP7
SP7
LD
V2000
Loads the data for channel 1 into the accumulator.
Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD.
LD
V2002
Loads the data for channel 2 into the accumulator.
Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD.
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications
NOTE: You must send binary data to the module. If the data is already in binary
format, you should not use the BIN instruction shown in this example.
Send data to V-memory assigned to the module.
SP1
Convert the data to binary (you must omit this
step if you have converted the data elsewhere).
SP1 is always on.
OUT
V40501
The OUT instruction sends the data to the
module. Our example starts with V40501, but the
actual value depends on the location of the
module in your application.
Select the channel to update.
SP7
Y40
OUT
SP7
Y41
OUT
Selects channel 2 for update when Y41 is OFF
(Y40--ON deselects channel 1). Note, Y40 and Y41
are used as in the previous examples. If the module
was installed in a different I/O arrangement the
addresses would be different.
Selects channel 1 for update when Y41 is OFF
(Y41--ON deselects channel 2). Note, Y40 and
Y41 are used as in the previous examples. If the
module was installed in a different I/O arrangement
the addresses would be different.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Installation and
Safety Guidelines
BIN
12--14
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Sending Data
to One
Channel
If you are not using both channels, or if you want to control the updates separately,
use the following program.
SP1
The LD instruction loads the data into the
accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung
automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
LD
V2000
Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD.
The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data
to binary (you must omit this step if you have
already converted the data elsewhere).
F2-02DAS--1
2-Ch. Iso. Current Output
BIN
OUT
V40501
Y40
RST
Y41
OUT
Sending the
Same Data to
Both Channels
The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our
example starts with V40501, but the actual value
depends on the location of the module in your
application.
Y40--OFF selects channel 1 for updating.
Y41--ON deselects channel 2 (do not update).
If both channel selection outputs are off, both channels will be updated with the
same data.
SP1
The LD instruction loads the data into the
accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung
automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
LD
V2000
Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD.
BIN
The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data
to binary (you must omit this step if you have
already converted the data elsewhere).
OUT
V40501
The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our
example starts with V40501, but the actual value
depends on the location of the module in your
application.
Y40
RST
Y40--OFF selects channel 1 for updating.
Y41
RST
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Y41--OFF selects channel 2 for updating.
F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output
Analog
and Digital
Value
Conversions
12--15
Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion
easier. Remember, if you imbed the sign information into the data value, you must
adjust the formulas accordingly.
Range
4 to 20mA
If you know the digital value ...
A = 16D + 4
65535
D = 65535 (A − 4)
16
D = 65535 (A − 4)
16
D = 65535 (10mA − 4)
16
D = (4095.94) (6)
D = 24575(5FFF h)
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS--1
2-Ch. Iso. Current Output
For example, if you know you need a
10mA signal to achieve the desired
result, you can easily determine the
digital value that should be used.
If you know the signal level ...
F2-02DAS-2
0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel
Isolated Output
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Setting the Module Jumpers
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Writing the Control Program
13
13--2
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
Module Specifications
F2--02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
The F2-02DAS-2 Analog Output module
provides several hardware features:
S Supports D2--230, D2--240,
DL250--1 and D2--260 CPUs (see
firmware requirements below).
S Analog outputs are isolated from
channel to channel and channel to
PLC logic.
S The module has a removable
terminal block so the module can
be easily removed or changed
without disconnecting the wiring.
S Can update both channels in one
scan (D2--240/D2--250--1/260 only)
S Outputs are sourced through
external loop supply
OUT
ANALOG
2CH
F2-02DAS--2
0--5VDC
0--10VDC
0V1
+V1
CH1--V
CH1+V
N/C
N/C
0V2
+V2
CH2--V
CH2+V
F2--02DAS--2
Firmware Requirements:
To use this module, D2--230 CPUs must
have firmware version 2.7 or later. To use
the pointer method of writing values,
D2--240 CPUs require firmware version
3.0 or later and D2--250 CPUs require
firmware version 1.33 or later.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS--2
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
13--3
The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-02DAS-2 Isolated Analog
Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your
application requirements.
Output
Specifications
General
Specifications
2, isolated
Output Range
0--5VDC, 0--10VDC
Resolution
16 bit (1 in 65536)
Isolation Voltage
750V continuous, channel to channel, channel to logic
Load Impedance
2KΩ Min
Linearity Error (end to end)
10 counts (0.015%
(0 015% of full scale) maximum
Conversion Settling time
3ms to 0.1%
0 1% of full scale
F ll Scale
Full
S l Calibration
C lib ti Error
E
32 counts
t (0.05%)
(0 05%)
Offset Calibration Error
13 counts (0.02%)
Maximum Inaccuracy
0.07% @ 25C (77_F)
0.18% @ 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F)
PLC Update Rate
1 channel per scan maximum (Multiplexing)
2 channels per scan maximum (Pointer
[DL240/DL250--1/DL260 only])
Digital outputs
Output points required
16 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits;
32 point (Y) output module
Power Budget Requirement
60 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base)
External Power Requirement
21.6--26.4 VDC @ 60 mA
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
--20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F )
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental air
No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in
65536).
Analog Output
Configuration
Requirements
The F2-02DAS-2 analog output requires 32 discrete output points. The module can
be installed in any slot of a DL205 system, but the available power budget and
discrete I/O points can be limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular
model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and
number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
Number of Channels
13--4
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
Special Placement
Requirements
(DL230 and
Remote I/O Bases)
Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the
configuration if you are using multiplexing ladder. As you can see in the section on
writing the program, you use V-memory locations to send the analog data. If you
place the module so that the output points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the
instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when module is placed in
remote base (D2--RSSS in CPU slot).
F2-02DAS--2
F2--02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
Correct!
MSB
V40502
Y
5
7
YY
54
07
LSB
Y
4
0
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
32pt
Output
8pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
MSB
Y20
-Y57
V40500
V40503
V40501 -- V40502
LSB
V40501
YY
32
07
Y
3
7
Y
2
0
Incorrect
MSB
Y
7
7
Y60
-Y67
F2-02DAS--2
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
8pt
Output
32pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y27
Y30
-Y67
Data is split over three locations, so instructions cannot access data
from a D2--230 (or when module is placed in a remote base).
V40501
V40502
LSB MSB
LSB MSB
LSB
V40503
Y
6
7
Y Y
6 5
0 7
Y Y
4 3
0 7
Y Y
3 2
0 7
Y
2
0
To use the required V-memory references, the first output address assigned to the
module must be one of the following Y locations. The table also shows the
V-memory addresses that correspond to these Y locations.
Y
Y0
Y20
V
V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Y40
Y60
Y100
Y120
Y140
Y160
13--5
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
Setting the Module Jumpers
The F2-02DAS--2 Analog Output module uses jumpers for selecting the voltage
range for each channel. The range of each channel can be independently set. The
available operating ranges are 0--5V and 0--10V.
There is one jumper for each channel. Install or remove these jumpers to select the
desired range. Unused jumpers can be stored on a single pin so they do not get lost.
The module comes from the factory set for the 0--5V range.
NOTE: It is important to set the module jumpers correctly. The module will not
operate correctly if the jumpers are not properly set for the desired voltage range.
These figures show the jumper locations. Newer models have a single circuit board
design. Refer to the first drawing if you have one of these modules. Older modules
have a two circuit board design and the jumpers are located on the top board. Refer
to the lower drawing.
Jumper
ON = 0--5V
OFF= 0--10V
CH1
J2
Jumper
ON = 0--5V
J4
CH2
OFF= 0--10V
Two Circuit Board Design
Jumper
ON = 0--5V
OFF= 0--10V
Jumper
ON = 0--5V
OFF= 0--10V
CH1
Top Board
CH2
Bottom Board
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
Single Circuit Board Design
13--6
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
Connecting the Field Wiring
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things
to consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not
ground the shield at both the module and the load.
S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches,
or transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the
risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose
the correct method for your application.
Wiring
Guidelines
F2--02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
Transmitter Power
Supply
Requirements
The F2--02DAS--2 requires a separate transmitter power supply. Each channel
requires 21.6--26.4 VDC at 60 mA per channel.
WARNING: If you are using 24 VDC power from the base, make sure you calculate
the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system
operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
Wiring Diagram
The F2-02DAS-2 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier.
Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector
from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring.
NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V.
NOTE 2: Load must be within compliance voltage.
NOTE 3: For non--isolated outputs, connect 0V1 to 0V2.
OUT
Internal module circuitry
User Wiring
Note 3
Transmitter -Supply
+
24VDC
CH1
+V1
Note 1
N/C
N/C
CH2
Note 2
0--5VDC
0--10VDC
CH1+V
Transmitter -Supply
24VDC +
2kΩ
D/A
CH1--V
2kΩ
Note 2
F2-02DAS--2
0V1
0V1
+V1
Voltage source
CH1--V
0V2
+V2
D/A
CH2--V
N/C
N/C
CH2+V
Note 1
CH1+V
Voltage source
0V2
+V2
CH2--V
CH2+V
F2--02DAS--2
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
ANALOG
2CH
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
13--7
Module Operation
Channel Update
Sequence for a
DL230 CPU
(Multiplexing)
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to
understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals.
If you are using multiplexing ladder, you can send one channel of data to the output
module on each scan. The module refreshes both field devices on each scan, but
you can only get new data from the CPU at the rate of one channel per scan. Since
there are two channels, it can take two scans to update both channels. However, if
you are only using one channel, then you can update that channel on every scan.
The multiplexing method can also be used for DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.
System Using
Multiplex
Method
(D2--230)
Scan
Scan N
Channel 1
Scan N+1
Channel 2
Scan N+2
Channel 1
Scan N+3
Channel 2
Scan N+4
Channel 1
Execute Application Program
Calculate the data
Write data
Write to outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
Read inputs
13--8
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
Channel Update
Sequence for a
DL240, DL250--1
or DL260 CPU
(Pointer Method)
If you are using pointers (Pointer Method), you can update both channels on every
scan. This is because the D2--240, D2--250--1 and D2--260 CPUs support special
V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in
more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.
System With
D2--240/250--1/260
CPU Using Pointer
Method
Scan
Read inputs
Scan N
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+1
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+2
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+3
Channel 1, 2
Scan N+4
Channel 1, 2
Execute Application Program
F2--02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
Calculate the data
Write data
Write to outputs
Understanding
the Output
Assignments
You may recall the F2-02DAS--2 module appears to the CPU as a 32-point discrete
output module. These points provide the data value and an indication of which
channel to update. Note, if you are using a D2--240/250--1/260 CPU, you may
never have to use these bits, but it may help you understand the data format.
Since all output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to
determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
13--9
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
F2-02DAS--2
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
32pt
Output
8pt
Output
X0
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y17
Y20
-Y57
V40500
V40502
MSB
Y
4
0
Y
5
7
V40501
MSB
LSB
Y
3
7
Y
2
0
Within this word location, the individual bits represent specific information about the
analog signal.
Two of the outputs select the active
channel. Remember, the V-memory bits
V40502
are mapped directly to discrete outputs.
MSB
LSB
Turning a bit OFF selects its channel. By
controlling these outputs, you can select
Y Y
Y
which channel(s) gets updated.
4 4
5
1 0
7
Y41
Y40 Channel
On
Off
1
= channel select outputs
Off
On
2
Off
Off
1 & 2 (same data to
both channels)
On
Analog Data Bits
V40503
On
none (both channels
hold current values)
The first sixteen bits represent the
analog data in binary format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
8
256
1
2
9
512
2
4
10
1024
3
8
11
2048
4
16
12
4096
5
32
13
8192
6
64
14
16384
7
128
15
32768
V40501
MSB
LSB
11 1 1 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
54 3 2 10
= data bits
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
Channel
Select
Outputs
LSB
Y60
-Y67
13--10
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
Since the module has 16-bit resolution,
the analog signal is converted into
65536 counts ranging from 0 -- 65535
(216). For example, send a 0 to get a 0V
signal and 65535 to get a 10V signal.
This is equivalent to a binary value of
0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111
1111, or 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal. The
diagram shows how this relates to the
signal range.
Each count can also be expressed in
terms of the signal level by using the
equation shown.
F2--02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
Module
Resolution
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
0--5V or 0--10V
5 or 10V
0
65535
Resolution = H − L
65535
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
13--11
Writing the Control Program
Calculating the
Digital Value
Your program must calculate the digital
value to send to the analog module.
There are many ways to do this, but most
applications are understood more easily
if you use measurements in engineering
units. This is accomplished by using the
conversion formula shown.
You may have to make adjustments to
the formula depending on the scale you
choose for the engineering units.
A = U 65535
H−L
A = Analog value (0 -- 65535)
U = Engineering Units
H = high limit of the engineering
unit range
L = low limit of the engineering
unit range
Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 99.9 PSI. By
using the formula, you can easily determine the digital value that should be sent to
the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 49.4 PSI. Notice
the formula uses a multiplier of 10. This is because the decimal portion of 49.4
cannot be loaded, so you adjust the formula to compensate for it.
Engineering Units
Conversion
65535
10(H − L)
A = 494
65535
1000 − 0
A = 32374
The example program shows how you would write the program to perform the
engineering unit conversion to output data formats 0 -- 65535 when using a D2--250
CPU. This example assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit
values in BCD format and stored it in V2300 for channel 1.
SP1
LD
V2300
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
BIN
Convert BCD number to binary number.
BTOR
Convert binary number to real number.
MULR
R65535
Multiply the accumumlator by 65535 to start the conversion.
DIVR
R1000
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (1000 = 100.0%).
RTOB
Convert the result to binary.
BCD
Convert the result to BCD.
OUTD
V2000
Store the BCD double word result in V2000 / V2001.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
A = 10U
13--12
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
Reading Values:
Pointer Method
and Multiplexing
Pointer Method
   
230
240 250-- 1 260
There are two methods of reading values:
S The pointer method
S Multiplexing
You can use either method when using D2--240, D2--250--1 and D2--260 CPUs, but
for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer
method. You must use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the
pointer method will not work).
Once you have calculated the data values (shown previously) you have to enter the
program that actually updates the module. The D2--240/250--1/260 has special
V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the
programming requirements. By using these V-memory locations you can:
S specify the number of channels to update.
S specify where to obtain the output data.
F2--02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
NOTE: D2--240 CPUs with firmware version 3.0 and D2--250 CPUs with version
1.33 or later support this method.
The following program example shows how to set up these locations. Place this
rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage when using stage
programming. In this example we are using V2000 and V2002 to store the
calculated values, and the analog module is installed in slot 3. You should use the
appropriate memory locations for your application. The pointer method
automatically converts values to binary.
SP0
LD
K2
- or -
LD
K 82
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. The lower byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the
number of channels (1 or 2).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interfaces. The D2--230/240 CPUs do not support binary math
functions, whereas the D2--250 does.
OUT
V7663
LDA
O2000
OUT
V7703
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
number of channels to scan.
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the output data. For example, the O2000 entered here
would designate the following addresses.
Ch1 -- V2000, Ch2 -- V2002
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot
3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal
value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output
data.
13--13
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240,
DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0
(zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two
places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the
pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230
(multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero.
The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667
Storage Pointer
V7700 V7701 V7702 V7703 V7704 V7705 V7706 V7707
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Storage Pointer
V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Storage Pointer
V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Storage Pointer
V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Storage Pointer
V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
No. of Channels
13--14
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
Writing Data
(Multiplexing)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program can
be setup to determine which channel to write. Since the module appears as Y
output points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the channel selection outputs to
determine which channel to update.
Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples.
The addresses used would be different if the module was used in a different slot.
You can place these rungs anywhere in the program or if you are using stage
programming, place them in a stage that is always active.
This example is a two-channel multiplexer that updates each channel on alternate
scans. Relay SP7 is a special relay that is on for one scan, then off for one scan.
NOTE: You must send binary data to the module. If the data is already in binary
format, you should not use the BIN instruction shown in this example.
Load data into the accumulator.
F2--02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
SP7
SP7
LDD
V2000
Loads the data for channel 1 into the accumulator.
Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD.
LDD
V2002
Loads the data for channel 2 into the accumulator.
Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD.
Send data to V-memory assigned to the module.
SP1
BIN
Convert the data to binary (you must omit this
step if you have converted the data elsewhere).
SP1 is always on.
OUT
V40501
The OUT instruction sends the data to the
module. Our example starts with V40501, but the
actual value depends on the location of the
module in your application.
Select the channel to update.
SP7
Y40
OUT
SP7
Y41
OUT
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Selects channel 2 for update when Y41 is OFF
(Y40--ON deselects channel 1). Note, Y40 and Y41
are used as in the previous examples. If the module
was installed in a different I/O arrangement the
addresses would be different.
Selects channel 1 for update when Y40 is OFF
(Y41--ON deselects channel 2). Note, Y40 and
Y41 are used as in the previous examples. If the
module was installed in a different I/O arrangement
the addresses would be different.
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
Sending Data
to One
Channel
If you are not using both channels, or if you want to control the updates separately,
use the following program.
SP1
The LD instruction loads the data into the
accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung
automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
LDD
V2000
Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD.
The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data
to binary (you must omit this step if you have
already converted the data elsewhere).
BIN
OUT
V40501
Y40
RST
Y41
OUT
The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our
example starts with V40501, but the actual value
depends on the location of the module in your
application.
Y40--OFF selects channel 1 for updating.
Y41--ON deselects channel 2 (do not update).
If both channel selection outputs are off, both channels will be updated with the
same data.
SP1
The LD instruction loads the data into the
accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung
automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
LDD
V2000
Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD.
BIN
The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data
to binary (you must omit this step if you have
already converted the data elsewhere).
OUT
V40501
The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our
example starts with V40501, but the actual value
depends on the location of the module in your
application.
Y40
RST
Y40--OFF selects channel 1 for updating.
Y41
RST
Y41--OFF selects channel 2 for updating.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
Sending the
Same Data to
Both Channels
13--15
13--16
F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output
Analog
and Digital
Value
Conversions
Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion
easier. Remember, if you imbed the sign information into the data value, you must
adjust the formulas accordingly.
Range
If you know the digital value ...
0--5 VDC
0--10 VDC
If you know the signal level ...
5D
65535
D = 65535 A
5
A = 10D
65535
D = 65535 A
10
A=
For example, if you know you need a 4V
signal to achieve the desired result, you
can easily determine the digital value
that should be used.
D = 65535 A
5
D = 65535 (4)
5
D = (13107) (4)
F2--02DAS--2
2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
D = 52428(CCCC h)
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
Combination Analog
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Writing the Control Program
14
14--2
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
Module Specifications
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
The F2-4AD2DA Analog Input/Output
module provides several hardware
features:
S On-board 250 ohm, 1/2 watt
precision resistors provide
substantial over-current-protection
for 4--20mA current loops.
S Analog inputs and outputs are
optically isolated from the PLC
logic.
S The module has a removable
terminal block so the module can
be easily removed or changed
without disconnecting the wiring.
S With a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you
can update all input and output
channels in one scan.
S On-board active analog filtering
and RISC-like microcontroller
provide digital signal processing to
maintain precision analog
measurements in noisy
environments.
S Low-power CMOS design requires
less than 80mA from an external
18--26.4 VDC power supply.
IN/
OUT
ANALOG
F2-4AD2DA
18 26.4 VDC
80 mA
ANALOG
4 IN / 2 OUT
4--20mA
0V
+24V
IN-IN
CH1+
CH2+
CH3+
CH4+
OUT--
OUT
CH1+
CH2+
F2--4AD2DA
The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-4AD2DA Analog
Input/Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets
your application requirements.
Input
Specifications
Number of Input Channels
4, single ended (one common)
Range
4 to 20 mA current
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Input Impedance
250Ω, 0.1%, ½W, 25ppm/_C current input resistance
Maximum Continuous Overload
--40 to +40 mA, each current input
Input Stability
1 count
Crosstalk
--70 dB, 1 count maximum
Common Mode Rejection
--50 dB at 800 Hz
Active Low-Pass Filter
--3 dB at 50Hz, 2 poles (--12 dB per octave)
Step Response
10 mS to 95%
Full Scale Calibration Error
12 counts maximum, at 20 mA current input
Offset Calibration Error
8 counts maximum, at 4 mA current input
Maximum Input Inaccuracy
0.3% @ 25C (77F)
0.45% @ 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)
Recommended External Fuse
0.032A, series 217 fast-acting, current inputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
Output
Specifications
General Module
Specifications
14--3
Number of Output Channels
2 single ended (one common)
2,
Range
4 to 20 mA current
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Peak Withstanding Voltage
75 VDC,
VDC current outputs
External Load Resistance
0Ω minimum,
minimum current outputs
Loop Supply Voltage Range
18--30VDC, current outputs
Maximum Load / Power Supply
910Ω/24V 620Ω/18V,
910Ω/24V,
620Ω/18V 1200Ω/30V,
1200Ω/30V current outputs
Linearity Error (best fit)
1 count (0.025%
(0 025% of full scale) maximum
Settling Time
100 μs maximum (full scale change)
Maximum Inaccuracy
0.1% @ 25C (77F)
0.3% @ 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)
Full Scale Calibration Error
5 counts at 20 mA current output
Offset Calibration Error
3 counts at 4 mA current output
Digital
g
Input
p and Output
p Points Required
q
16 point
p
(X)
( ) inputs
p
16 point
i (Y) outputs
PLC Update
p
Rate
4 input
p channels p
per scan maximum ((D2--240/250--1/260 CPU))
2 output
t t channels
h
l per scan maximum
i
(D2(D2 -240/250240/250 -1/260
1/260 CPU)
1 input and 1 output channel per scan maximum (D2--230 CPU)
Power Budget Requirement
60 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base)
External Power Supply Requirement
18 to 26.4 VDC, 80 mA maximum plus 20 mA per loop output
Accuracy vs. Temperature
45 ppm/C full scale calibration range
(including maximum offset change)
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
--20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental Air
No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
Combination
Analog
Configuration
Requirements
The F2-4AD2DA Analog module requires 16 discrete input and 16 discrete output
points. The module can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system, except when you
use the DL230 programming method. The available power budget may also be a
limiting factor. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base
for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expanison
or remote I/O points.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
Relative Humidity
14--4
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
Special
Placement
Requirements
(DL230 and
Remote I/O Bases)
Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the
configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you can see in the section on writing
the program, you use V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place
the module so that either the input or output points do not start on a V-memory
boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when the
module is placed in remote I/O bases (D2--RSSS in CPU slot).
F2-4AD2DA
Correct!
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
16pt
In / Out
8pt
Output
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
Y0
-Y17
X20 Y20
--X37 Y37
V40500
V40400
Output Data is correctly entered so input and
output points start on a V-memory boundary.
V40501
MSB
LSB
Y
3
7
Y40
-Y47
V40502
V40401
MSB
LSB
X
3
7
Y
2
0
X
2
0
Incorrect
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
F2-4AD2DA
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
8pt
Output
16pt
In / Out
16pt
Output
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
Y0
-Y7
X20 Y10
--X37 Y27
Y30
-Y47
V40401
V40500
V40501
V40501
V40502
V40400
V40500
Output Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot write data from a DL230.
MSB
Y
3
7
V40501
Y Y
3 2
0 7
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
LSB
Y
2
0
MSB
Y
1
7
V40500
Y Y
1 7
0
LSB
Y
0
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
14--5
To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first input and
output addresses assigned to the module must be one of the following X and Y
locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these
locations.
X
X0
X20
V
V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407
Y
Y0
V
V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507
Y20
X40
Y40
X60
Y60
X100
Y100
X120
Y120
X140
Y140
X160
Y160
Connecting the Field Wiring
Wiring Guidelines
S
Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not
ground the shield at both the module and the load or source.
S
Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches,
or transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S
Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the
risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose
the correct method for your application.
The F2-4AD2DA requires at least one field-side power supply. You may use the
same or separate power sources for the module supply and loop supply. The
module requires 18--26.4VDC, at 80 mA. In addition, each current loop requires 20
mA (a total of 120 mA for six current loops). If you want to use a separate power
supply make sure that it meets these requirements.
The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of
current. You may use this instead of a separate supply if you are using only one
combination module. The current required is 80 mA (module) plus up to 120 mA (six
current loops) for a total of 200 mA.
It is desirable in some situations to power the loops separately in a location remote
from the PLC. This will work as long as the loop’s power supply meets the voltage
and current requirements, and its minus (--) side and the module supply’s minus (--)
side are connected together.
WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you
calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable
system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
User Power
Supply
Requirements
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some ideas to
consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
14--6
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise,
you may notice 3--5 counts of instability in the analog input data if you use the
base power supply. If this is unacceptable, you should try one of the following:
1. Use a separate linear power supply.
2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw
terminal marked “G” on the base.
Current Loop
Transmitter
Impedance
By using these methods, the input stability is rated at 1 count.
Standard 4 to 20 mA transmitters and transducers can operate from a wide variety
of power supplies. Not all transmitters are alike and the manufacturers often specify
a minimum loop or load resistance that must be used with the transmitter.
The F2-4AD2DA provides 250 ohm resistance for each input channel. If your
transmitter requires a load resistance below 250 ohms, you do not have to make
any adjustments. However, if your transmitter requires a load resistance higher
than 250 ohms, you need to add a resistor in series with the module.
Consider the following example for a transmitter being operated from a 30 VDC
supply with a recommended load resistance of 750 ohms. Since the module has a
250 ohm resistor, you need to add an additional resistor.
Example:
R = Tr − Mr
R = 750 − 250
R ≥ 500
R -- resistor to add
Tr -- Transmitter total resistance requirement
Mr -- Module resistance (internal 250 ohms)
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
Two-wire Transmitter
+
-DC Supply
+30V
0V
Module Channel 1
R
IN1+
IN--
In the example, add a 500 ohm resistor
(R) in series with the module.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
250 ohms
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
14--7
Wiring Diagram The F2-04AD2DA module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply
squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the
module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. The diagram shows
separate module and loop power supplies. If you desire to use only one field-side
supply, just combine the supplies’ positive (+) terminals into one node, and remove the
loop supply.
Note 1: Shields should be connected at their respective signal source.
Note 2: Unused channels should remain open (no connections) for minimum power consumption.
Note 3: More than one external power supply can be used provided all the power supply commons are
connected together.
Note 4: A series 217, 0.032A, fast-acting fuse is recommended for 4--20 mA current input loops.
Note 5: If the power supply common of an external power supply is not connected to 0V on the module, then
the output of the external transmitter must be isolated. To avoid “ground loop” errors, recommended 4--20mA
transmitter types are:
a. For 2 or 3 wire: Isolation between input signal and power supply.
b. For 4 wire: Isolation between input signal, power supply, and 4--20 mA output.
Note 6: If an analog channel is connected backwards, then incorrect data values will be returned for that
channel. Input signals in the -4 to +4 mA range return a zero value. Signals in the -4 to -40 mA range return a
non-zero value.
Note 7: To avoid small errors due to terminal block losses, connect 0V, IN-- and OUT-- on the terminal block as
shown. The module’s internal connection of these nodes is not sufficient to permit module performance up to
the accuracy specifications.
Note 8: Choose a output transducer resistance according to the maximum load / power supply listed in the
Output Specifications table.
Typical User Wiring
Module Supply
18-26.4VDC
See Note 1
--
+
Internal
Module
Wiring
--
IN/
OUT
+
+24 VDC
IN--
--
CH2
3--wire
+
4--20mA
Transmitter
-CH3
2-wire
+
4--20mA
Transmitter
-CH4
2-wire
+
4--20mA
Transmitter
DC to DC
Converter
+
0 VDC
+5V
+15V
0V
--15V
F2-4AD2DA
IN1+
IN2+
Fuse
250 ohms
IN3+
Fuse
250 ohms
IN4+
Fuse
IN--
250 ohms
OUT1+
IN
D to A
Converter
OUT2+
Ch 1
Current sinking
Ch 1 load
0--910 ohms
(@ 24V)
D to A
Converter
Ch 2
Current sinking
Ch 2 load
0--910 ohms
(@ 24V)
-+
See Note 8
See Note 1
0V
+24V
250 ohms
OUT--
Fuse
A to D
Converter
18 26.4 VDC
80 mA
ANALOG
4 IN / 2 OUT
4--20mA
CH1+
CH2+
CH3+
CH4+
OUT--
OUTCH1+
CH2+
F2--4AD2DA
18--30 VDC
Supply
0V
Loop Supply
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
-CH1
4--wire
+
4--20mA
Transmitter
ANALOG
14--8
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
Module Operation
Input Channel
Scanning
Sequence for
a DL230 CPU
(Multiplexing)
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to
understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals.
The F2-4AD2DA module can supply different amounts of data per scan, depending
on the type of CPU you are using. The DL230 can obtain one channel of input data
per CPU scan. Since there are four channels, it can take up to four scans to get data
for all channels. Once all channels have been scanned the process starts over with
channel 1. Unused channels are not processed, so if you select only two channels,
then each channel will be updated every other scan.
Scan
System With
DL230 CPU
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Channel 1
Scan N+1
Channel 2
Scan N+2
Channel 3
Scan N+3
Channel 4
Scan N+4
Channel 1
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
Write to Outputs
Input Channel
Scanning
Sequence for a
DL240, DL250--1
or DL260 CPU
(Pointer Method)
If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can obtain all four channels
of input data in one scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPU supports
special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is
discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.
Scan
System With
DL240/250--1/260
CPU
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Write to Outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Scan N
Ch1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+2
Ch1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
Output Channel
Update
Sequence for a
DL230 CPU
(Multiplexing)
14--9
If you are using a DL230 CPU, you can send one channel of data to the output
module on each scan. Since there are two channels, it can take two scans to
update both channels. However, if you are only using one channel, then you can
update that channel on every scan.
Scan
System With
DL230 CPU
Read inputs
Execute Application Program
Calculate the data
Write data
Scan N
Channel 1
Scan N+1
Channel 2
Scan N+2
Channel 1
Scan N+3
Channel 2
Scan N+4
Channel 1
Write to outputs
If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can update both channels
on every scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPU supports special
V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in
more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.
System With
DL240/250--1/260
CPU
Scan
Read inputs
Execute Application Program
Calculate the data
Write data
Scan N
Channel 1,2
Scan N+1
Channel 1,2
Scan N+2
Channel 1,2
Scan N+3
Channel 1,2
Scan N+4
Channel 1,2
Write to outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
Output Channel
Update
Sequence for a
DL240, DL250--1
or DL260 CPU
(Pointer Method)
14--10
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
Understanding
the I/O
Assignments
You may recall the F2-4AD2DA module appears to the CPU as 16 discrete input
and 16 discrete output points. These points provide the data value and channel
identification. Note, if you are using a DL240/250 CPU, you may never have to use
these bits, but it may help you understand the data format.
Since all output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to
determine the location of the data words that will be assigned to the module.
F2-4AD2DA
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
16pt
In / Out
8pt
Output
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
Y0
-Y17
X20 Y20
--X37 Y37
V40500
V40400
MSB
Not Used
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
Input Data Bits
YY
3 3
5 4
V40501
Output Data Bits
LSB
Y
2
0
MSB
X XXX
3 3 3 3
7 6 5 4
Y40
-Y47
V40502
V40401
Input Data Bits
LSB
X
2
0
Within this word location, the individual bits represent specific information about the
analog signal.
The first twelve bits of the input word
represent the analog data in binary
V40401
format.
MSB
LSB
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
1 1 1 1 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0
1
6
64
5 4 3 2 10
1
2
7
128
2
4
8
256
= data bits
3
8
9
512
4
16
10
1024
5
32
11
2048
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
14--11
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
Active Channel
Indicator Inputs
Diagnostic
Indicator Inputs
Two of the inputs are binary encoded to
indicate the active input channel.
Remember, the V-memory bits are
mapped directly to discrete inputs. The
module automatically turns on and off
these inputs to indicate the active input
channel for each scan.
Scan
X35 X34
Channel
N
Off
Off
1
N+1
Off
On
2
N+2
On
Off
3
N+3
On
On
4
N+4
Off
Off
1
The last two inputs are used for module
diagnostics.
Module Busy — The first diagnostic
input (X36 in this example) indicates a
“busy” condition. This input will always
be active on the first PLC scan to tell the
CPU the analog data is not valid. After
the first scan, the input usually only
comes
on
when
environmental
(electrical) noise problems are present.
The programming examples in the next
section will show how you can use this
input. The wiring guidelines presented
earlier in this chapter provide steps that
can help reduce noise problems.
V40401
MSB
LSB
X X
3 3
5 4
X
2
0
= channel inputs
V40401
MSB
LSB
X X
3 3
7 6
X
2
0
= diagnostic inputs
Note: When using the pointer
method, the value placed into the
V-memory location will be 8000
instead of the bit being set.
Output Data Bits
The first twelve bits of the output word
represent the analog data in binary
format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
6
64
1
2
7
128
2
4
8
256
3
8
9
512
4
16
10
1024
5
32
11
2048
V40501
MSB
LSB
11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
10
= data bits
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
Module Failure — The last diagnostic input (X37 in this example) indicates that the
analog module is not operating. For example, if the 24 VDC input power is missing,
or if the terminal block is loose, then the module will turn on this input point. The
module will also return a data value of zero to further indicate there is a problem.
This input point cannot detect which individual channel is at fault. If the cause of the
failure goes away, the module turns this bit off.
14--12
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
Output
Channel
Selection Bits
Module
Resolution
Two of the outputs select the active
channel. Remember, the V-memory bits
are mapped directly to discrete outputs.
Turning a bit OFF selects its channel. By
controlling these outputs, you can select
which channel(s) gets updated.
Y35
Y34 Channel
On
Off
1
Off
On
2
Off
Off
1 & 2 (same data to
both channels)
On
On
None (both channels
hold current values)
Since the module has 12-bit resolution,
the analog signal is converted into 4096
counts ranging from 0 -- 4095 (212). For
example, a 4mA signal would be 0, and a
20mA signal would be 4095. This is
equivalent to a binary value of 0000
0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to
FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows
how this relates to the signal range.
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
Each count can also be expressed in
terms of the signal level by using the
equation shown.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
V40501
MSB
LSB
Y Y
3 3
5 4
Y
2
0
= channel control outputs
4 -- 20mA
20mA
4mA
0
4095
Resolution = H − L
4095
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
16mA / 4095 = 3.907A per count
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
14--13
Writing the Control Program
Before you begin writing the program, there are a few supplemental examples that
can be extremely beneficial. They include:
Analog Input
Power Failure
Detection
S
Input power failure detection
S
Output data calculation
S
Input data scaling
Take a close look at these examples. They may be helpful for your application.
The analog module has a microcontroller that can diagnose analog input circuit
problems. You can easily create a simple ladder rung to detect these problems.
This rung shows an input point that would be assigned if the module was used as
shown in the previous and following examples.
Multiplexing method
V-memory location V2000 holds
V2000
K0
X37
C1
=
OUT
Pointers method
V2000
K8000
C1
=
Calculating the
Output Data
OUT
V-memory location V2000 holds
channel 1 data. When a data value
of 8000 is returned, then the analog
channel is not operating properly.
A = U 4095
H−L
A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)
U = Engineering units
H = high limit of the engineering
unit range
L = low limit of the engineering
unit range
Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 99.9 PSI. By
using the formula, you can easily determine the digital value that should be sent to
the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 49.4 PSI. Notice
the formula uses a multiplier of 10. This is because the decimal portion of 49.4
cannot be loaded, so you adjust the formula to compensate for it.
A = 10U
4095
10(H − L)
A = 494
4095
1000 − 0
A = 2023
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
Your program has to calculate the digital
value to send to the analog output
channels. There are many ways to do
this, but most applications are
understood more easily if you use
measurements in engineering units.
This is accomplished by using the
conversion formula shown.
You may have to make adjustments to
the formula depending on the scale you
choose for the engineering units.
channel 1 data. When a data value
of zero is returned and input X37 is
on, then the analog channel is not
operating properly.
14--14
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
The example program below shows how you would write the program to perform
the engineering unit conversion. This example will work with all CPUs and assumes
that you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values and stored them in
V2300 and V2301 for channels 1 and 2 respectively. Also, we move the final values
to V2004 and V2005, which are memory locations that are used in the following
examples. You can use any user V locations, but they must match the locations that
are specified as the source for the output data (see the next section for an
example).
NOTE: The DL205 offers instructions that allow you to perform math operations
using BCD format. It is usually easier to perform any math calculations in BCD.
SP1
LD
V2300
MUL
K4095
DIV
K1000
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
OUT
V2004
SP1
LD
V2301
MUL
K4095
DIV
K1000
OUT
V2005
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion).
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10,
we have to use 1000 instead of 100).
Store the BCD result in V2004 (the actual steps required to send the
data are shown later).
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 2 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion).
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10,
we have to use 1000 instead of 100).
Store the BCD result in V2005 (the actual steps required to send the
data are shown later).
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
Scaling the
Input Data
Most applications usually require
measurements in engineering units,
which provide more meaningful data.
This is accomplished by using the
conversion formula shown.
You may have to make adjustments to
the formula depending on the scale you
choose for the engineering units.
14--15
Units = A H − L
4095
H = High limit of the engineering
unit range
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)
For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 99.9, you would
have to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when you
view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice
how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI
Example without multiplier
Example with multiplier
Units = A H − L
4095
Units = 10 A H − L
4095
Units = 2024 100 − 0
4095
Units = 20240 100 − 0
4095
Units = 49
Units = 494
Handheld Display
Handheld Display
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0049
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0494
This value is more accurate
Note, this example uses SP1, which is always on. You
could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
SP1
LD
V2000
Load channel 1 data to the accumulator.
MUL
K1000
Multiply the accumulator by 1000 (to start the conversion).
DIV
K4095
Divide the accumulator by 4095.
OUT
V2010
Store the result in V2010.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
The example program below shows how you would write the program to perform
the engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have BCD data
loaded into the appropriate V-memory locations using instructions that apply for the
model of CPU you are using.
14--16
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
Read / Write
Program
(Pointer Method)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
The DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs have special V-memory locations
assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements.
These V-memory locations:
S specify the number of input and output channels to scan.
S
specify the storage location for the input data.
S
specify the source location for the output data.
NOTE: To use the pointer method, DL250 CPUs must have firmware revision 1.09
or later, and F2-AD2DA modules must be revision C1 or later.
The example program shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung
anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage
programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the input data into
V-memory locations. The CPU automatically converts the binary input data to BCD
format. Once the input data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data,
compare the data against preset values, and so forth. For the output data, you have
to calculate the digital value in BCD (as shown previously) before you send the data
to the module, unless you select the binary data format option shown below.
V2000 and V2004 are used as the beginning of the data areas in the example, but
you can use any user V-memory locations. Also, in the previous examples the
module was installed in slot 3. You should use the V-memory locations for your
application. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD.
SP0
LD
K 0402
- or -
LD
K 8482
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan
and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble
(MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN
selects the number of input channels (1, 2, 3, or 4). The lower
byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format
(0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of output
channels (1, 2).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math
functions, whereas the DL250 does.
OUT
V7663
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
number of input and output channels.
LDA
O2000
This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the input data. For example, the O2000 entered here
would mean:
Ch1 -- V2000, Ch 2 -- V2001, Ch 3 -- V2002, Ch 4 -- V2003
OUT
V7673
The constant O2000 is stored here. V7673 is assigned to slot 3 and
acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this
location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.
LDA
O2004
This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be
used to obtain the analog output data. For example, the O2004
entered here would mean: Ch1 -- V2004, Ch 2 -- V2005.
OUT
V7703
The constant O2004 is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and
acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this
location to determine exactly where to obtain the output data.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
14--17
The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240,
DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0
(zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two
places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the
pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230
(multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero.
The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667
Input Pointer
V7670 V7671 V7672 V7673 V7674 V7675 V7676 V7677
Output Pointer
V7700 V7701 V7702 V7703 V7704 V7705 V7706 V7707
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Input Pointer
V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017
Output Pointer
V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027
The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Input Pointer
V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117
Output Pointer
V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Input Pointer
V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217
Output Pointer
V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227
The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of Channels
V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Input Pointer
V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317
Output Pointer
V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
No. of Channels
14--18
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
Reading Input
Values
(Multiplexing)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to
automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a
single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is
being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to
use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored.
Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The
addresses used would be different if the module was installed in another I/O
arrangement. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program or if you are
using stage programming, place them in a stage that is always active.
Load data when module is not busy.
X36
LD
V40401
ANDD
KFFF
Store Channel 1
X36
X34
X35
Store Channel 2
X36
X34
X35
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
Store Channel 3
X36
X34
X35
Store Channel 4
X36
X34
X35
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator.
The V-memory location depends on the I/O
configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map.
This instruction masks the channel identification bits.
Without this, the values used will not be correct so do
not forget to include it.
BCD
It is usually easier to perform math operations in
BCD, You can leave out this instruction if your
application does not require it.
OUT
V2000
When the module is not busy and X36, X34 and X35
are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.
OUT
V2001
When the module is not busy and X34 is on and X35
and X36 are off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001.
OUT
V2002
OUT
V2003
When the module is not busy and X34 and X36 are
off and X35 is on, channel 3 data is stored in V2002.
When the module is not busy and both X34 and X35 are
on and X36 is off, channel 4 data is stored in V2003.
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
Single Input
Channel
Selected
(Multiplexing)
Since you do not have to determine which channel is selected, the single channel
program is even simpler.
Store channel 1 when module is not busy.
X36
X34
X35
LD
V40401
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator.
The V-memory location depends on the I/O
configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map.
This instruction masks the channel identification
bits. Without this, the values used will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
ANDD
KFFF
Writing Output
Values
(Multiplexing)
14--19
BCD
It is usually easier to perform math operations in
BCD. You can leave out this instruction if your
application does not require it.
OUT
V2000
When the module is not busy and X34 and X35 are
off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.
The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to
automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a
single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel to
write. Since the module appears as Y output points to the CPU, it is very easy to use
the channel selection outputs to determine which channel to update.
Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The
addresses used would be different if the module was used in a different I/O
arrangement. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program or if you are
using stage programming, place them in a stage that is always active.
This example is a two-channel multiplexer that updates each channel on alternate
scans. SP7 is a special relay that is on for one scan, then off for one scan.
NOTE: You must send binary data to the module. If the data is already in binary
format, you should not use the BIN instruction shown in this example.
SP7
Loads the data for channel 1 into the accumulator.
LD
V2001
Loads the data for channel 2 into the accumulator.
Send data to V-memory assigned to the module.
SP1
Convert the data to binary (you must omit this step if
BIN
you have converted the data elsewhere).
SP1 is always on.
The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our
example starts with V40501, but the actual value
depends on the location of the module in your
application.
OUT
V40501
Select the channel to update.
SP7
Y34
OUT
SP7
Y35
OUT
Selects channel 1 for update when Y34 is OFF
(Y35--ON deselects channel 2). Note, Y34 and Y35 are
used due to the previous examples. If the module was
installed in a different I/O arrangement, the addresses
would be different.
Selects channel 2 for update when Y35 is OFF
(Y34--ON deselects channel 1). Note, Y34 and Y35 are
used due to the previous examples. If the module was
installed in a different I/O arrangement, addresses
would be different.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
Load data into the accumulator.
SP7
LD
V2000
14--20
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
Sending Data to
One Channel
(Multiplexing)
If you are not using both channels, or if you want to control the updates separately,
use the following program.
SP1
LD
V2000
The LD instruction loads the data into the
accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung
automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
BIN
The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data
to binary (you must omit this step if you have
already converted the data elsewhere).
ANDD
K0FFF
The ANDD instruction masks off the channel select
bits to prevent an accidental channel selection.
OUT
V40501
The OUT instruction sends the data to the
module. Our example starts with V40501, but the
actual value depends on the location of the
module in your application.
Y34
RST
Y35
OUT
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
Sending the Same
Data to Both
Channels
(Multiplexing)
Y34--OFF selects channel 1 for updating.
Y35--ON deselects channel 2 (do not update).
If both channel selection outputs are off, both channels will be updated with the
same data.
SP1
LD
V2000
The LD instruction loads the data into the
accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung
automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
BIN
The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data
to binary (you must omit this step if you have
already converted the data elsewhere).
ANDD
K0FFF
The ANDD instruction masks off the channel select
bits to prevent an accidental channel selection.
OUT
V40501
The OUT instruction sends the data to the
module. Our example starts with V40501, but the
actual value depends on the location of the
module in your application.
Y34
RST
Y34--OFF selects channel 1 for updating.
Y35
RST
Analog and
Digital Value
Conversions
Y35--OFF selects channel 2 for updating.
Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
troubleshooting. The table provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range
If you know the digital value ...
4 to 20mA
A = 16D + 4
4095
For example, if you have measured the
signal at 10mA, you could use the formula
to easily determine the digital value (D)
that should be stored in the V-memory
location that contains the data.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
If you know the analog signal level ...
D = 4095 (A − 4)
16
D = 4095 (A − 4)
16
4095
D=
(10mA − 4)
16
D = (255.93) (6)
D = 1536
F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog
Filtering Input
Noise (DL250--1,
DL260 CPUs Only)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
14--21
Add the following logic to filter and smooth analog input noise in DL250--1 or DL260
CPUs. This is especially useful when using PID loops. Noise can be generated by
the field device and/or induced by field wiring.
The analog value in BCD is first converted to a binary number because there is not a
BCD-to-real conversion instruction. Memory location V1400 is the designated
workspace in this example. The MULR instruction is the filter factor, which can be
from 0.1 to 0.9. The example uses 0.2. A smaller filter factor increases filtering. You
can use a higher precision value, but it is not generally needed. The filtered value is
then converted back to binary and then to BCD. The filtered value is stored in
location V1402 for use in your application or PID loop.
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example,
if you are using the pointer method to get the analog value, it is in BCD and must be
converted to binary. However, if you are using the conventional method of reading
analog and are masking the first twelve bits, then it is already in binary and no
conversion using the BIN instruction is needed.
SP1
LD
V2000
BIN
BTOR
Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to
binary. Remember, this instruction is not
needed if the analog value is originally
brought in as a binary number.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the
accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor),
and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value.
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
RTOB
BCD
OUT
V1402
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-4AD2DA
4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out
SUBR
V1400
F2-8AD4DA--1
8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out
Analog Current Comb.
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Special V--Memory Locations
— Writing the Control Program
15
15--2
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Module Specifications
The F2-8AD4DA--1 Analog Current
Input/Output module provides several
hardware features:
S Analog inputs and outputs are
optically isolated from the PLC
logic.
S The module has a removable
terminal block so the module can
be easily removed or changed
without disconnecting the wiring.
S Updates all input and output
channels in one scan.
S On-board active analog filtering,
two CISC microcontrollers, and
CPLD provide digital signal
processing to maintain precision
analog measurements in noisy
environments.
S Low-power CMOS design requires
only 100mA from an external
18--26.4 VDC power supply.
S Input resolution is independently
adjustable for each channel. Users
may select 12 bit, 14 bit, or 16 bit.
S Output resolution is 16 bit.
S Broken transmitter detection bit
(input < 2mA) for use with 4--20mA
input device.
S Each input can be independently
configured to return the present
value, or to track and hold the
maximum or minimum value.
S No jumper settings.
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
Hardware
and Firmware
Requirements
IN /
OUT
ANALOG
F2-8AD4DA--1
18-- 26.4VDC
@100mA
ANALOG
8 IN 0-- 20mA
4 OUT 4-- 20mA
0V
OUT2
OUT3
0V
IN2
IN3
0V
IN6
IN7
24V
OUT1
0V
OUT4
IN1
0V
IN4
IN5
0V
IN8
F2-8AD4DA--1
The F2--8AD4DA--1 analog current input/output module requires one of the
following components as a CPU or controller:
Base Type
CPU/Controller Firmware Version
D2--250--1
4.40 or later
D2--260
2.20 or later
H2--WPLC
pending
Expansion
D2--CM
1.30 or later
Remote I/O
H2--EBC(--F)
2.1.441 or later
H2--EBC100
4.0.457 or later
H2--PBC
pending
Local
Profibus Slave
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
15--3
The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-8AD4DA--1 Analog
Current Input/Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the
module meets your application requirements.
Input
Specifications
Number of Input Channels
8, single ended (one common)
Input Range
0 to 20mA
Input Resolution / Value of LSB
12, 14, or 16 bit; selectable
12 bit, 0 to 20mA = 4.88A
14 bit, 0 to 20mA = 1.22A
16 bit, 0 to 20mA = 0.305A
Input Impedance
100Ω ±0.1%, 1/4W
Maximum Continuous Overload
±45mA
Loop Supply Voltage Range
18 to 26.4VDC
Filter Characteristics
Active low pass; --3dB @ 80Hz
PLC Input Update Rate
8 channels per scan (max. with pointers; local base)
Sample Duration Time (note 1)
2ms @ 12bit; 5.52ms @ 14bit; 23ms @ 16bit
Conversion Time (note 1)
12 bit = 1.5ms per channel
14 bit = 6ms per channel
16 bit = 25ms per channel
Conversion Method
Over sampling successive approximation
Accuracy vs. temperature
25ppm/C max.
Input Stability and Repeatability
±0.025% of range (after 30 minute warm--up)
Input Inaccuracy
0.1% of range max.
Linearity Error (end to end)
12 bit = ±2 count max. (±0.06% of range)
14 bit = ±10 count max. (±0.06% of range)
16 bit = ±40 count max. (±0.06% of range)
Monotonic with no missing codes
Full Scale Calibration Error
±0.07% of range max.
(not including offset error)
Offset Calibration Error
±0.03% of range max.
Common Mode Rejection
--90dB min. @ DC; --150dB min. @ 50/60Hz
Crosstalk
±0.025% of range max. @ DC, 50/60Hz
Recommended External Fuse
0.032A, Littelfuse series 217 fast-acting, current inputs
Note 1: The values listed for Sample Duration Time and Conversion Time are for a single channel, and do not
include PLC scan times.
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
15--4
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Output
Specifications
Number of Output Channels
4
Output Range
4 to 20mA
Output Resolution
16 bit; 0.244A/bit
Output Type
Current sourcing at 20mA max.
Output Signal at Power--Up & Power--Down
≤4mA
External Load Impedance
0--750Ω
Maximum Inductive Load
1mH
Allowed Load Type
Grounded
Output Voltage Drop
6V max.; 1V min.
Max. Continuous Output Overload
Open circuit protected
Type of Output Protection
Electronically current limited to 20mA or less
PLC Output All Channel Update Time
4ms (local base)
Output Settling Time
0 5ms max
0.5ms
max.;; 5s min
min. (full scale change)
Output Ripple
0.005% of full scale
Accuracy vs. Temperature
±25ppm/C max. full scale calibration change (±0.0025% of
range / C)
Output Stability and Repeatability
±1 LSB after 10 minute warm--up typical
Output Inaccuracy
0.1% of range max.
Linearity Error (end to end)
±33 count max. (±0.05% of full scale)
Monotonic with no missing codes
Full Scale Calibration Error
±0.07% of range max.
(not including offset error)
Offset Calibration Error
±0.03% of range max.
Crosstalk at DC, 50/60Hz
--70dB or 0.025% of full scale
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
One count in the specifications table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 65536).
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
General Module
Specifications
15--5
Digital Input and Output Points Required
32 point (X) inputs
32 point (Y) outputs
Power Budget Requirement
35mA @ 5VDC (supplied by base)
External Power Supply Requirement
18 to 26.4VDC, 100mA maximum plus 20mA per output loop
Field Side to Logic Side Isolation
1800VAC applied for 1 second (100% tested)
Insulation Resistance
>10M @ 500VDC
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_C (32 to 140F); IEC60068--2--14
Storage Temperature
--20 to 70_C (--4 to 158F); IEC60068--2--1, --2--2, --2--14
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing); IEC60068--2--30
Environmental Air
No corrosive gases permitted; EN61131--2 pollution degree 1
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2; IEC60068--2--6
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2; IEC60068--2--27
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304; IEC61000--4--2, --4--3, --4--4
Emissions
EN61000--6--4 (conducted and radiated RF emissions)
Module Location
Any non--CPU slot in local, expansion, or Ethernet remote base
of DL205 system with DL250--1 or DL260 CPU
Field Wiring
19 point removable terminal block included.
Optional remote wiring using ZL--CM20 remote feed--through
terminal block module and ZL--2CBL2# cable.
Agency Approvals
UL508; UL6079--15 Zone 2; CE (EN61131--2)
Module Placement The F2-8AD4DA--1 analog current input/output module requires 32 discrete input
and Configuration and 32 discrete output points.
Requirements
The module can be installed in any non--CPU slot of D2--250--1 or D2--260 local
bases, D2--CM expansion bases, H2--EBC(100)(--F) Ethernet remote bases,
H2--PBC Profibus slave bases, or H2--WPLCx--xx WinPLC bases.
The module is NOT supported by D2--230, D2--240, or D2--250 CPUs. It is also
not supported by D2--RMSM and D2--RSSS remote I/O master/slave modules.
The available power budget may also be a limiting factor. Check the user manual for
your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power
budget and number of local, local expansion, or Ethernet remote I/O points.
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
15--6
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Connecting the Field Wiring
Wiring Guidelines
User Power
Supply
Requirements
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some ideas to
consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
S
Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not
ground the shield at both the module and the load or source.
S
Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches,
or transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S
Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the
risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose
the correct method for your application.
The F2-8AD4DA--1 requires at least one field-side power supply. You may use the
same or separate power sources for the module supply and loop supply. The
module requires 100mA at 18--26.4VDC. In addition, each current loop requires
20mA (a total of 240mA for twelve current loops). If you use a separate power
supply, make sure that it meets these requirements.
The DL205 bases have built-in 24VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of
current. You may use this instead of a separate supply if you are using only one
combination module with less than ten current loops.
It is desirable in some situations to power the loops separately in a location remote
from the PLC. This will work as long as the loop’s power supply meets the voltage
and current requirements, and its minus (--) side and the module supply’s minus (--)
side are connected together.
WARNING: If you are using the 24VDC base power supply, make sure you
calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable
system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise,
you may notice ±3--5 counts of instability in the analog input data if you use the
base power supply. If this is unacceptable, you should try one of the following:
1. Use a separate linear power supply.
2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw
terminal marked “G” on the base.
By using these methods, the input stability is rated at ±0.025% of range.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
15--7
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Current Loop
Transmitter
Impedance
Standard 0 to 20mA and 4 to 20mA transmitters and transducers can operate from
a wide variety of power supplies. Not all transmitters are alike and the
manufacturers often specify a minimum loop or load resistance that must be used
with the transmitter.
The F2-8AD4DA--1 provides 100 Ohms resistance for each input channel. If your
transmitter requires a load resistance below 100 Ohms, you do not have to make
any adjustments. However, if your transmitter requires a load resistance higher
than 100 Ohms, you need to add a resistor in series with the module.
Consider the following example for a transmitter being operated from a 24VDC
supply with a recommended load resistance of 750 Ohms. Since the module has
only 100 Ohms resistance, you need to add an additional resistor.
Example:
R = Tr − Mr
R = 750 − 100
R ≥ 650
R -- resistor to add
Tr -- Transmitter total resistance requirement
Mr -- Module resistance (internal 100 Ohms)
Two-wire Transmitter
+
-DC Supply
+24V
0V
Module Channel 1
R
IN1+
IN--
100 Ohms
In the example, add a 650 Ohm resistor
(R) in series with the module.
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
15--8
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Wiring Diagram
The F2-8AD4DA--1 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier.
Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector
from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring.
The diagram shows one power supply for both the module and the I/O signal loops.
If you want to use separate module and loop power supplies, connect the power
supply 0V commons together.
Internal module wiring
+
-+
-+
-+
-3--wire 4--20mA +
transmitter
4--20mA output
Channel 1
CH3 DAC
CH4 DAC
100
See Note 2
4--20mA transmitter
shield, Channel 3
See Note 1
0.032A
4--20mA transmitter
shield, Channel 5
COM
 In3
COM
100
100
100
COM
Transmitter power
100
 In5
 In8
AC or DC
4--wire 4--20mA
transmitter
CH2 DAC
Out3
Out4
COM
4--20mA output
Channel 4
See Note 2
CH1 DAC
COM
4--20mA output
Channel 3
100
100
100
CH1 ADC
CH2 ADC
Note 1: A Littelfuse Series 217, 0.032A fast--acting fuse is recommended for all 4--20mA current loop inputs.
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
Note 2: Connect shields to ground at their respective signal sources; do not ground both ends of shields.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--1
18-- 26.4VDC
@100mA
ANALOG
8 IN 0-- 20mA
4 OUT 4-- 20mA
0V
OUT2
CH3 ADC
OUT3
CH4 ADC
0V
CH5 ADC
CH6 ADC
IN2
IN3
0V
CH7 ADC
IN6
CH8 ADC
IN7
4--20mA transmitter
shield, Channel 8
See Note 2
ANALOG
Isolated analog
circuit power
Out1
Out2
4--20mA output
Channel 2
See Note 2
2--wire 4--20mA
transmitter
User 24VDC
supply
24VDC+
0VDC--
IN /
OUT
Isolated analog
circuit common
24V
OUT1
0V
OUT4
IN1
0V
IN4
IN5
0V
IN8
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
15--9
Module Operation
Input Channel
Scanning
Sequence
(Pointer Method)
If this module is installed in a local (CPU) base, you can obtain all eight channels of
input data in one scan. However, you can obtain only one channel of input data per
scan if the module is installed in an expansion, remote I/O, or Profibus slave base.
System with
analog module
installed in local
(CPU) base.
Scan
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Write to Outputs
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8
Scan N+6
Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8
Scan N+7
Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8
System with analog
module installed in
expansion, remote I/O
or Profibus slave base.
Scan
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Ch 1
Scan N+1
Ch 2
Scan N+2
Ch 3
Scan N+6
Ch 7
Scan N+7
Ch 8
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
Write to Outputs
Scan N
15--10
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Output Channel
Update Sequence
(Pointer Method)
If this module is installed in a local (CPU) base, you can update all four output
channels in every scan. However, you can update only one channel of output data
per scan if the module is installed in an expansion, remote I/O, or Profibus slave
base. The timing is synchronized with the timing of reading the input channels, so
you can update each output channel data every eight scans.
System with
analog module
installed in local
(CPU) base.
Scan
Read inputs
Execute Application Program
Calculate the data
Write data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Write to outputs
System with analog
module installed in
expansion, remote I/O
or Profibus slave base.
Scan
Read Inputs
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Write to Outputs
Scan N
Ch 1
Scan N+1
Ch 2
Scan N+2
Ch 3
Scan N+3
Ch 4
Scan N+6
Scan N+7
Scan N+8
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Ch 1
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Understanding
the I/O
Assignments
15--11
The F2-8AD4DA--1 module appears to the CPU as 32 discrete input and 32
discrete output points. These points provide the data value, channel identification,
and settings for resolution, range, and track and hold feature. You may never have
to use these bits, but it may help you understand the data format.
Since all input and output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very
easy to determine the location of the data words that will be assigned to the module.
F2-8AD4DA--1
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
32pt In
32pt Out
8pt
Output
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
Y0
-Y17
X20 Y20
--X57 Y57
V40500
V40400
MSB
X
3
7
MSB
X
5
7
V40401
Input Data Bits
V40402
LSB
X
2
0
LSB
X
4
0
MSB
Y
3
7
MSB
Y
5
7
Y60
-Y67
V40503
V40501
Output Data Bits
V40502
LSB
Y
2
0
LSB
Y
4
0
Within these memory word locations, the individual bits represent specific
information about the analog signal. (Your specific memory locations may vary,
depending upon the slot location of the F2--8AD4DA--1 module.)
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
15--12
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Input Bits
Depending
upon
the
resolution
selected, up to 16 bits of the first input
word represent the analog data in binary
format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
8
256
1
2
9
512
2
4
10
1024
3
8
11
2048
4
16
12
4096
5
32
13
8192
6
64
14
16384
7
128
15
32768
The upper byte of the second input word
represents the broken transmitter
detection bits for use only with 4--20mA
input devices. The lower byte is not
usable by the programmer.
V40401
MSB
X
5
6
-1
4
V40402
X
5
5
-1
3
X
5
4
-1
2
XX
55
32
-- -11
10
X
5
1
-9
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
Output Bits
8
7
6
5
All 16 bits of the first output word
represent the analog data in binary
format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
8
256
1
2
9
512
2
4
10
1024
3
8
11
2048
4
16
12
4096
5
32
13
8192
6
64
14
16384
7
128
15
32768
The second output word is not usable by
the programmer.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
X
5
0
-8
X
4
7
-7
LSB
X
4
6
-6
X
4
5
-5
X
4
4
-4
X
4
3
-3
X
4
2
-2
X
4
1
-1
X
4
0
-0
= broken transmitter bits
= not usable by programmer
Broken Transmitter Detection Bits (second input word)
V40402
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Input Address #
57 56 55 54 53 52 51
Input Bit #
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
BT for Channel #
X
2
0
-0
= data bits
MSB
X
5
7
-1
5
X
2
1
-1
X
2
2
-2
X
2
3
-3
X
2
4
-4
X
2
5
-5
X
2
6
-6
X
2
7
-7
X
3
0
-8
X
3
1
-9
XX
33
32
-- -11
10
X
3
4
-1
2
X
3
5
-1
3
X
3
6
-1
4
X
3
7
-1
5
LSB
4
3
Y
3
6
-1
4
Y
3
5
-1
3
Y
3
4
-1
2
YY
33
32
-- -11
10
Y
5
6
-1
4
Y
5
5
-1
3
X
40
... 0
1
n/a ... n/a
...
Y
3
1
-9
Y
3
0
-8
Y
2
7
-7
LSB
Y
2
6
-6
Y
2
5
-5
Y
2
4
-4
Y
2
3
-3
Y
5
4
-1
2
YY
55
32
-- -11
10
Y
2
2
-2
Y
2
1
-1
Y
2
0
-0
= data bits
V40502
MSB
Y
5
7
-1
5
X
47
7
V40501
MSB
Y
3
7
-1
5
2
X
50
8
Y
5
1
-9
Y
5
0
-8
Y
4
7
-7
Y
4
6
-6
LSB
Y
4
5
-5
Y
4
4
-4
Y
4
3
-3
Y
4
2
-2
Y
4
1
-1
Y
4
0
-0
= not usable by programmer
15--13
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Special V--Memory Locations
The DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs have special V--memory locations assigned to
each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. These
V--memory locations specify:
S
the numbers of input and output channels to scan;
S
the storage locations for the input and output data;
S
the resolution selections for the inputs;
S
the range selections for the inputs and outputs;
S
the track and hold selections for the inputs.
The tables below show the special V--memory used by the CPUs for the CPU base
and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 is the module slot next to the CPU or
D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module slot two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and
so on. The CPU needs to examine the pointer values at these locations only after a
mode transition.
Module
Configuration
Registers
CPU Base: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of I/O Channels
Enabled & Format
V7660
V7661
V7662
V7663
V7664
V7665
V7666
V7667
Input Pointer
V7670
V7671
V7672
V7673
V7674
V7675
V7676
V7677
Output Pointer
V7700
V7701
V7702
V7703
V7704
V7705
V7706
V7707
Input Resolutions
V36400 V36401 V36402 V36403 V36404 V36405 V36406 V36407
(Reserved)
V36410 V36411 V36412 V36413 V36414 V36415 V36416 V36417
Input Track & Hold
V36420 V36421 V36422 V36423 V36424 V36425 V36426 V36427
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of I/O Channels
V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Enabled & Format
V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017
Output Pointer
V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027
Input Resolutions
V36030 V36031 V36032 V36033 V36034 V36035 V36036 V36037
(Reserved)
V36040 V36041 V36042 V36043 V36044 V36045 V36046 V36047
Input Track & Hold
V36050 V36051 V36052 V36053 V36054 V36055 V36056 V36057
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
Input Pointer
15--14
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of I/O Channels
V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Enabled & Format
Input Pointer
V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117
Output Pointer
V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127
Input Resolutions
V36130 V36131 V36132 V36133 V36134 V36135 V36136 V36137
(Reserved)
V36140 V36141 V36142 V36143 V36144 V36145 V36146 V36147
Input Track & Hold
V36150 V36151 V36152 V36153 V36154 V36155 V36156 V36157
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of I/O Channels
V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Enabled & Format
Input Pointer
V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217
Output Pointer
V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227
Input Resolutions
V36230 V36231 V36232 V36233 V36234 V36235 V36236 V36237
(Reserved)
V36240 V36241 V36242 V36243 V36244 V36245 V36246 V36247
Input Track & Hold
V36250 V36251 V36252 V36253 V36254 V36255 V36256 V36257
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
No. of I/O Channels
V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Enabled & Format
Input Pointer
V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317
Output Pointer
V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327
Input Resolutions
V36330 V36331 V36332 V36333 V36334 V36335 V36336 V36337
(Reserved)
V36340 V36341 V36342 V36343 V36344 V36345 V36346 V36347
Input Track & Hold
V36350 V36351 V36352 V36353 V36354 V36355 V36356 V36357
Number of I/O
Channels Enabled
& Data Format
Load this V--memory location with a constant that specifies the number of enabled
I/O channels and their data formats. The upper byte applies to the inputs, and the
lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibbles specify the data
formats, and the least significant nibbles specify the number of channels enabled.
No. Channels Enabled
1
BCD Input
K01xx K02xx K03xx K04xx K04xx K06xx K07xx K08xx
Binary Input
K81xx K82xx K83xx K84xx K85xx K86xx K87xx K88xx
BCD Output
Kxx01 Kxx02 Kxx03 Kxx04 n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Binary Output
Kxx81 Kxx82 Kxx83 Kxx84 n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15--15
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Input Resolution
Selection Bits
Each of the eight input channels can be individually disabled or configured for 12,
14, or 16 bit resolution.
V36403: (specific memory location varies depending upon base and slot location)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R-- R-- R-- R-8H 8L 7H 7L
R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-6H 6L 5H 5L 4H 4L 3H 3L
R-- R-- R-- R-2H 2L 1H 1L
RnH = Resolution channel n High bit
RnL = Resolution channel n Low bit
Input Resolution Select RnH RnL
12 bit
0
0
14 bit
0
1
16 bit
1
0
Disabled
1
1
Example: Input channels 1--4 are 12 bit, channel 5 is 14 bit, and channel 6 is 16 bit,
and channels 7 and 8 are disabled; V36403 = F900(hex):
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R-- R-- R-- R-8H 8L 7H 7L
1
1
1
1
R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-6H 6L 5H 5L 4H 4L 3H 3L
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
F
9
R-- R-- R-- R-2H 2L 1H 1L
0
0
0
0
0
0
The track and hold feature for each of the eight inputs can be individually configured
Input Track and
Hold Selection Bits for minimum, maximum, no hold, or reset held value. This configuration can be
changed “on the fly” while the program is running.
V36423: (specific memory location varies depending upon base and slot location)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
T-- T-8H 8L
T-- T-7H 7L
T-- T-6H 6L
T-- T-5H 5L
T-- T-4H 4L
T-- T-3H 3L
T-- T-2H 2L
T-- T-1H 1L
TnH = Track and hold channel n High bit
TnL = Track and hold channel n Low bit
Track and Hold Select
TnH TnL Result
No Track and Hold
0
returns real time input value
Track and Hold Minimum Value 0
1
maintains lowest measured value
Track and Hold Max. Value
1
0
maintains highest measured value
Reset Track and Hold Value
1
1
resets previously held input value
Example: Input channel track and hold settings: ch 1--3 = none, ch 4--5 =
minimum, ch 6--7 = maximum, ch 8 = reset; V36423 = E940(hex):
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
T-- T-8H 8L
1
1
T-- T-7H 7L
1
0
E
T-- T-6H 6L
1
0
T-- T-5H 5L
0
1
9
T-- T-4H 4L
0
1
T-- T-3H 3L
0
0
4
T-- T-2H 2L
0
0
T-- T-1H 1L
0
0
0
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
0
15--16
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Writing the Control Program
Configuring the
Module to Read /
Write I/O
(Pointer Method)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
These example programs show how to configure the special V--memory locations
to read/write data from/to the I/O module. The module configuration rung needs to
be read by the CPU only after a mode transition, and does not need to be read every
scan. Place the configuration rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial
stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to
read the input data and write the output data to/from the V-memory locations. Once
the input data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data, compare the data
against preset values, and so forth.
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
V2000 and V2020 are used as the beginning of the data areas in the example, but
you can use any user V-memory locations. Also, these examples assume that the
module is installed in slot 3 of the CPU base. You should use the pointer V-memory
locations determined by the layout of your application.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
15--17
Module Configuration Example 1:
Number of Channels = 8 in, 4 out;
Data Format = binary in, BCD out;
Input Resolution = 16 bit;
Input Track and Hold = none; real time value.
SP0
LD
K 8804
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. (See note below regarding data format.)
The upper byte applies to the inputs. The most significant nibble
(MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN
selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to scan.
The lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibble
(MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN
selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4) to scan.
OUT
V7663
LDA
O2000
OUT
V7673
LDA
O2020
OUT
V7703
LD
KAAAA
OUT
V36403
LD
K0
This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the input data. For example, the O2000 entered here
would mean: Ch1 -- V2000, V2001; Ch2 -- V2002, V2003; Ch3 -V2004, V2005; Ch4 -- V2006, V2007; Ch5 -- V2010, V2011; Ch6 -V2012, V2013; Ch7 -- V2014, V2015; Ch8 -- V2016, V2017. For each
channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed
only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. The 2nd word
contains the most significant digit in those cases.
The constant O2000 is stored here. V7673 is assigned to slot 3 and
acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this
location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.
This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be
used for the analog output data. For example, the O2020 entered
here would mean: Ch1 -- V2020, V2021; Ch2 -- V2022, V2023; Ch3 -V2024, V2025; Ch4 -- V2026, V2027. For each channel, the 1st word
holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14
or 16 bit data in BCD format. The 2nd word contains the most
significant digit in those cases.
The constant O2020 is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and
acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this
location to determine exactly where to obtain the output data.
Loads a constant that specifies the resolutions for each of the input
channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per
channel, as shown previously in “Input Resolutions Selection Bits”.
The constant AAAA(hex) configures each of the eight input channels
for 16 bits.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
resolution settings for each of the input channels.
Loads a constant that specifies the track and hold settings for each
of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of
two bits per channel, as previously shown in “Track and Hold
Selection Bits”. The constant 0 configures each of the eight input
channels for no track and hold.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the track
and hold settings for each of the input channels..
NOTE:
Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to
be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V--memory word (16 bits) available for
the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either
binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD format’s
maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format.
Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
OUT
V36423
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
number of input and output channels.
15--18
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Module Configuration Example 2:
Number of Channels = 4 in, 4 out;
Data Format = binary in, BCD out;
Input Resolution = 14 bit;
Input Track and Hold = all inputs maximum value.
SP0
LD
K 8404
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. (See note below regarding data format.)
The upper byte applies to the inputs. The most significant nibble
(MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN
selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to scan.
The lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibble
(MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN
selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4) to scan.
OUT
V7663
LDA
O2000
OUT
V7673
LDA
O2020
OUT
V7703
LD
K5555
OUT
V36403
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
LD
KAAAA
OUT
V36423
NOTE:
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
number of input and output channels.
This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the input data. For example, the O2000 entered here
would mean: Ch1 -- V2000, V2001; Ch2 -- V2002, V2003; Ch3 -V2004, V2005; Ch4 -- V2006, V2007. For each channel, the 1st word
holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14
or 16 bit data in BCD format. The 2nd word contains the most
significant digit in those cases.
The constant O2000 is stored here. V7673 is assigned to slot 3 and
acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this
location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.
This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be
used for the analog output data. For example, the O2020 entered
here would mean: Ch1 -- V2020, V2021; Ch2 -- V2022, V2023; Ch3 -V2024, V2025; Ch4 -- V2026, V2027. For each channel, the 1st word
holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14
or 16 bit data in BCD format. The 2nd word contains the most
significant digit in those cases.
The constant O2020 is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and
acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this
location to determine exactly where to obtain the output data.
Loads a constant that specifies the resolutions for each of the input
channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per
channel, as shown previously in “Input Resolutions Selection Bits”.
The constant 5555(hex) configures each of the eight input channels
for 14 bits.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
resolution settings for each of the input channels.
Loads a constant that specifies the track and hold settings for each
of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of
two bits per channel, as previously shown in “Track and Hold
Selection Bits”. The constant AAAA(hex) configures each of the eight
input channels to track and hold the maximum value.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the track
and hold settings for each of the input channels..
Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to
be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V--memory word (16 bits) available for
the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either
binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD format’s
maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format.
Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
15--19
Module Configuration Example 3:
Number of Channels = 4 in, 2 out;
Data Format = BCD in, BCD out;
Input Resolution = 12 bit;
Input Track and Hold = all inputs minimum value.
SP0
LD
K 0402
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. (See note below regarding data format.) (The leading
zero in this LD instruction is shown for clarity. It can be entered by the
programmer, but it will be dropped by the programming software.)
The upper byte applies to the inputs. The most significant nibble
(MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN
selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to scan.
The lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibble
(MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN
selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4) to scan.
OUT
V7663
LDA
O2000
OUT
V7673
LDA
O2020
OUT
V7703
LD
K0
OUT
V36403
LD
K5555
This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the input data. For example, the O2000 entered here
would mean: Ch1 -- V2000, V2001; Ch2 -- V2002, V2003; Ch3 -V2004, V2005; Ch4 -- V2006, V2007. For each channel, the 1st word
holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14
or 16 bit data in BCD format. The 2nd word contains the most
significant digit in those cases.
The constant O2000 is stored here. V7673 is assigned to slot 3 and
acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this
location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.
This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be
used for the analog output data. For example, the O2020 entered
here would mean: Ch1 -- V2020, V2021; Ch2 -- V2022, V2023. For
each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is
needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. The
2nd word contains the most significant digit in those cases.
The constant O2020 is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and
acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this
location to determine exactly where to obtain the output data.
Loads a constant that specifies the resolutions for each of the input
channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per
channel, as shown previously in “Input Resolutions Selection Bits”.
The constant 0 configures each of the eight input channels for 12
bits.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
resolution settings for each of the input channels.
Loads a constant that specifies the track and hold settings for each
of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of
two bits per channel, as previously shown in “Track and Hold
Selection Bits”. The constant 5555(hex) configures each of the eight
input channels to track and hold the minimum value.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the track
and hold settings for each of the input channels..
NOTE:
Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to
be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V--memory word (16 bits) available for
the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either
binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD format’s
maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format.
Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
OUT
V36423
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
number of input and output channels.
15--20
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Module 12 Bit
Input Resolution
When the module 0--20mA inputs are
configured for 12 bit resolution, the
analog signal is converted into 4096
(212) counts ranging from 0 -- 4095. For
example, a 0mA signal would be 0, and a
20mA signal would be 4095. This is
equivalent to a binary value of 0000
0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to
FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows
how this relates to the signal range.
Each count can also be expressed in
terms of the signal level by using the
equation shown.
Module 14 Bit
Input Resolution
When the module 0--20mA inputs are
configured for 14 bit resolution, the
analog signal is converted into 16384
(214) counts ranging from 0 -- 16383. For
example, a 0mA signal would be 0, and a
20mA signal would be 16383. This is
equivalent to a binary value of 00 0000
0000 0000 to 11 1111 1111 1111, or 0000
to 3FFF hexadecimal. The diagram
shows how this relates to the signal
range.
Each count can also be expressed in
terms of the signal level by using the
equation shown.
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
Module 16 Bit
Input Resolution
When the module 0--20mA inputs are
configured for 16 bit resolution, the
analog signal is converted into 65536
(216) counts ranging from 0 -- 65535. For
example, a 0mA signal would be 0, and a
20mA signal would be 65535. This is
equivalent to a binary value of 0000
0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111,
or 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal. The
diagram shows how this relates to the
signal range.
Each count can also be expressed in
terms of the signal level by using the
equation shown.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
0 -- 20mA
12 Bit Resolution
20mA
0mA
0
4095
12 Bit Resolution = H − L
4095
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
20mA / 4095 = 4.88A per count
0 -- 20mA
14 Bit Resolution
20mA
0mA
0
16383
14 Bit Resolution = H − L
16383
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
20mA / 16383 = 1.22A per count
0 -- 20mA
16 Bit Input Resolution
20mA
0mA
0
65535
16 Bit Resolution = H − L
65535
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
20mA / 65535 = 0.305A per count
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
15--21
Analog and Digital Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
Input Data Value
troubleshooting. The table provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
Conversion
A = (D)(Amax) / (Dmax)
D = (A)(Dmax) / (Amax)
S A = Analog value from current transmitter
S Amax = Maximum analog value
S D = Digital value of input provided to PLC CPU
S Dmax = Maximum digital value
Resolution
X--mitter
Range
If you know the digital
value...
If you know the analog
signal level...
12 bit
0--4095
0--20mA
4--20mA
A = (D)(20) / 4095
D = (A)(4095) / 20
14 bit
0--16383
0--20mA
4--20mA
A = (D)(20) / 16383
D = (A)(16383) / 20
16 bit
0--65535
0--20mA
4--20mA
A = (D)(20) / 65535
D = (A)(65535) / 20
For example, if you are using 16 bit
resolution, and have measured the signal
at 12mA, you could use the formula to
easily determine the digital value (D) that
should be stored in the V-memory
location that contains the data.
D = (A) 65535
20
D = (12) (3276.75)
D = 39321
Notice that the mathematical relationship between the analog and digital values
remains the same regardless of whether 4--20mA or 0--20mA transmitters are
used. Only the engineering unit input scaling will vary, as shown later.
Input Value
Comparisons:
Analog, Digital,
Engineering Units
The following table shows how the input analog, digital, and engineering unit values
are related to each other. The example is a measurement of pressure from 0.0 to
140.0 PSI, using a multiplier of 10 for one implied decimal place.
Analog
(mA)
Digital
12 Bit
Digital
14 Bit
Digital
16 Bit
E.U.
0--20mA
Transmitter
E.U.
4--20mA
Transmitter
20
4095
16383
65535
1400
1400
12
2457
9830
39321
840
700
10
2048
8192
32768
700
525
4
819
3277
13107
280
0
0
0
0
0
0
N/A
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
15--22
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Scaling the
Input Data
Most applications require measurements in engineering units, which provide more
meaningful data. This can be accomplished by using the conversion formulas
shown below:
EU = (A -- Aoffset)(EUH -- EUL) / (Amax -- Aoffset)
EU = (D -- Doffset)(EUH -- EUL) / (Dmax -- Doffset)
S
A = analog value from current transmitter
S
Aoffset = 4mA offset when using 4--20mA current transmitter
S
D = digital value of input provided to PLC CPU
S
Doffset = digital value of 4mA offset with 4--20mA current transmitter
S
EU = engineering units
S
EUH = engineering units high value
S
EUL = engineering units low value
The following examples show a 16 bit measurement of pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to
140.0. You need to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place
when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld
programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 12.6mA, 4--20mA transmitter, 16 bit resolution, should yield 75.2 PSI
Example without multiplier
EU = (D − Doffset)
Example with multiplier
EU H − EU L
D max − D offset
EU = (41287 − 13107)
140 − 0
65535 − 13107
EU = 75
EU = (10)(D − Doffset)
EU H − EU L
D max − D offset
EU = (10)(41287 − 13107)
140 − 0
65535 − 13107
EU = 752
Handheld Display
Handheld Display
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0075
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0752
This value is more accurate
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
NOTE:
Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to
be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V--memory word (16 bits) available for
the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either
binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD format’s
maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format.
Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
15--23
Input Engineering Unit Conversion Example 1:
Data Format = BCD;
Channel 1 data memory location = V2000;
Channel 1 resolution = 12 bits;
Channel 1 engineering units = 0.0 to 140.0psi;
Channel 1 input device = 0 to 20mA transmitter.
Note, this example uses SP1 (which is always on) as a permissive contact for the
engineering unit conversion. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
SP1
LD
V2000
Load input channel 1 digital value into accumulator.
MUL
K1400
Multiply by 1400;
EU range X 10 for implied decimal.
DIV
K4095
Divide by 4095;
12 bit digital range for 0--20mA.
OUT
V2100
Store input EU value in V2100.
Input Engineering Unit Conversion Example 2:
Data Format = binary;
Channel 1 data memory location = V2000;
Channel 1 resolution = 14 bits;
Channel 1 engineering units = 0.0 to 140.0psi;
Channel 1 input device = 0 to 20mA transmitter.
Note, this example uses SP1 (which is always on) as a permissive contact for the
engineering unit conversion. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
SP1
LD
V2000
Load input channel 1 digital value into accumulator.
MULB
K578
Multiply by 1400 [hex 578];
EU range X 10 for implied decimal.
DIVB
K3FFF
Divide by 16383 [hex 3FFF];
14 bit digital range for 0--20mA.
(Use 65535 [KFFFF] for 16 bit; 4095 [KFFF] for 12 bit.)
OUT
V2100
Store input EU value in V2100.
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
15--24
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Input Engineering Unit Conversion Example 3:
Data Format = BCD;
Channel 1 data memory location = V2000;
Channel 1 resolution = 12 bits;
Channel 1 engineering units = 0.0 to 140.0psi;
Channel 1 input device = 4 to 20mA transmitter.
SP0
V2000
LD
K819
Load constant 819 into accumulator;
12 bit digital value for 4mA offset.
OUT
V2030
Store input offset value in V2030.
K819
C0
OUT
C0
LD
V2000
Load input channel 1 digital value into accumulator.
(If input not less than 4mA.)
SUB
V2030
Subtract 819;
12 bit digital value for 4mA offset.
(This rung not used if input transmitter is 0--20mA.)
MUL
K1400
Multiply by 1400;
EU range X 10 for implied decimal.
DIV
K3276
Divide by 3276;
12 bit digital range for 4--20mA.
(For 0--20mA xmitter: use 4095.)
OUT
V2100
Store input EU value in V2100.
LD
K0
Load value of 0 into accumulator.
(If input less than 4mA.)
(This rung not used if input transmitter is 0--20mA.)
OUT
V2100
Store value of 0 in V2100
(This rung not used if input transmitter is 0--20mA.)
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
C0
C0 is on when analog input is less than 4mA;
819 = 4mA @ 12 bits.
(This rung not used if input transmitter is 0--20mA.)
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
15--25
Input Engineering Unit Conversion Example 4:
Data Format = binary;
Channel 1 data memory location = V2000;
Channel 1 resolution = 16 bits;
Channel 1 engineering units = 0.0 to 140.0psi;
Channel 1 input device = 4 to 20mA transmitter.
V2000
K3333
C0
OUT
C0
C0
Using the Input
Track and Hold
Feature
C0 is on when analog input is less than 4mA;
3333 hex = 13107 = 4mA @ 16 bits.
(Use KCCD for 14 bit; K333 for 12 bit.)
(This rung not used if input transmitter is 0--20mA.)
LD
V2000
Load input channel 1 digital value into accumulator.
(If input not less than 4mA.)
BTOR
Convert from binary to real data format.
SUBR
R13107
Subtract 13107;
16 bit digital value for 4mA offset.
(Use R3277 for 14 bit; R819 for 12 bit.)
(This rung not used if input transmitter is 0--20mA.)
MULR
R1400
Multiply by 1400;
EU range X 10 for implied decimal.
DIVR
R52428
Divide by 5248;
16 bit digital range for 4--20mA.
(Use R13106 for 14 bit; R3276 for 12 bit.)
(For 0--20mA xmitter: use 16 bit R65535, 14 bit R16383, 12 bit R4095.)
RTOB
Convert to binary data format.
OUT
V2100
Store input EU value in V2100.
LD
K0
Load value of 0 into accumulator.
(If input less than 4mA.)
(This rung not used if input transmitter is 0--20mA.)
OUT
V2100
Store value of 0 in V2100
(This rung not used if input transmitter is 0--20mA.)
To Reset Track and Hold, write a value of one to the Track and Hold selection high
and low bits. When Track and Hold is Reset, the module will display the real--time
input value. When the selection is changed from Reset to Minimum Value or
Maximum Value, the input will start over as described previously.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
The input Track and Hold feature allows the individual inputs to be separately
configured to maintain their maximum or minimum data values. If No Track and
Hold is selected, the present real time value of the input will be stored in the input
data V--memory location. If Track and Hold Minimum Value is selected, the first
input value less than or equal to full scale will be read and maintained until a lower
value is measured, or until Track and Hold is Reset. If Maximum Value is selected,
the first input value greater than or equal to zero will be read and maintained until a
higher value is measured, or until Track and Hold is Reset.
15--26
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Track and Hold Example:
Number of Channels = 1 in, 1 out;
Data Format = binary in, binary out;
Input Resolution = 16 bit;
Input Track and Hold = channel 1 reset.
SP0
LD
K 8181
OUT
V7663
LDA
O2000
Rung 1, Module Configuration:
Input: binary data format, 1 channel.
Output: binary data format, 1 channel.
Module location: local base, slot 3.
Input data 1st memory location: V2000
Output data 1st memory location: V2020
Input resolution: 16 bit channel 1.
Input Track and Hold: reset channel 1.
OUT
V7673
LDA
O2020
OUT
V7703
LD
K2
OUT
V36403
LD
K3
OUT
V36423
C1
LD
K2
OUT
V36423
C3
LD
K3
OUT
V36423
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
C5
LD
K1
OUT
V36423
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
C1 loads value of 2 (binary 10) into the Track and Hold Selection
register. This sets input channel 1 for Track and Hold Maximum
Value. As the analog value varies, only a measured value higher than
the previously stored value will be written to V2000.
C3 loads a value of 3 (binary 11) into the Track and Hold Selection
register. This sets input channel 1 for Track and Hold Reset Value.
Real--time measured values will be written to V2000 until another
Track and Hold Selection is made.
C5 loads value of 1 (binary 01) into the Track and Hold Selection
register. This sets input channel 1 for Track and Hold Minimum Value.
As the analog value varies, only a measured value lower than the
previously stored stored will be written to V2000.
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Module
16 Bit Output
Resolution
Since the 4--20mA output module has 16
bit resolution, the analog signal is
converted into 65536 (216) counts
ranging from 0 -- 65535. For example, a
4mA signal would be 0, and a 20mA
signal would be 65535. This is
equivalent to a binary value of 0000
0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111,
or 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal. The
diagram shows how this relates to the
signal range.
Each count can also be expressed in
terms of the signal level by using the
equation shown.
4 -- 20mA
15--27
16 Bit Output Resolution
20mA
4mA
0
65535
Resolution = H − L
65535
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
16mA / 65535 = 0.244A per count
Digital and Analog Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
Output Data Value the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
troubleshooting. The table provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
Conversion
A = Amin + [(D)(Amax --Amin) / (Dmax)]
D = (A--Amin)(Dmax) / (Amax --Amin)
S A = Analog current output value
S Amax = Maximum analog value
S Amin = Minimum analog value
S D = Digital value from PLC CPU
S Dmax = Maximum digital value
Resolution
Output
Range
If you know the digital
value...
If you know the analog
signal level...
16 bit
0--65535
4--20mA
A = 4 + [(D)(16) / 65535]
D = (A-- 4)(65535) / 16
For example, if you need to produce an
analog output signal of 10mA, you could
use the formula to easily determine the
digital value (D) that should be stored in
the V-memory location that contains the
data for output.
Output Value
Comparisons:
Analog, Digital,
Engineering Units
D = (10 − 4) 65535
16
D = (6)(4095.94)
D = 24576
The following table shows how the input analog, digital, and engineering unit values
are related to each other. The example is a measurement of pressure from 0.0 to
140.0 PSI, using a multiplier of 10 for one implied decimal place.
Digital
16 Bit
E.U.
20
65535
1400
12
32768
700
10
24576
525
4
0
0
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
Analog
(mA)
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
15--28
F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Calculating the
Digital Output
Value
Your program must calculate the digital
value to send to the 16 bit analog output
module. There are many ways to do this,
but most applications are understood
more easily if you use measurements in
engineering units. This is accomplished
by using the conversion formula shown.
You may have to make adjustments to
the formula depending on the scale you
choose for the engineering units.
D = EU
D max
EU H − EU L
D = digital value
EU = engineering units
EUH = engineering unit range
high limit
EUL = engineering unit range
low limit
Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 140.0 PSI. By
using the formula, you can determine the digital value that should be sent to the
module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 52.5 PSI. Notice the
formula divides by 10, because the BCD representation of 52.5 includes a multiplier
of 10 to allow for the implied decimal. The division corrects for the multiplier.
D = 10EU
Calculating Output
Data;
Engineering Units
Conversion
D max
10(EU H − EU L)
D = 525 65535
10(140)
D = 24576
The example program shows how you would write the program to perform the
engineering unit conversion to output 16 bit data format 0 -- 65535. This example
assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values, including a
multiplier of 10, in BCD format and stored it in V2120 for output channel 1.
Output Engineering Unit Conversion / Output Data Calculation Example:
Data Format = binary;
Channel 1 data memory location = V2020;
Channel 1 engineering units = 0 to 140psi.
Note, this example uses SP1 (which is always on) as a permissive contact for the
engineering unit conversion. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
F2-8AD4DA--1
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
SP1
LD
V2120
Load output channel data value into accumulator;
BCD EU value X 10 for implied decimal.
BIN
Convert from BCD to binary data format.
MULB
KFFFF
Multiply by 65535;
FFFF hex = 65535;
16 bit maximum digital value.
DIVB
K578
Divide by 1400;
578 hex = 1400;
EU range X 10 for implied decimal.
OUT
V2020
Store output digital value in V2020.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2
8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out
Analog Voltage Comb.
In This Chapter. . . .
— Module Specifications
— Connecting the Field Wiring
— Module Operation
— Special V--Memory Locations
— Writing the Control Program
16
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
16--2
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Module Specifications
The F2-8AD4DA--2 Analog Voltage
Input/Output module provides several
hardware features:
S Analog inputs and outputs are
optically isolated from the PLC
logic.
S The module has a removable
terminal block so the module can
be easily removed or changed
without disconnecting the wiring.
S Updates all input and output
channels in one scan.
S On-board active analog filtering,
two CISC microcontrollers, and
CPLD provide digital signal
processing to maintain precision
analog measurements in noisy
environments.
S Low-power CMOS design requires
only 80mA from an external
18--26.4 VDC power supply.
S Input resolution is independently
adjustable for each channel. Users
may select 12 bit, 14 bit, or 16 bit.
S Output resolution is 16 bit.
S Each input can be independently
configured to return the present
value, or to track and hold the
maximum or minimum value.
S No jumper settings.
Hardware
and Firmware
Requirements
IN /
OUT
ANALOG
F2-8AD4DA--2
18-- 26.4VDC
@80mA
ANALOG
8 IN 0-- 5/0-- 10V
4 OUT 0-- 5/0-- 10V
0V
OUT2
OUT3
0V
IN2
IN3
0V
IN6
IN7
24V
OUT1
0V
OUT4
IN1
0V
IN4
IN5
0V
IN8
F2-8AD4DA--2
The F2--8AD4DA--2 analog voltage input/output module requires one of the
following components as a CPU or controller:
Base Type
CPU/Controller Firmware Version
D2--250--1
4.40 or later
D2--260
2.20 or later
H2--WPLC
pending
Expansion
D2--CM
1.30 or later
Remote I/O
H2--EBC(--F)
2.1.441 or later
H2--EBC100
4.0.457 or later
H2--PBC
pending
Local
Profibus Slave
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
16--3
Input
Specifications
Number of Input Channels
8, single ended (one common)
Input Range
0 to 5V, 0 to 10V
Input Resolution / Value of LSB
12, 14, or 16 bit; selectable
12 bit, 0 to 5V = 1.22mV
12 bit, 0 to 10V = 2.44mV
14 bit, 0 to 5V = 305V
14 bit, 0 to 10V = 610V
16 bit, 0 to 5V = 76V
16 bit, 0 to 10V = 152V
Input Impedance
1ΜΩ ±5%
Maximum Continuous Overload
±100V
Filter Characteristics
Active low pass; --3dB @ 80Hz
PLC Input Update Rate
8 channels per scan (max. with pointers; local base)
Sample Duration Time (note 1)
2ms @ 12bit; 5.52ms @ 14bit; 23ms @ 16bit
Conversion Time (note 1)
12 bit = 1.5ms per channel
14 bit = 6ms per channel
16 bit = 25ms per channel
Conversion Method
Over sampling successive approximation
Accuracy vs. temperature
25ppm/C max.
Input Stability and Repeatability
±0.03% of range (after 30 minute warm--up)
Input Inaccuracy
0.1% of range max.
Linearity Error (end to end)
12 bit = ±2 count max. (±0.06% of range)
14 bit = ±10 count max. (±0.06% of range)
16 bit = ±40 count max. (±0.06% of range)
Monotonic with no missing codes
Full Scale Calibration Error
±0.07% of range max.
(not including offset error)
Offset Calibration Error
±0.025% of range max.
Common Mode Rejection
--90dB min. @ DC; --150dB min. @ 50/60Hz
Crosstalk
±0.025% of range max. @ DC, 50/60Hz
Note 1: The values listed for Sample Duration Time and Conversion Time are for a single channel, and do not include
PLC scan times.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-8AD4DA--2 Analog
Voltage Input/Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the
module meets your application requirements.
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
16--4
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Output
Specifications
Number of Output Channels
4
Output Range
0 to 5V, 0 to 10V
Output Resolution
16 bit; 76V/bit @ 0 to 5V; 152V/bit @ 0 to 10V
Output Type
Voltage sourcing/sinking at 10mA max.
Output Signal at Power--Up & Power--Down
0V
Output Impedance
0.2Ω typical
External Load Impedance
>1000Ω
Maximum Capacitive Load
0.1F
Allowed Load Type
Grounded
Max. Continuous Output Overload
Limited to 15mA typical
Type of Output Protection
15VDC Peak Output Voltage
(clamped by transient voltage suppressor)
PLC Output All Channel Update Time
4ms (local base)
Output Settling Time
0 5ms max
0.5ms
max.;; 5s min
min. (full scale change)
Output Ripple
0.005% of full scale
Accuracy vs. Temperature
±25ppm/C max. full scale calibration change (±0.0025% of
range / C)
Output Stability and Repeatability
±1 LSB after 10 minute warm--up typical
Output Inaccuracy
0.1% of range max.
Linearity Error (end to end)
±33 count max. (±0.05% of full scale)
Monotonic with no missing codes
Full Scale Calibration Error
±0.07% of range max.
(not including offset error)
Offset Calibration Error
±0.03% of range max.
Crosstalk at DC, 50/60Hz
--70dB or 0.025% of full scale
One count in the specifications table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 65536).
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Digital Input and Output Points Required
32 point (X) inputs
32 point (Y) outputs
Power Budget Requirement
35mA @ 5VDC (supplied by base)
External Power Supply Requirement
18 to 26.4VDC, 80mA maximum
Field Side to Logic Side Isolation
1800VAC applied for 1 second (100% tested)
Insulation Resistance
>10M @ 500VDC
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_C (32 to 140F); IEC60068--2--14
Storage Temperature
--20 to 70_C (--4 to 158F); IEC60068--2--1, --2--2, --2--14
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing); IEC60068--2--30
Environmental Air
No corrosive gases permitted; EN61131--2 pollution degree 1
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2; IEC60068--2--6
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2; IEC60068--2--27
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3--304; IEC61000--4--2, --4--3, --4--4
Emissions
EN61000--6--4 (conducted and radiated RF emissions)
Module Location
Any non--CPU slot in local, expansion, or Ethernet remote base
of DL205 system with DL250--1 or DL260 CPU
Field Wiring
19 point removable terminal block included.
Optional remote wiring using ZL--CM20 remote feed--through
terminal block module and ZL--2CBL2# cable.
Agency Approvals
UL508; UL6079--15 Zone 2; CE (EN61131--2)
Module Placement The F2-8AD4DA--2 analog voltage input/output module requires 32 discrete input
and Configuration and 32 discrete output points.
Requirements
The module can be installed in any non--CPU slot of D2--250--1 or D2--260 local
bases, D2--CM expansion bases, H2--EBC(100)(--F) Ethernet remote bases,
H2--PBC Profibus slave bases, or H2--WPLCx--xx WinPLC bases.
The module is NOT supported by D2--230, D2--240, or D2--250 CPUs. It is also
not supported by D2--RMSM and D2--RSSS remote I/O master/slave modules.
The available power budget may also be a limiting factor. Check the user manual for
your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power
budget and number of local, local expansion, or Ethernet remote I/O points.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
General Module
Specifications
16--5
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
16--6
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Connecting the Field Wiring
Wiring Guidelines
User Power
Supply
Requirements
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you
should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some ideas to
consider:
S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
S
Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not
ground the shield at both the module and the load or source.
S
Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches,
or transformers. This may cause noise problems.
S
Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the
risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose
the correct method for your application.
S
Unused inputs should be shorted together and connected to common.
The F2-8AD4DA--2 requires at least one field-side power supply. You may use the
same or separate power sources for the module supply and transmitter supply. The
module requires 80mA at 18--26.4VDC.
The DL205 bases have built-in 24VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of
current. You may use this instead of a separate supply if you are using only a few
modules.
It is desirable in some situations to power the transmitters separately in a location
remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the transmitter’s power supply meets
the voltage and current requirements, and the transmitter supply’s minus (--) side is
connected together with the module supply’s minus (--) side.
WARNING: If you are using the 24VDC base power supply, make sure you
calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable
system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.
The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise,
you may notice ±3--5 counts of instability in the analog input data if you use the
base power supply. If this is unacceptable, you should try one of the following:
1. Use a separate linear power supply.
2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw
terminal marked “G” on the base.
By using these methods, the input stability is rated at ±0.03% of range.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
The F2-8AD4DA--2 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier.
Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector
from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring.
The diagram shows one power supply for both the module and the I/O signal loops.
If you want to use separate module and transmitter power supplies, connect the
power supply 0V commons together.
Internal module wiring
+
Voltage output
Channel 1
-+
Out 1
Out 2
Voltage output
Channel 2
-+
COM
Out 3
Out 4
COM
See Note 2
Voltage output
Channel 3
-+
Voltage output
Channel 4
-3--wire voltage
transmitter
User 24VDC
supply
24VDC+
0VDC--
See Note 1
+
Voltage transmitter
shield, Channel 3
See Note 1
2--wire voltage
transmitter
COM
In 3
See Note 2
COM
In 5
Voltage transmitter
shield, Channel 5
See Note 1
COM
Transmitter power
See Note 2
In 8
AC or DC
4--wire voltage
transmitter
IN /
OUT
ANALOG
Isolated analog
circuit power
CH1 DAC
CH2 DAC
CH3 DAC
CH4 DAC
CH1 ADC
CH2 ADC
CH3 ADC
CH4 ADC
CH5 ADC
CH6 ADC
F2-8AD4DA--2
18-- 26.4V
80mA
8 INPUTS
0-- 5/1-- 10V
4 OUTPUTS
0-- 5/0-- 10V
0V
OUT2
OUT3
0V
IN2
IN3
0V
CH7 ADC
IN6
CH8 ADC
IN7
24V
OUT1
0V
OUT4
IN1
0V
IN4
IN5
0V
IN8
Voltage transmitter
shield, Channel 8
See Note 1
Isolated analog
circuit common
Note 1: Connect shields to ground at their respective sources; do not ground both ends of shield.
Note 2: Short unused inputs together and connect them to common.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
Wiring Diagram
16--7
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
16--8
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Module Operation
Input Channel
Scanning
Sequence
(Pointer Method)
If this module is installed in a local (CPU) base, you can obtain all eight channels of
input data in one scan. However, you can obtain only one channel of input data per
scan if the module is installed in an expansion, remote I/O, or Profibus slave base.
System with
analog module
installed in local
(CPU) base.
Scan
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Write to Outputs
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8
Scan N+6
Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8
Scan N+7
Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8
System with analog
module installed in
expansion, remote I/O
or Profibus slave base.
Scan
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Write to Outputs
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Scan N
Ch 1
Scan N+1
Ch 2
Scan N+2
Ch 3
Scan N+6
Ch 7
Scan N+7
Ch 8
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
If this module is installed in a local (CPU) base, you can update all four output
channels in every scan. However, you can update only one channel of output data
per scan if the module is installed in an expansion, remote I/O, or Profibus slave
base. The timing is synchronized with the timing of reading the input channels, so
you can update each output channel data every eight scans.
System with
analog module
installed in local
(CPU) base.
Scan
Read inputs
Execute Application Program
Calculate the data
Write data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Write to outputs
System with analog
module installed in
expansion, remote I/O
or Profibus slave base.
Scan
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Write to Outputs
Scan N
Ch 1
Scan N+1
Ch 2
Scan N+2
Ch 3
Scan N+3
Ch 4
Scan N+6
Scan N+7
Scan N+8
Ch 1
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
Output Channel
Update Sequence
(Pointer Method)
16--9
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
16--10
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Understanding
the I/O
Assignments
The F2-8AD4DA--2 module appears to the CPU as 32 discrete input and 32
discrete output points. These points provide the data value, channel identification,
and settings for resolution, range, and track and hold feature. You may never have
to use these bits, but it may help you understand the data format.
Since all input and output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very
easy to determine the location of the data words that will be assigned to the module.
F2-8AD4DA--2
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
8pt
Input
8pt
Input
16pt
Output
32pt In
32pt Out
8pt
Output
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
Y0
-Y17
X20 Y20
--X57 Y57
V40500
V40400
V40401
MSB
X
3
7
Input Data Bits
MSB
X
5
7
V40402
LSB
X
2
0
LSB
X
4
0
MSB
Y
3
7
MSB
Y
5
7
Y60
-Y67
V40503
V40501
Output Data Bits
V40502
LSB
Y
2
0
LSB
Y
4
0
Within these memory word locations, the individual bits represent specific
information about the analog signal. (Your specific memory locations may vary,
depending upon the slot location of the F2--8AD4DA--2 module.)
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
16--11
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Depending
upon
the
resolution
selected, up to 16 bits of the first input
word represent the analog data in binary
format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
8
256
1
2
9
512
2
4
10
1024
3
8
11
2048
4
16
12
4096
5
32
13
8192
6
64
14
16384
7
128
15
32768
The second input word is not usable by
the programmer.
Output Bits
All 16 bits of the first output word
represent the analog data in binary
format.
Bit
Value
Bit
Value
0
1
8
256
1
2
9
512
2
4
10
1024
3
8
11
2048
4
16
12
4096
5
32
13
8192
6
64
14
16384
7
128
15
32768
The second output word is not usable by
the programmer.
V40401
MSB
X
5
7
-1
5
X
5
6
-1
4
X
5
5
-1
3
X
5
4
-1
2
X
2
0
-0
= data bits
V40402
MSB
X
2
1
-1
X
2
2
-2
X
2
3
-3
X
2
4
-4
X
2
5
-5
X
2
6
-6
X
2
7
-7
X
3
0
-8
X
3
1
-9
XX
33
32
-- -11
10
X
3
4
-1
2
X
3
5
-1
3
X
3
6
-1
4
X
3
7
-1
5
LSB
XX
55
32
-- -11
10
X
5
1
-9
X
5
0
-8
X
4
7
-7
LSB
X
4
6
-6
X
4
5
-5
X
4
4
-4
X
4
3
-3
X
4
2
-2
X
4
1
-1
X
4
0
-0
= not usable by programmer
V40501
MSB
Y
3
7
-1
5
Y
3
6
-1
4
Y
3
5
-1
3
Y
3
4
-1
2
YY
33
32
-- -11
10
Y
5
6
-1
4
Y
5
5
-1
3
Y
3
0
-8
Y
2
7
-7
Y
2
6
-6
Y
2
5
-5
Y
2
4
-4
Y
2
3
-3
Y
5
4
-1
2
YY
55
32
-- -11
10
Y
2
2
-2
Y
2
1
-1
Y
2
0
-0
= data bits
V40502
MSB
Y
5
7
-1
5
Y
3
1
-9
LSB
Y
5
1
-9
Y
5
0
-8
Y
4
7
-7
Y
4
6
-6
LSB
Y
4
5
-5
Y
4
4
-4
Y
4
3
-3
Y
4
2
-2
Y
4
1
-1
Y
4
0
-0
= not usable by programmer
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
Input Bits
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
16--12
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Special V--Memory Locations
The DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs have special V--memory locations assigned to
each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. These
V--memory locations specify:
S
the numbers of input and output channels to scan;
S
the storage locations for the input and output data;
S
the resolution selections for the inputs;
S
the range selections for the inputs and outputs;
S
the track and hold selections for the inputs.
The tables below show the special V--memory used by the CPUs for the CPU base
and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 is the module slot next to the CPU or
D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module slot two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and
so on. The CPU needs to examine the pointer values at these locations only after a
mode transition.
Module
Configuration
Registers
CPU Base: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of I/O Channels
Enabled & Format
V7660
V7661
V7662
V7663
V7664
V7665
V7666
V7667
Input Pointer
V7670
V7671
V7672
V7673
V7674
V7675
V7676
V7677
Output Pointer
V7700
V7701
V7702
V7703
V7704
V7705
V7706
V7707
Input Resolutions
V36400 V36401 V36402 V36403 V36404 V36405 V36406 V36407
Input and Output
Ranges
V36410 V36411 V36412 V36413 V36414 V36415 V36416 V36417
Input Track & Hold
V36420 V36421 V36422 V36423 V36424 V36425 V36426 V36427
Expansion Base D2--CM #1: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of I/O Channels V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007
Enabled & Format
Input Pointer
V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017
Output Pointer
V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027
Input Resolutions
V36030 V36031 V36032 V36033 V36034 V36035 V36036 V36037
Input and Output
Ranges
V36040 V36041 V36042 V36043 V36044 V36045 V36046 V36047
Input Track & Hold
V36050 V36051 V36052 V36053 V36054 V36055 V36056 V36057
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
16--13
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of I/O Channels V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107
Enabled & Format
Input Pointer
V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117
Output Pointer
V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127
Input Resolutions
V36130 V36131 V36132 V36133 V36134 V36135 V36136 V36137
Input and Output
Ranges
V36140 V36141 V36142 V36143 V36144 V36145 V36146 V36147
Input Track & Hold
V36150 V36151 V36152 V36153 V36154 V36155 V36156 V36157
Expansion Base D2--CM #3: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of I/O Channels V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207
Enabled & Format
Input Pointer
V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217
Output Pointer
V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227
Input Resolutions
V36230 V36231 V36232 V36233 V36234 V36235 V36236 V36237
Input and Output
Ranges
V36240 V36241 V36242 V36243 V36244 V36245 V36246 V36247
Input Track & Hold
V36250 V36251 V36252 V36253 V36254 V36255 V36256 V36257
Expansion Base D2--CM #4: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. of I/O Channels V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307
Enabled & Format
Input Pointer
V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317
Output Pointer
V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327
Input Resolutions
V36330 V36331 V36332 V36333 V36334 V36335 V36336 V36337
Input and Output
Ranges
V36340 V36341 V36342 V36343 V36344 V36345 V36346 V36347
Input Track & Hold
V36350 V36351 V36352 V36353 V36354 V36355 V36356 V36357
Number of I/O
Channels Enabled
& Data Format
Load this V--memory location with a constant that specifies the number of enabled
I/O channels and their data formats. The upper byte applies to the inputs, and the
lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibbles specify the data
formats, and the least significant nibbles specify the number of channels enabled.
No. Channels Enabled
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BCD Input
K01xx K02xx K03xx K04xx K04xx K06xx K07xx K08xx
Binary Input
K81xx K82xx K83xx K84xx K85xx K86xx K87xx K88xx
BCD Output
Kxx01 Kxx02 Kxx03 Kxx04 n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Binary Output
Kxx81 Kxx82 Kxx83 Kxx84 n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
Expansion Base D2--CM #2: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
16--14
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Input Resolution
Selection Bits
Each of the eight input channels can be individually disabled or configured for 12,
14, or 16 bit resolution.
V36403: (specific memory location varies depending upon base and slot location)
15
14
13
12
R-- R-- R-- R-8H 8L 7H 7L
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-6H 6L 5H 5L 4H 4L 3H 3L
3
2
1
0
R-- R-- R-- R-2H 2L 1H 1L
RnH = Resolution channel n High bit
RnL = Resolution channel n Low bit
Input Resolution Select
RnH
RnL
12 bit
0
0
14 bit
0
1
16 bit
1
0
Disabled
1
1
Example: Input channels 1--4 are 12 bit, channel 5 is 14 bit, and channel 6 is 16 bit,
and channels 7 and 8 are disabled; V36403 = F900(hex):
15
14
13
12
R-- R-- R-- R-8H 8L 7H 7L
1 1
1
1
11
10
8
7
6
5
4
R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-6H 6L 5H 5L 4H 4L 3H 3L
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
F
Input and Output
Range Selection
Bits
9
9
3
2
1
0
R-- R-- R-- R-2H 2L 1H 1L
0
0
0
0
0
0
The range of the eight input channels can be collectively set for 0--5V or for 0--10V.
The range of the four output channels can also be collectively set for either of the
same two voltage ranges.
V36413: (specific memory location varies depending upon base and slot location)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
OR --
--
--
--
--
--
--
IR
IR = Input Range
OR = Output Range
Input/Output Range
IR
OR
0 to 5V
0
0
0 to 10V
1
1
Example: Input channel range is 0 to 5V, and output channel range is 0 to 10V;
V36413 = 100(hex):
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
OR --
--
--
--
--
--
--
IR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
1
0
0
0
16--15
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
V36423: (specific memory location varies depending upon base and slot location)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
T-- T-8H 8L
T-- T-7H 7L
T-- T-6H 6L
T-- T-5H 5L
T-- T-4H 4L
T-- T-3H 3L
T-- T-2H 2L
T-- T-1H 1L
TnH = Track and hold channel n High bit
TnL = Track and hold channel n Low bit
Track and Hold Select
TnH TnL Result
No Track and Hold
0
0
returns real time input value
Track and Hold Minimum Value 0
1
maintains lowest measured value
Track and Hold Max. Value
1
0
maintains highest measured value
Reset Track and Hold Value
1
1
resets previously held input value
Example: Input channel track and hold settings: ch 1--3 = none, ch 4--5 =
minimum, ch 6--7 = maximum, ch 8 = reset; V36423 = E940(hex):
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
T-- T-8H 8L
1
1
T-- T-7H 7L
1
0
E
T-- T-6H 6L
1
0
T-- T-5H 5L
0
1
9
T-- T-4H 4L
0
1
T-- T-3H 3L
0
0
4
T-- T-2H 2L
0
0
T-- T-1H 1L
0
0
0
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
The track and hold feature for each of the eight inputs can be individually configured
Input Track and
Hold Selection Bits for minimum, maximum, no hold, or reset held value. This configuration can be
changed “on the fly” while the program is running.
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
16--16
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Writing the Control Program
Configuring the
Module to Read /
Write I/O
(Pointer Method)

230
 

240 250-- 1 260
These example programs show how to configure the special V--memory locations
to read/write data from/to the I/O module. The module configuration rung needs to
be read by the CPU only after a mode transition, and does not need to be read every
scan. Place the configuration rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial
stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to
read the input data and write the output data to/from the V-memory locations. Once
the input data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data, compare the data
against preset values, and so forth.
V2000 and V2020 are used as the beginning of the data areas in the example, but
you can use any user V-memory locations. Also, these examples assume that the
module is installed in slot 3 of the CPU base. You should use the pointer V-memory
locations determined by the layout of your application.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
16--17
Number of Channels = 8 in, 4 out;
Data Format = binary in, BCD out;
Input Resolution = 16 bit;
Input/Output Range = 0--5V in, 0--10V out;
Input Track and Hold = none; real time value.
SP0
LD
K 8804
OUT
V7663
LDA
O2000
OUT
V7673
LDA
O2020
OUT
V7703
LD
KAAAA
OUT
V36403
LD
K100
OUT
V36413
LD
K0
OUT
V36423
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. (See note below regarding data format.)
The upper byte applies to the inputs. The most significant nibble
(MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN
selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to scan.
The lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibble
(MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN
selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4) to scan.
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
number of input and output channels.
This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the input data. For example, the O2000 entered here
would mean: Ch1 -- V2000, V2001; Ch2 -- V2002, V2003; Ch3 -V2004, V2005; Ch4 -- V2006, V2007; Ch5 -- V2010, V2011; ... Ch8 -V2016, V2017. For each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and
the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in
BCD mode. The 2nd word contains the most significant digit in those
cases.
The constant O2000 is stored here. V7673 is assigned to slot 3 and
acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this
location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.
This constant designates the first V-memory location where the
analog output data will be stored. For example, the O2020 entered
here would mean: Ch1 -- V2020, V2021; Ch2 -- V2022, V2023; Ch3 -V2024, V2025; Ch4 -- V2026, V2027. For each channel, the 1st word
holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14
or 16 bit data in BCD mode. The 2nd word contains the most
significant digit in those cases.
The constant O2020 is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and
acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this
location to determine exactly where to obtain the output data.
Loads a constant that specifies the resolutions for each of the input
channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per
channel, as described in “Input Resolutions Selection Bits”. The
constant AAAA(hex) configures each of the eight inputs for 16 bits.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
resolution settings for each of the input channels.
Loads a constant that specifies the voltage ranges for the input and
output channels. This constant is determined by the values of two
bits, as described in “Input and Output Range Selection Bits”. The
constant 100(hex) configures the inputs for 0--5V, and outputs for
0--10V.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains voltage
ranges for the input and output channels.
Loads a constant that specifies the track and hold settings for each
of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of
two bits per channel, as described in “Track and Hold Selection Bits”.
The constant 0 configures each of the eight input channels for no
track and hold.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the track
and hold settings for each of the input channels.
NOTE:
Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to
be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V--memory word (16 bits) available for
the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either
binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD format’s
maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format.
Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
Module Configuration Example 1:
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
16--18
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Module Configuration Example 2:
Number of Channels = 4 in, 4 out;
Data Format = binary in, BCD out;
Input Resolution = 14 bit;
Input/Output Range = 0--10V in, 0--5V out;
Input Track and Hold = all inputs maximum value.
SP0
LD
K 8404
OUT
V7663
LDA
O2000
OUT
V7673
LDA
O2020
OUT
V7703
LD
K5555
OUT
V36403
LD
K1
OUT
V36413
LD
KAAAA
OUT
V36423
NOTE:
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. (See note below regarding data format.)
The upper byte applies to the inputs. The most significant nibble
(MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN
selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to scan.
The lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibble
(MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN
selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4) to scan.
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
number of input and output channels.
This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the input data. For example, the O2000 entered here
would mean: Ch1 -- V2000, V2001; Ch2 -- V2002, V2003; Ch3 -V2004, V2005; Ch4 -- V2006, V2007. For each channel, the 1st word
holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14
or 16 bit data in BCD mode. The 2nd word contains the most
significant digit in those cases.
The constant O2000 is stored here. V7673 is assigned to slot 3 and
acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this
location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.
This constant designates the first V-memory location where the
analog output data will be stored. For example, the O2020 entered
here would mean: Ch1 -- V2020, V2021; Ch2 -- V2022, V2023; Ch3 -V2024, V2025; Ch4 -- V2026, V2027. For each channel, the 1st word
holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14
or 16 bit data in BCD mode. The 2nd word contains the most
significant digit in those cases.
The constant O2020 is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and
acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this
location to determine exactly where to obtain the output data.
Loads a constant that specifies the resolutions for each of the input
channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per
channel, as described in “Input Resolutions Selection Bits”. The
constant 5555(hex) configures each of the eight inputs for 14 bits.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
resolution settings for each of the input channels.
Loads a constant that specifies the voltage ranges for the input and
output channels. This constant is determined by the values of two
bits, as described in “Input and Output Range Selection Bits”. The
constant 1 configures the inputs for 0--10V, and the outputs for 0--5V.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains voltage
ranges for the input and output channels.
Loads a constant that specifies the track and hold settings for each
of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of
two bits per channel, as described in “Track and Hold Selection Bits”.
The constant AAAA(hex) configures each of the eight inputs to track
and hold the maximum value.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the track
and hold settings for each of the input channels.
Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to
be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V--memory word (16 bits) available for
the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either
binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD format’s
maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format.
Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
16--19
Number of Channels = 4 in, 2 out;
Data Format = BCD in, BCD out;
Input Resolution = 12 bit;
Input/Output Range = 0--10V in, 0--10V out;
Input Track and Hold = all inputs minimum value.
SP0
LD
K 0402
OUT
V7663
LDA
O2000
OUT
V7673
LDA
O2020
OUT
V7703
LD
K0
OUT
V36403
LD
K101
OUT
V36413
LD
K5555
OUT
V36423
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and
the data format. (See note below regarding data format.) (The leading
zero in this LD instruction is shown for clarity. It can be entered by the
programmer, but it will be dropped by the programming software.
The upper byte applies to the inputs. The most significant nibble
(MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN
selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to scan.
The lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibble
(MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN
selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4) to scan.
Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
number of input and output channels.
This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be
used to store the input data. For example, the O2000 entered here
would mean: Ch1 -- V2000, V2001; Ch2 -- V2002, V2003; Ch3 -V2004, V2005; Ch4 -- V2006, V2007. For each channel, the 1st word
holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14
or 16 bit data in BCD mode. The 2nd word contains the most
significant digit in those cases.
The constant O2000 is stored here. V7673 is assigned to slot 3 and
acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this
location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.
This constant designates the first V-memory location where the
analog output data will be stored. For example, the O2020 entered
here would mean: Ch1 -- V2020, V2021; Ch2 -- V2022, V2023. For
each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is
needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD mode. The
2nd word contains the most significant digit in those cases.
The constant O2020 is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and
acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this
location to determine exactly where to obtain the output data.
Loads a constant that specifies the resolutions for each of the input
channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per
channel, as described in “Input Resolutions Selection Bits”. The
constant 0 configures each of the eight inputs for 12 bits.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the
resolution settings for each of the input channels.
Loads a constant that specifies the voltage ranges for the input and
output channels. This constant is determined by the values of two
bits, as described in “Input and Output Range Selection Bits”. The
constant 101(hex) configures both the inputs and outputs for 0--10V.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains voltage
ranges for the input and output channels.
Loads a constant that specifies the track and hold settings for each
of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of
two bits per channel, as described in “Track and Hold Selection Bits”.
The constant 5555(hex) configures each of the eight input channels
to track and hold the minimum value.
Special V--memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the track
and hold settings for each of the input channels.
NOTE:
Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to
be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V--memory word (16 bits) available for
the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either
binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD format’s
maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format.
Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
Module Configuration Example 3:
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
16--20
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Module 12 Bit
Input Resolution
When the module voltage inputs are
configured for 12 bit resolution, the
analog signal is converted into 4096
(212) counts ranging from 0 -- 4095. For
example, a 0V signal would be 0, and a
full scale 5V or 10V signal would be
4095. This is equivalent to a binary value
of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or
000 to FFF hexadecimal. The diagram
shows how this relates to the signal
range.
Each count can also be expressed in
terms of the signal level by using the
equation shown.
Module 14 Bit
Input Resolution
When the module voltage inputs are
configured for 14 bit resolution, the
analog signal is converted into 16384
(214) counts ranging from 0 -- 16383. For
example, a 0V signal would be 0, and a
full scale 5V or 10V signal would be
16383. This is equivalent to a binary
value of 00 0000 0000 0000 to 11 1111
1111 1111, or 0000 to 3FFF
hexadecimal. The diagram shows how
this relates to the signal range.
Each count can also be expressed in
terms of the signal level by using the
equation shown.
Module 16 Bit
Input Resolution
When the module voltage inputs are
configured for 16 bit resolution, the
analog signal is converted into 65536
(216) counts ranging from 0 -- 65535. For
example, a 0V signal would be 0, and a
full scale 5V or 10V signal would be
65535. This is equivalent to a binary
value of 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111
1111 1111 1111, or 0000 to FFFF
hexadecimal. The diagram shows how
this relates to the signal range.
Each count can also be expressed in
terms of the signal level by using the
equation shown.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
12 Bit Resolution
0 -- 5V/10V
5V/10V
0V
0
4095
12 Bit Resolution = H − L
4095
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
5V / 4095 = 1.22mV per count
10V / 4095 = 2.44mV per count
14 Bit Resolution
0 -- 5V/10V
5V/10V
0V
0
16383
14 Bit Resolution = H − L
16383
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
5V / 16383 = 305A per count
10V / 16383 = 610A per count
16 Bit Input Resolution
0 -- 5V/10V
5V/10V
0V
0
65535
16 Bit Resolution = H − L
65535
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
5V / 65535 = 76A per count
10V / 65535 = 152A per count
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
16--21
A = (D)(Amax) / (Dmax)
D = (A)(Dmax) / (Amax)
S A = Analog value from current transmitter
S Amax = Maximum analog value
S D = Digital value of input provided to PLC CPU
S Dmax = Maximum digital value
Resolution
Input
Range
If you know the digital
value...
If you know the analog
signal level...
12 bit
0--4095
0--5V
A = (D)(5) / 4095
D = (A)(4095) / 5
0--10V
A = (D)(10) / 4095
D = (A)(4095) / 10
14 bit
0--16383
0--5V
A = (D)(5) / 16383
D = (A)(16383) / 5
0--10V
A = (D)(10) / 16383
D = (A)(16383) / 10
16 bit
0--65535
0--5V
A = (D)(5) / 65535
D = (A)(65535) / 5
0--10V
A = (D)(10) / 65535
D = (A)(65535) / 10
For example, if you are using 0--10V
range with 16 bit resolution, and have
measured the signal at 6V, you could use
the formula to easily determine the digital
value (D) that should be stored in the
V-memory location that contains the data.
D = (A) 65535
10
D = (6) (6553.5)
D = 39321
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
Analog and Digital Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
Input Data Value
troubleshooting. The table provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
Conversion
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
16--22
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Scaling the
Input Data
Most applications require measurements in engineering units, which provide more
meaningful data. For input ranges with a minimum value of zero, this can be
accomplished by using the conversion formulas shown below:
EU = (A)(EUH -- EUL) / (Amax)
EU = (D)(EUH -- EUL) / (Dmax)
S
A = analog value from current transmitter
S
D = digital value of input provided to PLC CPU
S
EU = engineering units
S
EUH = engineering units high value
S
EUL = engineering units low value
The following examples show a 16 bit measurement of pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to
140.0. You need to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place
when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld
programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 6.3V, 0--10V transmitter, 16 bit resolution, should yield 88.2 PSI
Example without multiplier
EU = (D)
Example with multiplier
EU H − EU L
D max
EU = (10)(D)
EU H − EU L
D max
EU = (41287) 140 − 0
65535
EU = (10)(41287) 140 − 0
65535
EU = 88
EU = 882
Handheld Display
Handheld Display
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0088
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0882
This value is more accurate
NOTE:
Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to
be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V--memory word (16 bits) available for
the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either
binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD format’s
maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format.
Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
16--23
Data Format = BCD;
Channel 1 data memory location = V2000;
Channel 1 resolution = 12 bits;
Channel 1 engineering units = 0.0 to 140.0psi;
Channel 1 input device = 0--5V or 0--10V transmitter.
Note, this example uses SP1 (which is always on) as a permissive contact for the
engineering unit conversion. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
SP1
LD
V2000
Load input channel 1 digital value into accumulator.
MUL
K1400
Multiply by 1400;
EU range X 10 for implied decimal.
DIV
K4095
Divide by 4095;
12 bit digital range.
OUT
V2100
Store input EU value in V2100.
Input Engineering Unit Conversion Example 2:
Data Format = binary;
Channel 1 data memory location = V2000;
Channel 1 resolution = 14 bits;
Channel 1 engineering units = 0.0 to 140.0psi;
Channel 1 input device = 0--5V or 0--10V transmitter.
Note, this example uses SP1 (which is always on) as a permissive contact for the
engineering unit conversion. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
SP1
LD
V2000
Load input channel 1 digital value into accumulator.
MULB
K578
Multiply by 1400 [hex 578];
EU range X 10 for implied decimal.
DIVB
K3FFF
Divide by 16383 [hex 3FFF];
14 bit digital range for 0--20mA.
(Use 65535 [KFFFF] for 16 bit; 4095 [KFFF] for 12 bit.)
OUT
V2100
Store input EU value in V2100.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
Input Engineering Unit Conversion Example 1:
16--24
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
Input Engineering Unit Conversion Example 3:
Data Format = binary;
Channel 1 data memory location = V2000;
Channel 1 resolution = 16 bits;
Channel 1 engineering units = 0.0 to 140.0psi;
Channel 1 input device = 0--5V or 0--10V transmitter.
Note, this example uses SP1 (which is always on) as a permissive contact for the
engineering unit conversion. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
SP1
Using the Input
Track and Hold
Feature
LD
V2000
Load input channel 1 digital value into accumulator.
BTOR
Convert from binary to real data format.
MULR
R1400
Multiply by 1400;
EU range X 10 for implied decimal.
DIVR
R65535
Divide by 65535;
16 bit digital range.
(Use R16383 for 14 bit; R4095 for 12 bit.)
RTOB
Convert to binary data format.
OUT
V2100
Store input EU value in V2100.
The input Track and Hold feature allows the individual inputs to be separately
configured to maintain their maximum or minimum data values. If No Track and
Hold is selected, the present real time value of the input will be stored in the input
data V--memory location. If Track and Hold Minimum Value is selected, the first
input value less than or equal to full scale will be read and maintained until a lower
value is measured, or until Track and Hold is Reset. If Maximum Value is selected,
the first input value greater than or equal to zero will be read and maintained until a
higher value is measured, or until Track and Hold is Reset.
To Reset Track and Hold, write a value of one to the Track and Hold selection high
and low bits. When Track and Hold is Reset, the module will display the real--time
input value. When the selection is changed from Reset to Minimum Value or
Maximum Value, the input will start over as described previously.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
16--25
Number of Channels = 1 in, 1 out;
Data Format = binary in, binary out;
Input Resolution = 16 bit;
Input/Output Range = 0--10V in, 0--10V out;
Input Track and Hold = channel 1 reset.
SP0
LD
K 8181
OUT
V7663
LDA
O2000
Rung 1, Module Configuration:
Input: binary data format, 1 channel.
Output: binary data format, 1 channel.
Module location: local base, slot 3.
Input data 1st memory location: V2000.
Output data 1st memory location: V2020.
Input resolution: 16 bit channel 1.
Input/Output range: 0--10V in, 0--10V out.
Input Track and Hold: reset channel 1.
OUT
V7673
LDA
O2020
OUT
V7703
LD
K2
OUT
V36403
LD
K101
OUT
V36413
LD
K3
OUT
V36423
C1
LD
K2
OUT
V36423
C3
LD
K3
OUT
V36423
C5
LD
K1
OUT
V36423
C1 loads value of 2 (binary 10) into the Track and Hold Selection
register. This sets input channel 1 for Track and Hold Maximum
Value. As the analog value varies, only a measured value higher than
the previously stored value will be written to V2000.
C3 loads a value of 3 (binary 11) into the Track and Hold Selection
register. This sets input channel 1 for Track and Hold Reset Value.
Real--time measured values will be written to V2000 until another
Track and Hold Selection is made.
C5 loads value of 1 (binary 01) into the Track and Hold Selection
register. This sets input channel 1 for Track and Hold Minimum Value.
As the analog value varies, only a measured value lower than the
previously stored stored will be written to V2000.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
Track and Hold Example:
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
16--26
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Module
16 Bit Output
Resolution
Since the voltage output module has 16
bit resolution, the analog signal is
converted into 65536 (216) counts
ranging from 0 -- 65535. For example, a
0V signal would be 0, and a full scale 5V
or 10V signal would be 65535. This is
equivalent to a binary value of 0000
0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111,
or 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal. The
diagram shows how this relates to the
signal range.
Each count can also be expressed in
terms of the signal level by using the
equation shown.
16 Bit Output Resolution
0 -- 5V/10V
5V/10V
0V
0
65535
16 Bit Resolution = H − L
65535
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
5V / 65535 = 76A per count
10V / 65535 = 152A per count
Digital and Analog Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and
Output Data Value the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or
troubleshooting. For output ranges with a minimum value of zero, the table below
Conversion
provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
A = (D)(Amax) / (Dmax)
D = (A)(Dmax) / (Amax)
S A = Analog current output value
S Amax = Maximum analog value
S D = Digital value from PLC CPU
S Dmax = Maximum digital value
Resolution
Output
Range
If you know the digital
value...
If you know the analog
signal level...
16 bit
0--65535
0--5V
A = (D)(5) / 65535
D = (A)(65535) / 5
0--10V
A = (D)(10) / 65535
D = (A)(65535) / 10
For example, if you need to produce a 6V
analog output signal with a 0--10V output
range, you could use the formula to easily
determine the digital value (D) that should
be stored in the V-memory location that
contains the data for output.
Output Value
Comparisons:
Analog, Digital,
Engineering Units
D = (6) 65535
10
D = (6)(6553.5)
D = 39321
The following table shows how the input analog, digital, and engineering unit values
are related to each other. The example is a measurement of pressure from 0.0 to
140.0 PSI, using a multiplier of 10 for one implied decimal place.
Analog Range
0--5V
0--10V
Digital
16 Bit
5
10
65535
1400
2.5
5
32768
700
0
0
0
0
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
EU
E.U.
F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Your program must calculate the digital
value to send to the 16 bit analog output
module. There are many ways to do this,
but most applications are understood
more easily if you use measurements in
engineering units. This is accomplished
by using the conversion formula shown.
You may have to make adjustments to
the formula depending on the scale you
choose for the engineering units.
D = EU
D max
EU H − EU L
D = digital value
EU = engineering units
EUH = engineering unit range
high limit
EUL = engineering unit range
low limit
Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 140.0 PSI. By
using the formula, you can determine the digital value that should be sent to the
module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 52.5 PSI. Notice the
formula divides by 10, because the BCD representation of 52.5 includes a multiplier
of 10 to allow for the implied decimal. The division corrects for the multiplier.
D = 10EU
Calculating Output
Data;
Engineering Units
Conversion
D max
10(EU H − EU L)
D = (525) 65535
10(140)
D = 24576
The example program shows how you would write the program to perform the
engineering unit conversion to output 16 bit data format 0 -- 65535. This example
assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values, including a
multiplier of 10, in BCD format and stored it in V2120 for output channel 1.
Output Engineering Unit Conversion / Output Data Calculation Example:
Data Format = binary;
Channel 1 data memory location = V2020;
Channel 1 engineering units = 0 to 140psi.
Note, this example uses SP1 (which is always on) as a permissive contact for the
engineering unit conversion. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
SP1
LD
V2120
Load output channel data value into accumulator;
BCD EU value X 10 for implied decimal.
BIN
Convert from BCD to binary data format.
MULB
KFFFF
Multiply by 65535;
FFFF hex = 65535;
16 bit maximum digital value.
DIVB
K578
Divide by 1400;
578 hex = 1400;
EU range X 10 for implied decimal.
OUT
V2020
Store output digital value in V2020.
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
F2-8AD4DA--2
8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
Calculating the
Digital Output
Value
16--27
DL205 Discrete I/O
Memory Map
In This Chapter. . . .
— X Input / Y Output Bit Map
— Control Relay Bit Map
—Remote I/O Bit Map (DL260 Only)
A
Appendix A
Discrete I/O Memory Map
A--2
DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Maps
X Input / Y Output Bit Map
This table provides a listing of the individual Input points associated with each V-memory address bit for
the DL230, DL240, and DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs. The DL250--1 ranges apply to the DL250.
MSB
DL230 / DL240 / DL250--1 / DL260 Input (X) and Output (Y) Points
LSB
Y Output Address
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
X Input
Address
017
016
015
014
013
012
011
010
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
000
V40400
V40500
037
036
035
034
033
032
031
030
027
026
025
024
023
022
021
020
V40401
V40501
057
056
055
054
053
052
051
050
047
046
045
044
043
042
041
040
V40402
V40502
077
076
075
074
073
072
071
070
067
066
065
064
063
062
061
060
V40403
V40503
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
V40404
V40504
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
V40405
V40505
157
156
155
154
153
152
151
150
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
V40406
V40506
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
V40407
V40507
217
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
V40410
V40510
237
236
235
234
233
232
231
230
227
226
225
224
223
222
221
220
V40411
V40511
257
256
255
254
253
252
251
250
247
246
245
244
243
242
241
240
V40412
V40512
277
276
275
274
273
272
271
270
267
266
265
264
263
262
261
260
V40413
V40513
317
316
315
314
313
312
311
310
307
306
305
304
303
302
301
300
V40414
V40514
337
336
335
334
333
332
331
330
327
326
325
324
323
322
321
320
V40415
V40515
357
356
355
354
353
352
351
350
347
346
345
344
343
342
341
340
V40416
V40516
377
376
375
374
373
372
371
370
367
366
365
364
363
362
361
360
V40417
V40517
417
416
415
414
413
412
411
410
407
406
405
404
403
402
401
400
V40420
V40520
437
436
435
434
433
432
431
430
427
426
425
424
423
422
421
420
V40421
V40521
457
456
455
454
453
452
451
450
447
446
445
444
443
442
441
440
V40422
V40522
477
476
475
474
473
472
471
470
467
466
465
464
463
462
461
460
V40423
V40523
MSB
DL240 / DL250--1 / DL260 Input (X) and Output (Y) Points
MSB
LSB
DL250--1 / DL260 Additional Input (X) and Output (Y) Points
LSB
517
516
515
514
513
512
511
510
507
506
505
504
503
502
501
500
V40424
V40524
537
536
535
534
533
532
531
530
527
526
525
524
523
522
521
520
V40425
V40525
557
556
555
554
553
552
551
550
547
546
545
544
543
542
541
540
V40426
V40526
577
576
575
574
573
572
571
570
567
566
565
564
563
562
561
560
V40427
V40527
617
616
615
614
613
612
611
610
607
606
605
604
603
602
601
600
V40430
V40530
637
636
635
634
633
632
631
630
627
626
625
624
623
622
621
620
V40431
V40531
657
656
655
654
653
652
651
650
647
646
645
644
643
642
641
640
V40432
V40532
677
676
675
674
673
672
671
670
667
666
665
664
663
662
661
660
V40433
V40533
717
716
715
714
713
712
711
710
707
706
705
704
703
702
701
700
V40434
V40534
737
736
735
734
733
732
731
730
727
726
725
724
723
722
721
720
V40435
V40535
757
756
755
754
753
752
751
750
747
746
745
744
743
742
741
740
V40436
V40536
777
776
775
774
773
772
771
770
767
766
765
764
763
762
761
760
V40437
V40537
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Map
DL260 Additional Input (X) and Output (Y) Points (cont’d)
LSB
Y Output AdAd
dress
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
X Input
Address
1017
1016
1015
1014
1013
1012
1011
1010
1007
1006
1005
1004
1003
1002
1001
1000
V40440
V40540
1037
1036
1035
1034
1033
1032
1031
1030
1027
1026
1025
1024
1023
1022
1021
1020
V40441
V40541
1057
1056
1055
1054
1053
1052
1051
1050
1047
1046
1045
1044
1043
1042
1041
1040
V40442
V40542
1077
1076
1075
1074
1073
1072
1071
1070
1067
1066
1065
1064
1063
1062
1061
1060
V40443
V40543
1116
1115
1114
1113
1112
1111
1110
1107
1106
1105
1104
1103
1102
1101
1100
V40444
V40544
1136
1135
1134
1133
1132
1131
1130
1127
1126
1125
1124
1123
1122
1121
1120
V40445
V40545
1157
1156
1155
1154
1153
1152
1151
1150
1147
1146
1145
1144
1143
1142
1141
1140
V40446
V40546
1177
1176
1175
1174
1173
1172
1171
1170
1167
1166
1165
1164
1163
1162
1161
1160
V40447
V40547
1217
1216
1215
1214
1213
1212
1211
1210
1207
1206
1205
1204
1203
1202
1201
1200
V40450
V40550
1237
1236
1235
1234
1233
1232
1231
1230
1227
1226
1225
1224
1223
1222
1221
1220
V40451
V40551
1257
1256
1255
1254
1253
1252
1251
1250
1247
1246
1245
1244
1243
1242
1241
1240
V40452
V40552
1277
1276
1275
1274
1273
1272
1271
1270
1267
1266
1265
1264
1263
1262
1261
1260
V40453
V40553
1317
1316
1315
1314
1313
1312
1311
1310
1307
1306
1305
1304
1303
1302
1301
1300
V40454
V40554
1337
1336
1335
1334
1333
1332
1331
1330
1327
1326
1325
1324
1323
1322
1321
1320
V40455
V40555
1357
1356
1355
1354
1353
1352
1351
1350
1347
1346
1345
1344
1343
1342
1341
1340
V40456
V40556
1377
1376
1375
1374
1373
1372
1371
1370
1367
1366
1365
1364
1363
1362
1361
1360
V40457
V40557
1417
1416
1415
1414
1413
1412
1411
1410
1407
1406
1405
1404
1403
1402
1401
1400
V40460
V40560
1437
1436
1435
1434
1433
1432
1431
1430
1427
1426
1425
1424
1423
1422
1421
1420
V40461
V40561
1457
1456
1455
1454
1453
1452
1451
1450
1447
1446
1445
1444
1443
1442
1441
1440
V40462
V40562
1477
1476
1475
1474
1473
1472
1471
1470
1467
1466
1465
1464
1463
1462
1461
1460
V40463
V40563
1517
1516
1515
1514
1513
1512
1511
1510
1507
1506
1505
1504
1503
1502
1501
1500
V40464
V40564
1537
1536
1535
1534
1533
1532
1531
1530
1527
1526
1525
1524
1523
1522
1521
1520
V40465
V40565
1557
1556
1555
1554
1553
1552
1551
1550
1547
1546
1545
1544
1543
1542
1541
1540
V40466
V40566
1577
1576
1575
1574
1573
1572
1571
1570
1567
1566
1565
1564
1563
1562
1561
1560
V40467
V40567
1617
1616
1615
1614
1613
1612
1611
1610
1607
1606
1605
1604
1603
1602
1601
1600
V40470
V40570
1637
1636
1635
1634
1633
1632
1631
1630
1627
1626
1625
1624
1623
1622
1621
1620
V40471
V40571
1657
1656
1655
1654
1653
1652
1651
1650
1647
1646
1645
1644
1643
1642
1641
1640
V40472
V40572
1677
1676
1675
1674
1673
1672
1671
1670
1667
1666
1665
1664
1663
1662
1661
1660
V40473
V40573
1717
1716
1715
1714
1713
1712
1711
1710
1707
1706
1705
1704
1703
1702
1701
1700
V40474
V40574
1737
1736
1735
1734
1733
1732
1731
1730
1727
1726
1725
1724
1723
1722
1721
1720
V40475
V40575
1757
1756
1755
1754
1753
1752
1751
1750
1747
1746
1745
1744
1743
1742
1741
1740
V40476
V40576
1777
1776
1775
1774
1773
1772
1771
1770
1767
1766
1765
1764
1763
1762
1761
1760
V40477
V40577
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Discrete I/O Memory Map
1117
1137
Appendix A
Discrete I/O Memory Map
MSB
A--3
Appendix A
Discrete I/O Memory Map
A--4
DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Maps
Control Relay Bit Map
This table provides a listing of the individual control relays associated with each V-memory address bit.
MSB
DL230 / DL240 / DL250 --1 / DL260 Control Relays (C)
LSB
Address
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
017
016
015
014
013
012
011
010
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
000
V40600
037
036
035
034
033
032
031
030
027
026
025
024
023
022
021
020
V40601
057
056
055
054
053
052
051
050
047
046
045
044
043
042
041
040
V40602
077
076
075
074
073
072
071
070
067
066
065
064
063
062
061
060
V40603
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
V40604
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
V40605
157
156
155
154
153
152
151
150
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
V40606
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
V40607
217
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
V40610
237
236
235
234
233
232
231
230
227
226
225
224
223
222
221
220
V40611
257
256
255
254
253
252
251
250
247
246
245
244
243
242
241
240
V40612
277
276
275
274
273
272
271
270
267
266
265
264
263
262
261
260
V40613
317
316
315
314
313
312
311
310
307
306
305
304
303
302
301
300
V40614
337
336
335
334
333
332
331
330
327
326
325
324
323
322
321
320
V40615
357
356
355
354
353
352
351
350
347
346
345
344
343
342
341
340
V40616
377
376
375
374
373
372
371
370
367
366
365
364
363
362
361
360
V40617
LSB
Address
MSB
Additional DL250--1 / DL260 Control Relays (C)
417
416
415
414
413
412
411
410
407
406
405
404
403
402
401
400
V40620
437
436
435
434
433
432
431
430
427
426
425
424
423
422
421
420
V40621
457
456
455
454
453
452
451
450
447
446
445
444
443
442
441
440
V40622
477
476
475
474
473
472
471
470
467
466
465
464
463
462
461
460
V40623
517
516
515
514
513
512
511
510
507
506
505
504
503
502
501
500
V40624
537
536
535
534
533
532
531
530
527
526
525
524
523
522
521
520
V40625
557
556
555
554
553
552
551
550
547
546
545
544
543
542
541
540
V40626
577
576
575
574
573
572
571
570
567
566
565
564
563
562
561
560
V40627
617
616
615
614
613
612
611
610
607
606
605
604
603
602
601
600
V40630
637
636
635
634
633
632
631
630
627
626
625
624
623
622
621
620
V40631
657
656
655
654
653
652
651
650
647
646
645
644
643
642
641
640
V40632
677
676
675
674
673
672
671
670
667
666
665
664
663
662
661
660
V40633
717
716
715
714
713
712
711
710
707
706
705
704
703
702
701
700
V40634
737
736
735
734
733
732
731
730
727
726
725
724
723
722
721
720
V40635
757
756
755
754
753
752
751
750
747
746
745
744
743
742
741
740
V40636
777
776
775
774
773
772
771
770
767
766
765
764
763
762
761
760
V40637
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Map
17
Additional DL250--1 / DL260 Control Relays (C)
16
15
14
13
12
1017 1016 1015 1014 1013 1012
11
1011
10
7
6
5
4
LSB
3
2
1
0
Address
1004 1003
1002 1001 1000
V40640
1037 1036 1035 1034 1033 1032 1031 1030 1027 1026 1025
1024 1023
1022 1021 1020
V40641
1057 1056 1055 1054 1053 1052 1051 1050 1047 1046 1045
1044 1043
1042 1041 1040
V40642
1077 1076 1075 1074 1073 1072 1071 1070 1067 1066 1065
1064 1063
1062 1061 1060
V40643
1117
1116
1115
1114
1113
1112
1111
1110
1107
1106
1105
1104
1103
1102
1101
1100
V40644
1137
1136
1135
1134
1133
1132
1131
1130
1127
1126
1125
1124
1123
1122
1121
1120
V40645
1157
1156
1155
1154
1153
1152
1151
1150
1147
1146
1145
1144
1143
1142
1141
1140
V40646
1177
1176
1175
1174
1173
1172
1171
1170
1167
1166
1165
1164
1163
1162
1161
1160
V40647
1217 1216 1215 1214 1213 1212
1211
1210 1207 1206 1205
1204 1203
1202 1201 1200
V40650
1237 1236 1235 1234 1233 1232 1231 1230 1227 1226 1225
1224 1223
1222 1221 1220
V40651
1257 1256 1255 1254 1253 1252 1251 1250 1247 1246 1245
1244 1243
1242 1241 1240
V40652
1277 1276 1275 1274 1273 1272 1271 1270 1267 1266 1265
1264 1263
1262 1261 1260
V40653
1317 1316 1315 1314 1313 1312
1310 1307 1306 1305
1304 1303
1302 1301 1300
V40654
1337 1336 1335 1334 1333 1332 1331 1330 1327 1326 1325
1324 1323
1322 1321 1320
V40655
1357 1356 1355 1354 1353 1352 1351 1350 1347 1346 1345
1344 1343
1342 1341 1340
V40656
1377 1376 1375 1374 1373 1372 1371 1370 1367 1366 1365
1364 1363
1362 1361 1360
V40657
1417 1416 1415 1414 1413 1412
1410 1407 1406 1405
1404 1403
1402 1401 1400
V40660
1437 1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 1431 1430 1427 1426 1425
1424 1423
1422 1421 1420
V40661
1457 1456 1455 1454 1453 1452 1451 1450 1447 1446 1445
1444 1443
1442 1441 1440
V40662
1477 1476 1475 1474 1473 1472 1471 1470 1467 1466 1465
1464 1463
1462 1461 1460
V40663
1517 1516 1515 1514 1513 1512
1510 1507 1506 1505
1504 1503
1502 1501 1500
V40664
1537 1536 1535 1534 1533 1532 1531 1530 1527 1526 1525
1524 1523
1522 1521 1520
V40665
1557 1556 1555 1554 1553 1552 1551 1550 1547 1546 1545
1544 1543
1542 1541 1540
V40666
1577 1576 1575 1574 1573 1572 1571 1570 1567 1566 1565
1564 1563
1562 1561 1560
V40667
1617 1616 1615 1614 1613 1612
1610 1607 1606 1605
1604 1603
1602 1601 1600
V40670
1637 1636 1635 1634 1633 1632 1631 1630 1627 1626 1625
1624 1623
1622 1621 1620
V40671
1657 1656 1655 1654 1653 1652 1651 1650 1647 1646 1645
1644 1643
1642 1641 1640
V40672
1677 1676 1675 1674 1673 1672 1671 1670 1667 1666 1665
1664 1663
1662 1661 1660
V40673
1717 1716 1715 1714 1713 1712
1311
1411
1511
1611
1710 1707 1706 1705
1704 1703
1702 1701 1700
V40674
1737 1736 1735 1734 1733 1732 1731 1730 1727 1726 1725
1711
1724 1723
1722 1721 1720
V40675
1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745
1744 1743
1742 1741 1740
V40676
1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765
1764 1763
1762 1761 1760
V40677
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Discrete I/O Memory Map
1010 1007 1006 1005
Appendix A
Discrete I/O Memory Map
MSB
A--5
Appendix A
Discrete I/O Memory Map
A--6
DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Maps
This portion of the table shows additional Control Relays points available with the DL260.
MSB
17
DL260 Additional Control Relays (C)
16
15
14
13
12
2017 2016 2015 2014 2013 2012
11
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Address
2010 2007 2006 2005
2004 2003
2002 2001 2000
V40700
2037 2036 2035 2034 2033 2032 2031 2030 2027 2026 2025
2024 2023
2022 2021 2020
V40701
2057 2056 2055 2054 2053 2052 2051 2050 2047 2046 2045
2044 2043
2042 2041 2040
V40702
2077 2076 2075 2074 2073 2072 2071 2070 2067 2066 2065
2064 2063
2062 2061 2060
V40703
2117
2116
2115
2114
2113
2112
2011
10
LSB
2107 2106 2105
2104 2103
2102 2101 2100
V40704
2137 2136 2135 2134 2133 2132 2131 2130 2127 2126 2125
2111
2124 2123
2122 2121 2120
V40705
2157 2156 2155 2154 2153 2152 2151 2150 2147 2146 2145
2144 2143
2142 2141 2140
V40706
2177 2176 2175 2174 2173 2172 2171 2170 2167 2166 2165
2164 2163
2162 2161 2160
V40707
2217 2216 2215 2214 2213 2212
2210 2207 2206 2205
2204 2203
2202 2201 2200
V40710
2237 2236 2235 2234 2233 2232 2231 2230 2227 2226 2225
2224 2223
2222 2221 2220
V40711
2257 2256 2255 2254 2253 2252 2251 2250 2247 2246 2245
2244 2243
2242 2241 2240
V40712
2277 2276 2275 2274 2273 2272 2271 2270 2267 2266 2265
2264 2263
2262 2261 2260
V40713
2317 2316 2315 2314 2313 2312
2310 2307 2306 2305
2304 2303
2302 2301 2300
V40714
2337 2336 2335 2334 2333 2332 2331 2330 2327 2326 2325
2324 2323
2322 2321 2320
V40715
2357 2356 2355 2354 2353 2352 2351 2350 2347 2346 2345
2344 2343
2342 2341 2340
V40716
2377 2376 2375 2374 2373 2372 2371 2370 2367 2366 2365
2364 2363
2362 2361 2360
V40717
2417 2416 2415 2414 2413 2412
2211
2311
2411
2110
2410 2407 2406 2405
2404 2403
2402 2401 2400
V40720
2437 2436 2435 2434 2433 2432 2431 2430 2427 2426 2425
2424 2423
2422 2421 2420
V40721
2457 2456 2455 2454 2453 2452 2451 2450 2447 2446 2445
2444 2443
2442 2441 2440
V40722
2477 2476 2475 2474 2473 2472 2471 2470 2467 2466 2465
2464 2463
2462 2461 2460
V40723
2517 2516 2515 2514 2513 2512
2510 2507 2506 2505
2504 2503
2502 2501 2500
V40724
2537 2536 2535 2534 2533 2532 2531 2530 2527 2526 2525
2524 2523
2522 2521 2520
V40725
2557 2556 2555 2554 2553 2552 2551 2550 2547 2546 2545
2544 2543
2542 2541 2540
V40726
2577 2576 2575 2574 2573 2572 2571 2570 2567 2566 2565
2564 2563
2562 2561 2560
V40727
2617 2616 2615 2614 2613 2612
2610 2607 2606 2605
2604 2603
2602 2601 2600
V40730
2637 2636 2635 2634 2633 2632 2631 2630 2627 2626 2625
2624 2623
2622 2621 2620
V40731
2657 2656 2655 2654 2653 2652 2651 2650 2647 2646 2645
2644 2643
2642 2641 2640
V40732
2677 2676 2675 2674 2673 2672 2671 2670 2667 2666 2665
2664 2663
2662 2661 2660
V40733
2717 2716 2715 2714 2713 2712
2710 2707 2706 2705
2704 2703
2702 2701 2700
V40734
2737 2736 2735 2734 2733 2732 2731 2730 2727 2726 2725
2724 2723
2722 2721 2720
V40735
2757 2756 2755 2754 2753 2752 2751 2750 2747 2746 2745
2744 2743
2742 2741 2740
V40736
2777 2776 2775 2774 2773 2772 2771 2770 2767 2766 2765
2764 2763
2762 2761 2760
V40737
2511
2611
2711
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Map
17
DL260 Additional Control Relays (C)
16
15
14
13
12
3017 3016 3015 3014 3013 3012
11
7
6
5
4
LSB
3
2
1
0
Address
3010 3007 3006 3005
3004 3003
3002 3001 3000
V40740
3037 3036 3035 3034 3033 3032 3031 3030 3027 3026 3025
3024 3023
3022 3021 3020
V40741
3057 3056 3055 3054 3053 3052 3051 3050 3047 3046 3045
3044 3043
3042 3041 3040
V40742
3077 3076 3075 3074 3073 3072 3071 3070 3067 3066 3065
3064 3063
3062 3061 3060
V40743
3117
3116
3115
3114
3113
3112
3011
10
(cont’d)
3111
3104 3103
3102 3101 3100
V40744
3124 3123
3122 3121 3120
V40745
3157 3156 3155 3154 3153 3152 3151 3150 3147 3146 3145
3144 3143
3142 3141 3140
V40746
3177 3176 3175 3174 3173 3172 3171 3170 3167 3166 3165
3164 3163
3162 3161 3160
V40747
3217 3216 3215 3214 3213 3212
3210 3207 3206 3205
3204 3203
3202 3201 3200
V40750
3237 3236 3235 3234 3233 3232 3231 3230 3227 3226 3225
3224 3223
3222 3221 3220
V40751
3257 3256 3255 3254 3253 3252 3251 3250 3247 3246 3245
3244 3243
3242 3241 3240
V40752
3277 3276 3275 3274 3273 3272 3271 3270 3267 3266 3265
3264 3263
3262 3261 3260
V40753
3317 3316 3315 3314 3313 3312
3310 3307 3306 3305
3304 3303
3302 3301 3300
V40754
3337 3336 3335 3334 3333 3332 3331 3330 3327 3326 3325
3324 3323
3322 3321 3320
V40755
3357 3356 3355 3354 3353 3352 3351 3350 3347 3346 3345
3344 3343
3342 3341 3340
V40756
3377 3376 3375 3374 3373 3372 3371 3370 3367 3366 3365
3364 3363
3362 3361 3360
V40757
3417 3416 3415 3414 3413 3412
3410 3407 3406 3405
3404 3403
3402 3401 3400
V40760
3437 3436 3435 3434 3433 3432 3431 3430 3427 3426 3425
3424 3423
3422 3421 3420
V40761
3457 3456 3455 3454 3453 3452 3451 3450 3447 3446 3445
3444 3443
3442 3441 3440
V40762
3477 3476 3475 3474 3473 3472 3471 3470 3467 3466 3465
3464 3463
3462 3461 3460
V40763
3517 3516 3515 3514 3513 3512
3510 3507 3506 3505
3504 3503
3502 3501 3500
V40764
3537 3536 3535 3534 3533 3532 3531 3530 3527 3526 3525
3524 3523
3522 3521 3520
V40765
3557 3556 3555 3554 3553 3552 3551 3550 3547 3546 3545
3544 3543
3542 3541 3540
V40766
3577 3576 3575 3574 3573 3572 3571 3570 3567 3566 3565
3564 3563
3562 3561 3560
V40767
3617 3616 3615 3614 3613 3612
3610 3607 3606 3605
3604 3603
3602 3601 3600
V40770
3637 3636 3635 3634 3633 3632 3631 3630 3627 3626 3625
3624 3623
3622 3621 3620
V40771
3657 3656 3655 3654 3653 3652 3651 3650 3647 3646 3645
3644 3643
3642 3641 3640
V40772
3677 3676 3675 3674 3673 3672 3671 3670 3667 3666 3665
3664 3663
3662 3661 3660
V40773
3717 3716 3715 3714 3713 3712
3710 3707 3706 3705
3704 3703
3702 3701 3700
V40774
3737 3736 3735 3734 3733 3732 3731 3730 3727 3726 3725
3724 3723
3722 3721 3720
V40775
3757 3756 3755 3754 3753 3752 3751 3750 3747 3746 3745
3744 3743
3742 3741 3740
V40776
3777 3776 3775 3774 3773 3772 3771 3770 3767 3766 3765
3764 3763
3762 3761 3760
V40777
3211
3311
3411
3511
3611
3711
3110
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Discrete I/O Memory Map
3107 3106 3105
3137 3136 3135 3134 3133 3132 3131 3130 3127 3126 3125
Appendix A
Discrete I/O Memory Map
MSB
A--7
Appendix A
Discrete I/O Memory Map
A--8
DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Maps
Remote I/O Bit Map (DL 260 only)
This table provides a listing of the individual remote I/O points associated with each V-memory address bit.
MSB
DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points
LSB
GX
Address
GY
Address
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
017
016
015
014
013
012
011
010
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
000
V40000
V40200
037
036
035
034
033
032
031
030
027
026
025
024
023
022
021
020
V40001
V40201
057
056
055
054
053
052
051
050
047
046
045
044
043
042
041
040
V40002
V40202
077
076
075
074
073
072
071
070
067
066
065
064
063
062
061
060
V40003
V40203
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
V40004
V40204
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
V40005
V40205
157
156
155
154
153
152
151
150
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
V40006
V40206
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
V40007
V40207
217
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
V40010
V40210
237
236
235
234
233
232
231
230
227
226
225
224
223
222
221
220
V40011
V40211
257
256
255
254
253
252
251
250
247
246
245
244
243
242
241
240
V40012
V40212
277
276
275
274
273
272
271
270
267
266
265
264
263
262
261
260
V40013
V40213
317
316
315
314
313
312
311
310
307
306
305
304
303
302
301
300
V40014
V40214
337
336
335
334
333
332
331
330
327
326
325
324
323
322
321
320
V40015
V40215
357
356
355
354
353
352
351
350
347
346
345
344
343
342
341
340
V40016
V40216
377
376
375
374
373
372
371
370
367
366
365
364
363
362
361
360
V40017
V40217
417
416
415
414
413
412
411
410
407
406
405
404
403
402
401
400
V40020
V40220
437
436
435
434
433
432
431
430
427
426
425
424
423
422
421
420
V40021
V40221
457
456
455
454
453
452
451
450
447
446
445
444
443
442
441
440
V40022
V40222
477
476
475
474
473
472
471
470
467
466
465
464
463
462
461
460
V40023
V40223
517
516
515
514
513
512
511
510
507
506
505
504
503
502
501
500
V40024
V40224
537
536
535
534
533
532
531
530
527
526
525
524
523
522
521
520
V40025
V40225
557
556
555
554
553
552
551
550
547
546
545
544
543
542
541
540
V40026
V40226
577
576
575
574
573
572
571
570
567
566
565
564
563
562
561
560
V40027
V40227
617
616
615
614
613
612
611
610
607
606
605
604
603
602
601
600
V40030
V40230
637
636
635
634
633
632
631
630
627
626
625
624
623
622
621
620
V40031
V40231
657
656
655
654
653
652
651
650
647
646
645
644
643
642
641
640
V40032
V40232
677
676
675
674
673
672
671
670
667
666
665
664
663
662
661
660
V40033
V40233
717
716
715
714
713
712
711
710
707
706
705
704
703
702
701
700
V40034
V40234
737
736
735
734
733
732
731
730
727
726
725
724
723
722
721
720
V40035
V40235
757
756
755
754
753
752
751
750
747
746
745
744
743
742
741
740
V40036
V40236
777
776
775
774
773
772
771
770
767
766
765
764
763
762
761
760
V40037
V40237
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Map
DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points
LSB
GX
Address
GY
Address
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1017
1016
1015
1014
1013
1012
1011
1010
1007
1006
1005
1004
1003
1002
1001
1000
V40040
V40240
1037
1036
1035
1034
1033
1032
1031
1030
1027
1026
1025
1024
1023
1022
1021
1020
V40041
V40241
1057
1056
1055
1054
1053
1052
1051
1050
1047
1046
1045
1044
1043
1042
1041
1040
V40042
V40242
1077
1076
1075
1074
1073
1072
1071
1070
1067
1066
1065
1064
1063
1062
1061
1060
V40043
V40243
1116
1115
1114
1113
1112
1111
1110
1107
1106
1105
1104
1103
1102
1101
1100
V40044
V40244
1136
1135
1134
1133
1132
1131
1130
1127
1126
1125
1124
1123
1122
1121
1120
V40045
V40245
1157
1156
1155
1154
1153
1152
1151
1150
1147
1146
1145
1144
1143
1142
1141
1140
V40046
V40246
1177
1176
1175
1174
1173
1172
1171
1170
1167
1166
1165
1164
1163
1162
1161
1160
V40047
V40247
1217
1216
1215
1214
1213
1212
1211
1210
1207
1206
1205
1204
1203
1202
1201
1200
V40050
V40250
1237
1236
1235
1234
1233
1232
1231
1230
1227
1226
1225
1224
1223
1222
1221
1220
V40051
V40251
1257
1256
1255
1254
1253
1252
1251
1250
1247
1246
1245
1244
1243
1242
1241
1240
V40052
V40252
1277
1276
1275
1274
1273
1272
1271
1270
1267
1266
1265
1264
1263
1262
1261
1260
V40053
V40253
1317
1316
1315
1314
1313
1312
1311
1310
1307
1306
1305
1304
1303
1302
1301
1300
V40054
V40254
1337
1336
1335
1334
1333
1332
1331
1330
1327
1326
1325
1324
1323
1322
1321
1320
V40055
V40255
1357
1356
1355
1354
1353
1352
1351
1350
1347
1346
1345
1344
1343
1342
1341
1340
V40056
V40256
1377
1376
1375
1374
1373
1372
1371
1370
1367
1366
1365
1364
1363
1362
1361
1360
V40057
V40257
1417
1416
1415
1414
1413
1412
1411
1410
1407
1406
1405
1404
1403
1402
1401
1400
V40060
V40260
1437
1436
1435
1434
1433
1432
1431
1430
1427
1426
1425
1424
1423
1422
1421
1420
V40061
V40261
1457
1456
1455
1454
1453
1452
1451
1450
1447
1446
1445
1444
1443
1442
1441
1440
V40062
V40262
1477
1476
1475
1474
1473
1472
1471
1470
1467
1466
1465
1464
1463
1462
1461
1460
V40063
V40263
1517
1516
1515
1514
1513
1512
1511
1510
1507
1506
1505
1504
1503
1502
1501
1500
V40064
V40264
1537
1536
1535
1534
1533
1532
1531
1530
1527
1526
1525
1524
1523
1522
1521
1520
V40065
V40265
1557
1556
1555
1554
1553
1552
1551
1550
1547
1546
1545
1544
1543
1542
1541
1540
V40066
V40266
1577
1576
1575
1574
1573
1572
1571
1570
1567
1566
1565
1564
1563
1562
1561
1560
V40067
V40267
1617
1616
1615
1614
1613
1612
1611
1610
1607
1606
1605
1604
1603
1602
1601
1600
V40070
V40270
1637
1636
1635
1634
1633
1632
1631
1630
1627
1626
1625
1624
1623
1622
1621
1620
V40071
V40271
1657
1656
1655
1654
1653
1652
1651
1650
1647
1646
1645
1644
1643
1642
1641
1640
V40072
V40272
1677
1676
1675
1674
1673
1672
1671
1670
1667
1666
1665
1664
1663
1662
1661
1660
V40073
V40273
1717
1716
1715
1714
1713
1712
1711
1710
1707
1706
1705
1704
1703
1702
1701
1700
V40074
V40274
1737
1736
1735
1734
1733
1732
1731
1730
1727
1726
1725
1724
1723
1722
1721
1720
V40075
V40275
1757
1756
1755
1754
1753
1752
1751
1750
1747
1746
1745
1744
1743
1742
1741
1740
V40076
V40276
1777
1776
1775
1774
1773
1772
1771
1770
1767
1766
1765
1764
1763
1762
1761
1760
V40077
V40277
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Discrete I/O Memory Map
1117
1137
Appendix A
Discrete I/O Memory Map
MSB
A--9
Appendix A
Discrete I/O Memory Map
A--10
DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Maps
MSB
DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points
LSB
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GX
Address
GY
Address
2017
2016
2015
2014
2013
2012
2011
2010
2007
2006
2005
2004
2003
2002
2001
2000
V40100
V40300
2037
2036
2035
2034
2033
2032
2031
2030
2027
2026
2025
2024
2023
2022
2021
2020
V40101
V40301
2057
2056
2055
2054
2053
2052
2051
2050
2047
2046
2045
2044
2043
2042
2041
2040
V40102
V40302
2077
2076
2075
2074
2073
2072
2071
2070
2067
2066
2065
2064
2063
2062
2061
2060
V40103
V40303
2117
2116
2115
2114
2113
2112
2111
2110
2107
2106
2105
2104
2103
2102
2101
2100
V40104
V40304
2137
2136
2135
2134
2133
2132
2131
2130
2127
2126
2125
2124
2123
2122
2121
2120
V40105
V40305
2157
2156
2155
2154
2153
2152
2151
2150
2147
2146
2145
2144
2143
2142
2141
2140
V40106
V40306
2177
2176
2175
2174
2173
2172
2171
2170
2167
2166
2165
2164
2163
2162
2161
2160
V40107
V40307
2217
2216
2215
2214
2213
2212
2211
2210
2207
2206
2205
2204
2203
2202
2201
2200
V40110
V40310
2237
2236
2235
2234
2233
2232
2231
2230
2227
2226
2225
2224
2223
2222
2221
2220
V40111
V40311
2257
2256
2255
2254
2253
2252
2251
2250
2247
2246
2245
2244
2243
2242
2241
2240
V40112
V40312
2277
2276
2275
2274
2273
2272
2271
2270
2267
2266
2265
2264
2263
2262
2261
2260
V40113
V40313
2317
2316
2315
2314
2313
2312
2311
2310
2307
2306
2305
2304
2303
2302
2301
2300
V40114
V40314
2337
2336
2335
2334
2333
2332
2331
2330
2327
2326
2325
2324
2323
2322
2321
2320
V40115
V40315
2357
2356
2355
2354
2353
2352
2351
2350
2347
2346
2345
2344
2343
2342
2341
2340
V40116
V40316
2377
2376
2375
2374
2373
2372
2371
2370
2367
2366
2365
2364
2363
2362
2361
2360
V40117
V40317
2417
2416
2415
2414
2413
2412
2411
2410
2407
2406
2405
2404
2403
2402
2401
2400
V40120
V40320
2437
2436
2435
2434
2433
2432
2431
2430
2427
2426
2425
2424
2423
2422
2421
2420
V40121
V40321
2457
2456
2455
2454
2453
2452
2451
2450
2447
2446
2445
2444
2443
2442
2441
2440
V40122
V40322
2477
2476
2475
2474
2473
2472
2471
2470
2467
2466
2465
2464
2463
2462
2461
2460
V40123
V40323
2517
2516
2515
2514
2513
2512
2511
2510
2507
2506
2505
2504
2503
2502
2501
2500
V40124
V40324
2537
2536
2535
2534
2533
2532
2531
2530
2527
2526
2525
2524
2523
2522
2521
2520
V40125
V40325
2557
2556
2555
2554
2553
2552
2551
2550
2547
2546
2545
2544
2543
2542
2541
2540
V40126
V40326
2577
2576
2575
2574
2573
2572
2571
2570
2567
2566
2565
2564
2563
2562
2561
2560
V40127
V40327
2617
2616
2615
2614
2613
2612
2611
2610
2607
2606
2605
2604
2603
2602
2601
2600
V40130
V40330
2637
2636
2635
2634
2633
2632
2631
2630
2627
2626
2625
2624
2623
2622
2621
2620
V40131
V40331
2657
2656
2655
2654
2653
2652
2651
2650
2647
2646
2645
2644
2643
2642
2641
2640
V40132
V40332
2677
2676
2675
2674
2673
2672
2671
2670
2667
2666
2665
2664
2663
2662
2661
2660
V40133
V40333
2717
2716
2715
2714
2713
2712
2711
2710
2707
2706
2705
2704
2703
2702
2701
2700
V40134
V40334
2737
2736
2735
2734
2733
2732
2731
2730
2727
2726
2725
2724
2723
2722
2721
2720
V40135
V40335
2757
2756
2755
2754
2753
2752
2751
2750
2747
2746
2745
2744
2743
2742
2741
2740
V40136
V40336
2777
2776
2775
2774
2773
2772
2771
2770
2767
2766
2765
2764
2763
2762
2761
2760
V40137
V40337
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Map
DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points
LSB
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GX
Address
GY
Address
3017
3016
3015
3014
3013
3012
3011
3010
3007
3006
3005
3004
3003
3002
3001
3000
V40140
V40340
3037
3036
3035
3034
3033
3032
3031
3030
3027
3026
3025
3024
3023
3022
3021
3020
V40141
V40341
3057
3056
3055
3054
3053
3052
3051
3050
3047
3046
3045
3044
3043
3042
3041
3040
V40142
V40342
3077
3076
3075
3074
3073
3072
3071
3070
3067
3066
3065
3064
3063
3062
3061
3060
V40143
V40343
3117
3116
3115
3114
3113
3112
3111
3110
3107
3106
3105
3104
3103
3102
3101
3100
V40144
V40344
3137
3136
3135
3134
3133
3132
3131
3130
3127
3126
3125
3124
3123
3122
3121
3120
V40145
V40345
3157
3156
3155
3154
3153
3152
3151
3150
3147
3146
3145
3144
3143
3142
3141
3140
V40146
V40346
3177
3176
3175
3174
3173
3172
3171
3170
3167
3166
3165
3164
3163
3162
3161
3160
V40147
V40347
3217
3216
3215
3214
3213
3212
3211
3210
3207
3206
3205
3204
3203
3202
3201
3200
V40150
V40350
3237
3236
3235
3234
3233
3232
3231
3230
3227
3226
3225
3224
3223
3222
3221
3220
V40151
V40351
3257
3256
3255
3254
3253
3252
3251
3250
3247
3246
3245
3244
3243
3242
3241
3240
V40152
V40352
3277
3276
3275
3274
3273
3272
3271
3270
3267
3266
3265
3264
3263
3262
3261
3260
V40153
V40353
3317
3316
3315
3314
3313
3312
3311
3310
3307
3306
3305
3304
3303
3302
3301
3300
V40154
V40354
3337
3336
3335
3334
3333
3332
3331
3330
3327
3326
3325
3324
3323
3322
3321
3320
V40155
V40355
3357
3356
3355
3354
3353
3352
3351
3350
3347
3346
3345
3344
3343
3342
3341
3340
V40156
V40356
3377
3376
3375
3374
3373
3372
3371
3370
3367
3366
3365
3364
3363
3362
3361
3360
V40157
V40357
3417
3416
3415
3414
3413
3412
3411
3410
3407
3406
3405
3404
3403
3402
3401
3400
V40160
V40360
3437
3436
3435
3434
3433
3432
3431
3430
3427
3426
3425
3424
3423
3422
3421
3420
V40161
V40361
3457
3456
3455
3454
3453
3452
3451
3450
3447
3446
3445
3444
3443
3442
3441
3440
V40162
V40362
3477
3476
3475
3474
3473
3472
3471
3470
3467
3466
3465
3464
3463
3462
3461
3460
V40163
V40363
3517
3516
3515
3514
3513
3512
3511
3510
3507
3506
3505
3504
3503
3502
3501
3500
V40164
V40364
3537
3536
3535
3534
3533
3532
3531
3530
3527
3526
3525
3524
3523
3522
3521
3520
V40165
V40365
3557
3556
3555
3554
3553
3552
3551
3550
3547
3546
3545
3544
3543
3542
3541
3540
V40166
V40366
3577
3576
3575
3574
3573
3572
3571
3570
3567
3566
3565
3564
3563
3562
3561
3560
V40167
V40367
3617
3616
3615
3614
3613
3612
3611
3610
3607
3606
3605
3604
3603
3602
3601
3600
V40170
V40370
3637
3636
3635
3634
3633
3632
3631
3630
3627
3626
3625
3624
3623
3622
3621
3620
V40171
V40371
3657
3656
3655
3654
3653
3652
3651
3650
3647
3646
3645
3644
3643
3642
3641
3640
V40172
V40372
3677
3676
3675
3674
3673
3672
3671
3670
3667
3666
3665
3664
3663
3662
3661
3660
V40173
V40373
3717
3716
3715
3714
3713
3712
3711
3710
3707
3706
3705
3704
3703
3702
3701
3700
V40174
V40374
3737
3736
3735
3734
3733
3732
3731
3730
3727
3726
3725
3724
3723
3722
3721
3720
V40175
V40375
3757
3756
3755
3754
3753
3752
3751
3750
3747
3746
3745
3744
3743
3742
3741
3740
V40176
V40376
3777
3776
3775
3774
3773
3772
3771
3770
3767
3766
3765
3764
3763
3762
3761
3760
V40177
V40377
DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10
Discrete I/O Memory Map
17
Appendix A
Discrete I/O Memory Map
MSB
A--11
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement